Home

Pelco VMX300 Server User Manual

1. es 174 PG es EW ERU ang ares gage atm wang hae nape pa hae ears ewes c oar ee een aeuewe cen ean E ee E MS E 174 Pape Habe Ola Map coetus Ges oo avg ath co Ga es Ere 4 wed Ao os Re ag ee wh ed wean Rhee dades oho ese V RPM 175 PO Ae og os gare een once oe a is 9 oa eee aie oo ate ee ee oa ete ee ee on oe oes one ee eee 176 Von a oes eneacaandascha a damien dee oie atacn Foes ornate es 4 olen aad gus ada ee Gos wes ee wes eee 176 vii RMMKMTCT 177 hemovea label moma Map a aceite oct eid ord ede dU ane eee REKE chee RDE A EAE ENTIS 177 Wrist j RMMETMMTCT 177 EOS BIEEEXEIOSSIBIB xe eb ore cn dz erPeterrer uv EORR coe ee dE Fer NEC Pees E N eee VALE UH NET CE 178 E dG VGUCS M NRTTTEERTTTENTTTTC aod cats eens saegebevouseasnnes Hacer dod pant eowsesweantedeyeeea case eas 179 asuccsibilcr MAMCCXCT X 180 Fixed Camera Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions 2 0 0 0 RII 181 PTZ Camera Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions RII 181 PelcoNet Device Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions 0 0 0 eee e eens 182 External Monitor Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions 0 00 2 0c ccc cette RR 183 DX9000 Read Property Exposed for Scripts and Expressions 0
2. 9 4 Mode Off w IP Address 0 0 0 0 MPEG 2 Port 0000 MPEG 4 Port 60000 Audio Port 55000 Optimize Encoder Parameters for Return Encoder Parameters to Software Decoding Factory Defaults Attempt to acquire an MPEG 2 stream and if it fails an MPEG 4 stream Decoding Attempt to acquire an MPEG 4 stream and if it fails an MPEG 2 stream C Attempt to acquire an MPEG 2 stream only Attempt to acquire an MPEG 4 stream only DK Cancel Figure 55 Encoding Decoding Tab for PelcoNet 4001A The PelcoNet 4001A supports MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 streaming Number of Simultaneous Streams VMX300 E can display multiple digital video windows for viewing the area under surveillance However the number of digital windows that can be displayed at one time is limited by the size and type of images selected for viewing Refer to Table B for an overview of the CPU workload and bandwidth amounts used for each type of vide stream the video in a custom window This table also includes a recommended maximum number of streams for each type MPEG 2 Enter the maximum number of MPEG 2 streams you want the encoder decoder to transmit at one time The default setting is the maximum number of MPEG 2 streams the encoder decoder is capable of transmitting without multicasting In order to di
3. 4 Name New Prompt Title Script Tag New Prompt r Prompt Text Place prompt text here Press lt Shift Enter gt or lt Control Enter gt to Force a new line Prompt Buttons Button Button Dismiss Text Action Dialog Button No 1 Edit ves v Button No 2 Edit C Yes Button No 3 Edit E Yes v Button No 4 Edit 1 Yes w Button No 5 Edit Py Yes Automatically press button after NA seconds Preview Figure 230 Add New Prompt Dialog Box 2 Name lype a unique descriptive name for the prompt you want to create Prompt names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Prompt names are not case sensitive A tag resembling the name appears in the Script Tag box If the name contains special characters they are omitted from the tag Spaces are replaced with underscores Leading digits are removed 3 Title Type a title for the prompt dialog box The title appears in the title bar at the top of the dialog box when the prompt is displayed on the VMX300 E client Prompt titles are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks 4 Script tag f you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type in a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most
4. NI Figure 246 Edit Label Properties Dialog Box a Text lype up to three lines of text as the label contents When you place the alarm event icon on a map this text will display in the label Each line of text can be at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks b Text properties Select the justification you want for the label s text All the lines of text will be justified the same Click Font to select the font for the label s text as well as display attributes like point size bold face and italics c Background Select the background you want for the label you are creating A transparent background allows the underlying map to show through An opaque background makes the label appear as a colored rectangle Click Select Color to choose the background color for an opaque label d Border Specify whether you want the label to have a border around it by selecting None or Single Line e Click OK The Edit Label Properties dialog box closes Source association The source association feature of the DX9000 DVR allows an operator to automatically retrieve archived video associated with an alarm or event without having to know which camera to load and without having to cue the video For example suppose Front Door Camera is connected to a DX9000 DVR You might associate Front Door Camera with an alarm that is triggered when the
5. 224 Delete an lanl EVE Category Luasuessenudenqodaes zUsebaexcoseeiuseateduedsdacqevuRPcdauuuei eed UM ECT EE 224 Alans Events ang Normal DObUlTellb BS e 23 duse zd peer EEESRILeird cer dad E edes aids rkbe sdd deiade 225 Adda New Alam or EVent 2S a ors itadtsruraeionu eae dd cee Somae eho unese tenes AAR A ORAA E ANAON 225 EOI NW USES SS a2ccutcencesetads sexncenededenesmacteteecuenesde cadeds sn8 bed nede deberans bepeesbiasens 230 Eee dS OP EUBUE ure nies PSSUNWETUqO NT aan et E E de saeuenieaarten a8 ELE PLE M eens bees 230 spud NEU C RMECTEETERTTETETOTOETRTUTNITTT TP TEPP E 231 Place an Alarmy Event con Ona Map aos easet caet ret b hate br ordea ANNAE E dte w s 231 WOVE ani clt im I IRIS RCETERETCTERERT asida NTN sE EaR 231 Sbale mA Sueno CO eee rtea r Ee E O NERE AE eM ORE NNR 237 Remove an Alarm Event Icon from a Map 0 anaana aeaea 232 Move an Alaim Event Lapel s sca emer acrior artt ndum Yue Fas das scaXce vis Eu EEE NTA ORADE LSN OAE 299 Seale dam Event ODE su semeumedsPUESSSPLESQGCINSxebtio sse RP eetiWdedsiefiseeESSIgRINe P PUEPSrORUN ROB 233 EGP Shea E Eo sosc2 canes ucenueet eons aan E E E E de caeueien arian ae ELM E RUE EE uds 234 Remove an Alarm Event Label suos doocsns barbed eaedd kent dsy trot bid ced odd Can SESE EMA decruuisaddddsenridd EER 234 Recipient Groups nnn been bebe bene bebe bet e eed 735 The Predefined Recipient Group 2 enn eben RR ee
6. X wT NVR Playback NVR Status NVR Setup NVR Config 528x432 704x576 Video source Please select a camera PelcoNet PELCO VIDEO TECHNOLOGIES FOR DIGITAL NETWORKS Time filter None From date 01 Jan 00 Es Fro To date E Toi Alarm time Refresh Done Figure 62 Embedded NVR300 Web Server NOTE To ensure that you can play an NVR300 recording through the VMX300 E make sure that the date time and time zone settings on the VMX300 E match those of the NVR300 To configure these settings on the NVR300 go to the Date and Time Properties dialog box and refer to the NVR300 Network Video Recorder Installation Operation manual C1553M B 4 05 ADD AN EXTERNAL MONITOR DEVICE The external monitor device driver supports any noncontrollable video destination such as a noncontrollable monitor Before you can add a device to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers External Monitor Devices 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New External Monitor dialog box appears You can also configure settings after you have added the monitor to the server configuration Right click the monitor and then select Edit from the p
7. Remote Port Figure 139 Communications Tab for Access Control Device IP Settings a Local IP The local IP is the IP address of the computer that the Access Control Device driver runs on Select the local IP from the drop down box b Local Port The local port is the port the Access Control Device driver uses to transmit commands Enter the local port C1553M B 4 05 113 114 c Protocol Remote IP Remote Port The remote device is the device the access control device is physically connected to If the access control device is connected to a PelcoNet device follow the instructions in step 1 If the access control device is connected to some other kind of device follow the instructions in step 2 1 PelcoNet Select the PelcoNet protocol from the Protocol drop down box If the PelcoNet device has a user name and password defined in the device settings you will be prompted to enter the user name and password before proceeding Enter the IP address of the PelcoNet device in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box select the port on the PelcoNet device that the access control device is connected to Select 1 if the access control device is connected to COM 1 on the PelcoNet device select 2 if the access control device is connected to COM 2 2 Other Select the desired transport protocol from the Protocol drop down box Enter the IP address of the networked device in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box enter the po
8. Reserved for internal use by system Monto Reserved for internal use by system Pest Reserved for internal use by system MomentaryKey 1 The MOM key is being pressed by the operator Use this property to trigger an alarm or event Example You might define the alarm event expression as follows Keyboard1 MomentaryKey 1 Then you can define an On Event script that runs when the expression becomes true The MOM key has been released by the operator The AUX ON key is being pressed by the operator Use this property to trigger an alarm or event Example You might define the alarm event expression as follows Keyboard1 AuxOnKey 1 Then you can define an On Event script that runs when the expression becomes true The AUX ON key has been released by the operator AuxOnKey 1 AuxOffkey 1 The AUX OFF key is being pressed by the operator Use this property to trigger an alarm or event Example You might define the alarm event expression as follows Keyboard1 AuxOffKey 1 Then you can define an On Event script that runs when the expression becomes true DE The AUX OFF key has been released by the operator HoldKey 1 or 0 The value of each of these keys HOLD PATTERN and MACRO toggles between 1 and 0 each time the key is pressed and released The value is initially 0 The first time the key is pressed and released the value becomes 1 the second time it becomes 0 and so on MacroKey lore Use these properties to tr
9. 7 Archiving f you want to keep a permanent record of alarms and events in this category click Archive events of this category Alarms and events are archived in database files For an alarm or event to be archived an archive server must be configured and running Refer to Archive Servers for more information 8 Click OK The new category is created and the Add New Category dialog box closes The new category appears in the Object Browser EDIT AN ALARM EVENT CATEGORY To change the properties of an existing alarm event category 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Alarms and Events In either pane right click the alarm event category you want to edit and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Category dialog box opens Edit Category Door Alarms x General Attributes Name Door Alarms Priority 70 Color L1 Default Color i Type Door Alarms Sound Sound Files This appears in the Client Session Manager Play sound continuously Recipients Behavior operators x V Requires acknowledgement Send action to first available user group v Suppress subsequent events v If no response in 9 seconds move to Auto acknowledge in ty seconds next available user group C Send action to all available users groups Archiving JV Archive events of this category NI Notify via E mail L Figure 244 Edit Category Dialog Box 2 Chang
10. 7 Click OK close all windows and then restart the VMX300 E workstation C1553M B 4 05 DISABLE NETBIOS A workstation running the NetBIOS service on a network can be vulnerable to attack from outside sources If you are not using a DX9000 Series DVR you should complete the following steps to disable the NetBIOS service in the Windows operating system Note however that you should contact your network administrator before changing any NetBIOS settings CAUTION The NetBIOS service is required for the DX9000 Do not complete this procedure if you are using a DX9000 Series DVR or if any other applications in your system require the NetBIOS service You should follow proper security measures to limit the network s exposure to potential threats when the NetBIOS service is enabled To disable NetBIOS complete the following tasks instructions are provided in the following sections e Disable the NetBIOS setting in the Advanced TCP IP Settings dialog box e Disable the NetBIOS Helper in the Services window After completing these tasks restart the workstation Disable NetBIOS in the Advanced TCP IP Settings Dialog Box 1 Click Start Settings Network Connections The Network Connections window appears 2 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties from the pop up menu 3 In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box double click the Internet Protocol TCP IP listing The Internet Protocol TCP IP Prope
11. Device Address Re arm Interval msec boo Connection Attempts B 2 Attempt Interval sec b Comm Timeout msec hoo 24 Idle Disconnect sec p um f x Expect echo Figure 111 Communications Tab for CM9760 ALM IP Settings a Local IP The local IP is the IP address of the computer that the Pelco ALM driver runs on Select the local IP from the drop down box b Local Port The local port is the port the Pelco ALM driver uses to transmit commands Enter the local port c Protocol Remote IP Remote Port The remote device is the device the alarm unit is physically connected to If the alarm unit is connected to a PelcoNet device follow the instructions in step 1 If the alarm unit is connected to some other kind of device follow the instructions in step 2 1 PelcoNet Select the PelcoNet protocol from the Protocol drop down box If the PelcoNet device has a user name and password defined in the device settings you will be prompted to enter the user name and password before proceeding Enter the IP address of the PelcoNet device in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box select the port on the PelcoNet device that the alarm unit is connected to Select 1 if the alarm unit is connected to COM 1 on the PelcoNet device Select 2 if the alarm unit is connected to COM 2 2 Other Select the desired transport protocol from the Protocol drop down box The remote IP is the IP address of the computer t
12. Hotlink NormalFillColor Black blue cyan default green magenta orange red white yellow NormalBorderColor Black blue cyan default green magenta orange red white yellow C1553M B 4 05 FIXED CAMERA PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists Fixed Camera device properties that can be used in scripts and expressions Table U Fixed Camera Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES PROPERTY Write Alarm True 1 set Alarm to True to indicate the device is in an alarm state Device icons flash in the alarm colors when Alarm is True False 0 oet Alarm to False to indicate the device is not in an alarm state oignal Output n a Use in SET statements to assign the source for live video source Example SET window1 LiveSource fixed_camera1 output PTZ CAMERA PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists Pelco PIZ camera properties that can be used in scripts and expressions For instructions on creating user defined presets and patterns for PTZ cameras refer to Devices in the Client Operation Manual To see newly created presets and patterns in the PTZ camera s read and write properties in the Object Browser you must force the server to update its read write property lists for that device To do this open the Edit Driver Properties dialog box for that driver and then click Synchronize Table V PTZ Cameras Properties and Values TYPE OF PRO
13. NOTE Deleting a recipient group is irreversible If you delete a recipient group and then change your mind you must re create it as described in Add a New Recipient Group and individually edit each alarm event category and schedule that used to go to that recipient group to re assign the recipient group 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Recipient Groups In the right pane right click the recipient group you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the recipient group click Yes The selected recipient group is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The name of the deleted group disappears from the Object Browser C1553M B 4 05 237 Server Ties 238 NOTE Server ties are available only with VMX300 E systems Share signals Server ties enable one server to share signals such as video or audio with another server For example if you have a camera configured on one server and you want to view the camera s video on a destination for example external monitor or custom window configured on a different server you must define a server tie In Figure 260 Server A has a server tie to Server B so the camera s video can be viewed on the monitor or client CAMERA SWITCHER A PHYSICAL TIE LINE BETWEEN SWITCHERS SWITCHER B LJH m ji VMX300 E CLIENT WITH CUSTOM WINDOWS Figure 260 Server Tie To access si
14. Object Browser Q TIPS selecting a category of permissions ensures that the user group has all permissions in that category even if the category later acquires a new permission because a new object has been configured For example suppose you have a user group that includes personnel responsible for installing and maintaining devices Select Devices to give group members access to all devices If a new device is added to the server configuration the group will automatically be given permission to access the new device e o select a permission for all similar devices at once hold the Shift key down and select the permission for any one of the devices The permission will be selected for every other device that has it For example to select the Can lock camera permission for all lockable cameras regardless of make or model hold down the Shift key when you select Can lock camera for any one camera The permission will automatically be selected for every camera that has the permission C1553M B 4 05 EDIT A USER GROUP To change the properties of an existing user group 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name User Groups In the right pane double click the user group you want to change or right click the group and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Group Properties dialog box opens Edit Group Properties T Mame no workspaces r Group Permissions Corway Facility C Administrative Client W
15. cleared in the device s local settings The icon is unaffected Q TIP f you want a label to appear on only one instance of a device icon use a label rather than the device label Device labels always appear on every device icon Refer to Labels for more information C1553M B 4 05 167 Named Views Named views allow you to save a particular view of a map so an operator can reload it at any time without having to zoom and scroll You can create as many named views as you want for a map ADD A NEW NAMED VIEW 1 With the desired map loaded isolate the view you want to name by zooming and scrolling 2 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Maps map Named Views Double click Add New View in the right pane or right click Named Views in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Named View dialog box opens Add New Named View Miew Information Name New Named View Script Tag New view ce Figure 201 Add New Named View Dialog Box 3 Name lype in a unique descriptive name for the named view you want to add View names are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks View names are not case sensitive The view name is displayed in the right pane of the Object Browser A tag resembling the view name will appear in the Script Tag box If the view name contains sp
16. 00 RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR IR 3 e es 39 Aavanced PelcoNet Canvas SoNg seess d ey rear FE irer er tesk piri eiie eE EEr ETEEN EEEE SEEE EOE EEP eia 40 POCO AN C enea e Ar E E EAE E E E E EREE AFANES FRETS 41 Fdit Canvas Properes Dialog DON 6 sacas eua eera t manica aude e eA AENEAN Er SARENA 41 Ada New Driver Dialog BOX uaa cucotdcad bod sodda rade hp EDERSeRO aS Ree E3344 bag ETNE INSERERE AERE EREE 42 Browse Local Drivers Dialog BOX s cesse eres es up ERAS ra E UP uneon atr needa oE e d Ea Taaa Sheed ad 42 Browse All Drivers Dialog BOX o on nunnan anaana nannan aaaeeeaa EEEE HI e els 43 AO EE Er E E E E E E E E E AS tei ar 44 Edit Driver Properties Dialog BOX us aee sed ed ikir ranri ENEE A EE EEA AAEE dhe cdbbu yes EEn EA Eii 44 General Tab for PelcoNet Driver lssssssssssssssss aeee EEEE EEEE EEEE 45 Tine server Tab tor PelcoMOE DVG code Le sbrRRIA be ET Dd Ere rinn Odd be cede EIE ReIEPUPPPex DP ARewpuer ids 45 Add Time Server Dialog BOX ceu teen ee bprGeR erue CESTA TASA r D AAEE P iea iian ko ipta rir SEE RC RAPI IS 45 MOWING amp TIE SBEUBE cee cence Gane sudewe nodes TNaSPPCURAU EEE E E EUR NEC HE TUE 46 General Tab for Fixed Camer auia te risk uaded nhu iSs avant gagabed RE RIDIISEI AX ERGERIZREURI E SS Rer U EI Ke RES EISE 48 Properties lab tor ted Camela 25 awsas sot toca retia pace yasy da e xad da do d BAUR en death idend ieee dida er 49 Genera lab for PIZ Camara Us eas paved seaceee tented eeadseaharseataves
17. 38 C1553M B 4 05 ADD A NEW CANVAS PELCONET Any custom window that is used to display video encoded by a PelcoNet encoder or encoder decoder must have a PelcoNet MPEG Series canvas defined for it Windows used to display analog video that is decoded by a PelcoNet device do not require a PelcoNet MPEG Series canvas 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Clients client name Windows window name Canvases for the window that will be used to display video encoded by a PelcoNet encoder or encoder decoder 2 Double click Add New Canvas The Add New Canvas dialog box appears Add New Canvas x Select Canvas PelcoNet MPEG Series Settings a Cancel Figure 25 Add a PelcoNet Canvas 3 Select PelcoNet MPEG Series from the drop down box and then click Settings The Canvas Settings dialog box appears Pelconet Canvas Settings x poreeeseossesecsessoeeg Venet Available Compatibilities fal feda Selected Compatabilities MPEG 4 MPEG 2 Internal Storage Mave Down MPEG 4 Secondary N R3O00 1 Move Up HRemave Remove All l Figure 26 General PelcoNet Canvas Settings The Selected Compatibilities field lists the types of video signal that the VMX300 E video window can display By default the window can display all types of video signal If you move a signal from the Selected Compatibilities field to the Available Compatibilities fie
18. 7 Sources 1 Selected S 1 Active Connections ij 7 Available Destinations A Figure 155 Making Connection 3 Add multiple connections C1553M B 4 05 a Select the source devices you want to connect To select consecutive devices select the first device press and hold the Shift key down then select the last device To select nonconsecutive devices hold the Ctrl key down while selecting Now select the destination devices you want to connect to the sources b Click the Connect button rj or select Tools Connect or right click one of the selected devices and select Connect from the pop up menu The destination devices move beside the source devices in the left pane The highest destination device in the list connects to the highest source device the second highest destination connects to the second highest source and so on If you selected more destination devices than source devices the extra destination devices at the bottom of the list remain unconnected If you selected more source devices than destination devices the extra source devices remain unconnected Remove a connection In the left pane select the connection you want to remove and select Tools Disconnect or click the Disconnect button Id Alternatively double click the connection or right click the connection and select Disconnect from the pop up menu The destination device moves to the right pane Remove multiple connections a Inthe left pane se
19. Deleting an FTP site is irreversible If you delete an FTP site and then change your mind you must add it as a new FIP site 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name FTP Sites In the right pane right click the FTP site you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the FIP site click Yes The selected FTP site is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted FIP site disappears from the Object Browser C1553M B 4 05 249 Database Utilities VMX300 E provides the following database utilities e Backup which creates a backup of the server database e Restore which restores a backup of the server database BACKUP A DATABASE Use the Backup utility to create a backup of the server database and to save backup databases to alternative media such as a CD NOTE The Backup utility backs up the server database only The Backup utility does not back up maps workspace files driver databases archive server databases or the client database 1 Click Tools gt Database Utilities gt Backup The Backup Database dialog box opens Save in lo backup e C EJ My Recent Documents E Desktop ServerDB_backup mdb 9 My Documents e My Computer T My Network 2 Places File name B Save as type Microsoft Access Database mdb Cancel Figure 275 Backup Database Dialog Box 2 Type an app
20. Example you might rename an auxiliary that controls a camera s wiper to Wiper then use it in a script as follows SET Camerat Wiper On FOR 3 To rename an auxiliary position the cursor in the box for the auxiliary you want to rename and edit the name as desired No two auxiliary names can be the same for a particular camera but the same auxiliary name can be used for different cameras Auxillary names can be a maximum of 50 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Auxillary names are not case sensitive Refer to the appropriate camera installation operation manual for information on connecting auxiliaries NOTE Changing the name of an auxiliary that is referred to in a script introduces an error into the script Refer to the Scripts and Expressions section for more information C1553M B 4 05 53 ADD A PELCONET MPEG DEVICE The PelcoNet MPEG device driver currently supports the following devices 54 PelcoNet NET300 Series and NET350 Series decoders denoted 3xx in this document PelcoNet NET300 Series and NET350 Series encoders denoted 3xx in this document PelcoNet NET4001A encoder decoder NVR300 Series network video recorders The PelcoNet MPEG driver allows you to configure a time server for the driver to periodically synchronize its clock to Refer to the Device Drivers section for information on configuring a time server Before yo
21. 1234 5678 9876 5432 1 559 292 1 981 2 Type in the System Integrator Information This is the organization that is responsible for the installation and configuration of the software If as the End User you were responsible for installation please leave this section blank and proceed to Step 3 First name E Done Sp Internet YA Figure 14 Hardware ID and License ID C1553M B 4 05 29 4 Enter your activation code in the Add License dialog box x Installation ID Complete the Installation ID by typing in the License L4 number provided by your Software Vendor Hardware ID License Number 26811 1234 5678 9876 5432 Activation Code s Activate this license by typing in the Activation Code provided by your Software Vendor Activation Code Details Cancel Apply Figure 15 Activation Code 5 Click Apply If you purchased additional license IDs repeat steps 1 4 for each license ID Note that licenses are applied as follows VMX300 Client Application Five licenses for each additional client licenses for the first client application are covered by the base license VMX300 E Client Application Ten licenses for each additional client licenses for the first client application are covered by the base license Cameras One license for each camera 6 Click Close NOTE To refer to the installation ID or activation code at a later time complete the following steps e
22. 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 To 152 153 154 fos 156 19 7 158 199 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 iD 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 C1553M B 4 05 ETE mgr uolo d 102 DIPS Witches lab TOF D MZ D SHEL a siad dea prio rt rir a ee d Rete deer deberi bere iac ode deer dete edd ays qd 103 Model Ta TOM GIS GOB le aio enews TO CETTE TETTE T 103 General Tab for a Serial Output Device 2 nent tt ebb tne eben eel 104 Properties Tab for a Serial Output Device 2 nent t nt RI e es 105 Communications Tab for Serial Output Device Serial Settings 0 0 00 RR 105 Communications Tab for Serial Output Device IP Settings 0 nen n ene eens 106 Custom Buttons lab for Serial Output DEVICE 2 22 me set eere er Gne x Rx reu rey Re I xA S RR RR RE xai RR 107 Ed Buton Dialog DOK 4s case suteeuissudeds tees odeetadeeisautsohess esse enecesods daw sebeadedabeaesecekesctiecesa 107 Sample Mouse Down SUING m 108 General Tab for an IP Device Status Monitor iiis EEEE EEEa 109 Properties Tab for an IP Device Status Monitor iiiiiisssssssssssseee RR RIRs 110 Icon Animation Tab for an IP Device Status Monitor 2 0 0 eee i EENES t DEE eee een 110 General Tab for an Access Control Device ssiiiissssssssssssssee RR RR eel 112 Properties Tab for an Access
23. 192 168 1 144 32000 ION3 192 168 1 148 32000 ION 192 168 1 151 32000 2j MMS Server 192 168 1 132 32000 useradmin technician Port EST 192 168 1 150 32000 Cancel Figure 190 Browse Users Dialog Box Locate the user you want to import under the server the user account is defined on Select the user and click OK The Browse Users dialog box will close and the user name password full name and description will appear in their respective boxes Click OK The Add New User dialog box closes and the new user is created The user name and full name of the new user appear in the right pane of the Object Browser NOTES e lf you want a particular user to be able to log in to more than one server at a time you must add the user to each server with the same user name and password Logging in to multiple servers gives the user access to all the maps and devices configured on each server provided the user has the necessary permissions The user s permissions do not need to be the same on the different servers If you want the user to be able to view video from a server other than his home server configure a server tie between the user s home server and the other server Refer to Server Ties for more information e logging in as a particular user from two different clients is not recommended Define enough user accounts that this can be avoided C1553M B 4 05 EDIT A USER To change the properties of an existing user 1 Navig
24. Configure the PelcoNet device s internal settings as necessary When you have finished click Done to close the window Refer to the appropriate PelcoNet manual for information on the device s internal settings C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE ENCODING TAB This tab is available only on encoder units Add New PelcoNet 3xx Encoder r Encoding Number of simultaneous streams Stream 1 f Stream 2 5 m Multicast O Mode Off w IP Address p 0 0 0 Stream 1 Port 0000 Stream 2 Port 60000 Audio Port Optimize Encoder Parameters for Return Encoder Parameters to Software Decoding Factory Defaults DK Cancel Figure 52 Encoding Tab for PelcoNet Device PelcoNet 3xx encoders support dual MPEG 4 streams that can be configured to different quality settings Typically one stream is configured for viewing video the other for recording For information on configuring the streams refer to the appropriate PelcoNet manual Number of Simultaneous Streams VMX300 E can display multiple digital video windows for viewing the area under surveillance However the number of digital windows that can be displayed at one time is limited by the size and type of images selected for viewing Refer to Table B for an overview of the CPU workload and bandwidth amounts used for each type of video stream the video in a custom window This table also includes a recommended maximum number of streams for each type Stream 1 Enter
25. Don t run schedule on holidays Set Holidays Scheduled Action Edit Priority 50 Recipients Operators m Send action to first available user group If no response in seconds move to next Iv inm available user group C Send action to all available users groups Figure 241 Edit Scheduled Action Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the schedule as desired Refer to Add a New Schedule for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Scheduled Action Properties dialog box closes NOTE If you edit the action associated with a schedule make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration DELETE A SCHEDULE Deleting a schedule is irreversible If you delete a schedule and then change your mind you must add a new schedule 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Schedules In the right pane right click the schedule you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the schedule click Yes The selected schedule is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted schedule disappears from the Object Browser 218 C1553M B 4 05 Alarms and Events Q TIP Refer to Alarms and Events and Session Manager in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual for additional information on how alarms and events behave in the client Alarms and events are actions that are executed when specif
26. Fixed Camera Driver 192 168 1 144 2002 E Remote Server Driver 192 168 1 136 32001 E Server EMO 3 Read Properties Write Properties El Sources Cami Cam2 Cam50 Cam53 PNSO 00 07 5F 20 04 21 PNS3 00 07 5F 20 03 F4 E EE Ee Ee E Hl FTP Sites Global Scripts Global Tags Labels Logs Maps Prompts Recipient Groups Schedules Server Ties Timers User Groups Users Driver IP Driver Port e Add New Driver e lt Autodiscover All Drivers gt L Fixed Camera Driver 192 168 1 144 2002 ag Remote Server Driver 192 168 1 136 32001 Figure 261 Server A s Devices settings Refer to Devices Edit a Devices Local Settings for instructions Q Share alarms and events Configuring a server tie enables Server B to refer to alarms and events defined on Server A in scripts and TIP Use context sensitive help or the script wizard to write scripts involving remote servers VMX300 E will provide you with a pop up list of script tags referring to remote servers and their devices and alarms in context Refer to Scripts and Expressions Mechanics of Editing Scripts and Expressions for more information expressions Alarm sharing results from adding Server As remote server driver to the Server B configuration Server As alarms and events appear as Server Read Properties in the Object Browser Refer to Configure a Server Tie for instructions on adding a remote server driver C1553M B 4 05 Object
27. Mame East End of Admin Building Level 1 Script Tag East End of Admin Building Leve ames Figure 202 Edit Named View Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the named view as desired Refer to Add a New Named View for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Named View Properties dialog box closes 168 C1553M B 4 05 LOAD A NAMED VIEW 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Maps map Named Views In the right pane click the named view you want to load and hold the mouse button down If you move the pointer slightly it changes to a representation of the Earth 2 Drag the pointer to the map viewport and release the mouse button The selected view appears in the viewport UPDATE A NAMED VIEW You can change the view called up by a named view using the Update View option 1 With the desired map loaded isolate the new view you want to change to by zooming and scrolling 2 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Maps gt map gt Named Views In the right pane right click the named view you want to update and select Update View from the pop up menu The named view is updated to the current view DELETE A NAMED VIEW Deleting a named view is irreversible If you delete a named view and then change your mind you must add a new named view Also note that if you delete a named view any script that refers to the named view will contain an error 1 Navig
28. Properties Tab for CM9760 ALM Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of the CM9760 ALM unit s icon viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each alarm unit Unknown state When the alarm units Status property equals Unknown the icon is the color specified here Normal state When the alarm unit s Status property equals Normal the icon is the color specified here Alarm state When the alarm unit s Alarm write property equals True the icon changes to the color specified here If you change either Color 1 or Color 2 then the icon flashes alternately between the two colors when the alarm unit is in the alarm state Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload 94 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE COMMUNICATIONS TAB Direct Serial Settings Connection Type Specify the type of connection between the device driver and the alarm unit DIRECT SERIAL The alarm unit is connected using an RS 232 to RS 422 converter or using an RS 422 PC serial port INTERNET PROTOCOL The alarm unit is connected to the serial port on a networked device MODEM This feature is reserved for future development Settings Complete the instructions provided below for the appropriate connection type specified in Step 1 The settings must match the settings specified within the alarm unit Refer
29. client This permission alone allows the user to view but not use the controls available through the Device Control dialog box In combination with the Can control device permission this permission allows the user not only to view the controls but also to use them Can lock device Do not use this permission it is reserved for future use Can control device Allows the user to run scripts that control the device In combination with the Can access device control dialog permission allows the user to send string commands using the Text tab or custom buttons in the client Can edit points Do not use this permission it is reserved for future use Can access on screen display Do not use this permission it is reserved for future use Can view device icons on client Make serial output device icons visible in the client and list the device in the Device List IP DEVICE STATUS MONITOR PERMISSIONS Each IP device status monitor that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Table R IP Device Status Monitor Permissions Can access device manager dialog Do not use this permission it is reserved for future use Can access device control dialog If the device has an embedded web server access the device s embedded web server from the VMX300 E client Can view device icons on client Make IP device status monitor icons visible in the client and list the status monitor in the Device List ACCESS CONTROL D
30. dialog box Add New Alarm or Event Information Name New Alarm or Event Script Tag New Alarm or Event Priority so Use Category priority Display the label For this alarm or event Associate Source with this Alarm Event Expression amp Action Alarm Event Action Comment required on acknowledgement OK Cancel Figure 213 Clicking the Expression Editor Button The Expression Editor dialog box appears as shown in Figure 214 2 From the Expression Editor dialog box you can access pop up lists as follows e Atthe beginning of a condition press Ctrl Space Bar to open a pop up list of objects Expression Editor Press Ctrl Space for object list OK Figure 214 Context Sensitive Help at the Beginning of an Expression e After an object press to open a pop up list of valid object properties 196 C1553M B 4 05 Expression Editor ch l Pattern Preset R Press Ctrl Space for object list OK Figure 215 Context Sensitive Help for Object Properties e After a condition operator press Space Bar to open a pop up list of valid property values Expression Editor ch0l Pattern ch l NoPattern Press Ctrl Space for object list OK Figure 216 Context Sensitive Help for Property Values C1553M B 4 05 197 198 THE EXPRESSION WIZARD The expression wizard helps you write an expression for a timer or alarm by stepping you through its creation provid
31. e M6700 Series e CM6800 Series e M9700 Series Before you can add a device to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers Pelco ASCII Driver Switchers 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New Switcher dialog box appears You can also configure switcher settings after you have added the switcher to the server configuration Right click the switcher and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New owitcher dialog box 3 Configure the switcher settings as described in the following sections Note that you must configure the switcher settings in VMX300 E to match the switcher settings configured through the management system provided with the switcher Refer to the appropriate switcher installation operation manual for information on switcher settings 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box 5 Add ASCII cameras to the server configuration Refer to the Add an ASCII Camera section 6 Configure the analog connections between the switcher cameras and output devices Refer to the ASC Connections section C1553M B 4 05 19 80 CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New Sw
32. i Cancel Figure 243 Add New Category Dialog Box 2 Name lype a unique descriptive name for the alarm event category you want to create Category names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Category names are not case sensitive 3 Type Type a description of the type of category The description appears in the right pane of the Object Browser beside the category name and in the Session Manager entries for alarms and events in this category The type is required Recipients Select the recipient group you want notified when alarms and events in this category occur Recipients are only notified if they are logged in to the client before the alarm event status becomes Complete opecifying recipients also determines which clients the alarm s scripts run on An alarms scripts run on the client of any operator specified in the category s recipient group provided the client is running and the operator is logged in when the script executes If the client is not running or the operator is not logged in or if no recipients are specified in the category VMX300 E runs as much of the scripts as possible namely statements that do not require a recipient such as a statement that sets the value of a device property d Recipient group Select the recipient group from the drop down list If you have not created the recipient group yet fin
33. quotation marks Text properties Select the justification you want for the label s text All the lines of text will be justified the same Click Font to select the font for the label s text as well as display attributes like bold face and italics Background Select the background you want for the label you are creating A transparent background allows the underlying map to show through An opaque background makes the label appear as a colored rectangle Click Select Color to choose the fill color for an opaque label Border Specify whether you want the label to have a border around it by selecting None or Single Line Click OK The Properties dialog box closes Run script f you want to associate a script with the label type the script in the Run Script area If you want the script to run with a single click of the label select Single Click If you want the script to run when the label is double clicked select Double Click Type the script actions directly into the Action column or use the script wizard to help you write the script For more information on writing scripts refer to Scripts and Expressions To test the script save the server configuration log in to the client load the map the label is on and click the label Click OK The new label is created and the Add New Label dialog box closes The name and script tag of the new label appear in the right pane of the Object Browser NOTE You cannot change the orientation
34. which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New DX8000 dialog box 3 Configure the DX8000 settings as described in the following sections Note that you must configure the settings in VMX300 E to match the DVR settings configured through the software provided with the DVR Refer to the appropriate DVR installation operation manual for information on internal DVR settings 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box 5 Optional If you want to control cameras through the recorder add each camera to the server configuration Refer to the Add a DX8000 Camera section 6 Configure the analog connections between the recorder cameras and output devices Refer to the DVR Connections section CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New DX8000 General Properties Communications Model Name New Dx8000 Description j Cancel Figure 65 General Tab for DX8000 DVR Use the General tab to name and describe the DVR The device name can be a maximum of 50 characters You cannot use single or double quotation marks in a name but you can use any other letter digit or special character Device names are not case sensitive The optional description appears in the Object Browser beside the device name CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Add New DX8000 General Properties Communications Model Micon Animation Device in unknown state Choose a Device in normal state Choose Device in alarm state C
35. 1 2 lypea new name for the point The name can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double 3 Click OK The dialog box closes and the new alarm point name appears on the ALM Points tab C1553M B 4 05 Double click the point you want to rename The Edit Point dialog box appears Note that the alarm point number appears in the Number field and the alarm point s script tag appears in the Script Tag field These fields cannot be edited quotation marks M Point Properties Number 001 Name Point 001 Script Tag Point 001 Figure 114 Edit Point Dialog Box 97 CONFIGURE THE MODEL TAB Add New Device General Properties Communications ALM Points Model Select a model to ensure accurate feature support Pelco 9760 4LM i Cancel Figure 115 Model Tab for CM9760 ALM The Model tab displays the model of alarm unit supported by the Pelco ALM Driver Only one model is currently supported ADD A CM9760 REL RELAY INTERFACE UNIT 98 The Pelco Relay driver supports the CM9760 REL relay interface unit which can be used to control peripheral equipment through single pole single throw SPST contact outputs Each relay unit provides 64 contact outputs Before you can add a relay unit to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server confi
36. 2 csse cauce e eese E trian aerd taa tadaa Emi oe bee bsdecetenddewsintadietesaciad 134 S ND T EE E CREDE E E E E E EE E EE 136 ac INE e ar E E e e r e e EEE A E r E 137 Add Archive Server Dialog BOX 2 20 05 cen cae vale ste t opea PEERDRET T DRE Etat EEE A EAE sd ental Ee ES E Gc DAT Yea hg Us 137 ocagucicim E 138 Add Time Server Dialog BOG xesesez beth Rh ERDULIS RASSE eERP RAO ERAS E P EIARRRRESRIEXSARAVadEPR Erbe KA Sai 138 sj RT 139 EAEE e E e oes aree do zaras naduedued kd dadededacdeewedacadaga dies Eds pad wdqeiudd aues Fd das eds 142 Fixed Calera POITISSIUDE eeu es eoe vx INEO DR CEPI E EE Heated demus did abe reer DM LA LEE 142 xS aU C PPERCETRTEQDETTRTNTTTTTTTIT TOT 143 PelcaNet Device PermissiON Serre tria ean ER ears a Rai enc Velo Face soe egre de ER OC Re doc er ne Uca a ta Ea e 144 External Monitor Permission 1 2 egeret arr RERO REESE bee snide EX bean e rera b ka der a Dist 3 ERR 144 OOOO Camera POTIS SIONS eenei cohen nca ears cece PEDE SUIS Eve wears Ne Turks Geeta EORUM IS SS TRE 145 DAOUD PEN O sacks emniioice variat FUR FERE PR UD Rae UR Odd eee ead I eene ee ead cauda eae Diss eni 146 ASC SWITCHED Pato lsslOllB eeren toas ger marie rac aci Sot 3o e od Pr de pope oie irt E Race ATP atone ia 146 13 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 2
37. 4 05 CONFIGURE THE COMMUNICATIONS TAB 1 Connection Type Specify the type of connection between the device driver and the switcher e DIRECT SERIAL The switcher or data translator is connected directly to the VMX300 E workstation using an RS 232 null modem cable e INTERNET PROTOCOL The switcher or data translator is connected to the serial port on a networked device such as a PelcoNet device e MODEM This feature is reserved for future development 2 Settings Complete the instructions provided below for the appropriate connection type specified in Step 1 The settings must match the settings specified within the switcher Refer to the appropriate switcher installation operation manual for information on switcher settings Direct Serial Settings General Properties Communications uo Connection Type Direct Serial C Internet Protocol C Modem Settings COM Port COM 1 gt Baud 9600 Miscellaneous Poll Interval sec f Connection Attempts B Parity None Attempt Interval sec 5 u Data Bits Comm Timeout msec 000 Stop Bits Idle Disconnect sec p Flow Control None Expect echo Figure 89 Communications Tab for Switcher Serial Settings a Select the COM port that the switcher or data translator is connected to from the drop down box b Select the appropriate baud rate and parity settings to match the settings specified in the switcher c heremaini
38. 4 05 Prompts Prompts are custom dialog boxes used to elicit input from the operator or to inform the operator of something When you create a prompt you specify the text of the prompt and up to five buttons for the operator to click in response to the prompt text If you want you can define scripts for one or more of the buttons You can also set a timer to automatically click one of the buttons if the operator does not respond within a certain amount of time You must configure at least one button Only the buttons that are configured are displayed They are displayed in order with the lowest numbered button at the left The rightmost highest numbered button has a dashed rectangle within it to indicate that the operator can select it by pressing Enter To use a prompt you have created you must call it from a script using the PROMPT command When the line of code containing the PROMPT command executes the prompt displays in the window of the client running the script For more information on the PROMPT command refer to Scripts and Expressions Statements ADD A NEW PROMPT 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Prompts Double click Add New Prompt in the right pane or right click Prompts in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Prompt dialog box opens Add New Prompt x Prompt Information
39. 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the prompt in scripts Prompt is not a valid script tag C1553M B 4 05 207 208 5 Prompt text Type the text of the prompt Prompt text can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Press Shift Enter or Ctrl Enter to go to a new line or let the text wrap automatically The text appears in the main part of the dialog box when the prompt is displayed on the VMX300 E client It is often phrased as a question with possible answers to the question appearing on the buttons the operator clicks in response Make sure the prompt text is informative enough that the operator will know how to respond 6 Button text Type the text to display on the button The text should reflect the action the button invokes when it is clicked If you phrased the prompt text as a question phrase the button text as an answer to the question Button text is at most 10 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks You must configure at least one button Add New Prompt i x Prompt Information Name Open Lobby Door Title Open Lobby Door Script Tag Open Lobby Door Prompt Text Are you sure you
40. Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Alarm or Event dialog box opens Edit Alarm or Event Properties l x m Information Mame New Alarm or Event Script Tag New Alarm or Event Priority so Use Category priority Display the label For this alarm or event Edit Associate Source with this Alarm Event Front Door Camera Expression gl Action Alarm Event Action Comment required on acknowledgement E Cancel Figure 245 Add New Alarm or Event Dialog Box 2 Name Type a unique descriptive name for the alarm or event you want to create Alarm event names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Alarm event names are not case sensitive The name is used as the description in the Session Manager A tag resembling the name appears in the Script Tag box If the name contains special characters they are omitted from the tag Spaces are replaced with underscores Leading digits are removed 3 Script tag f you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type in a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the alarm or event in scripts
41. Browser xi E Corway Facility Alarms and Events Clients Connections Device Drivers External Monitor Driver 192 168 1 144 2003 Fixed Camera Driver 192 168 1 144 2002 Remote Server Driver 192 168 1 136 32001 El Server EMO 3 El Read Properties Door Alarm Write Properties Sources FTP Sites Global Scripts Global Tags Labels Logs Maps Prompts Recipient Groups Schedules Server Ties Timers User Groups Users Driver IP Driver Port GJ Up a Add New Driver gt e lt Autodiscover All Drivers gt ag External Monitor Driver 192 168 1 144 2003 L Fixed Camera Driver 192 168 1 144 2002 L Remote Server Driver 192 168 1 136 32001 Figure 262 Server A s Alarms and Events 239 By default a remote server s script tag ends with Server For example if the remote server is called EMO 3 its script tag is EMO 3 Server To edit the server s script tag edit the server s local settings Refer to Devices Edit a Devices Local Settings for instructions ocript tags for remote alarms and events appear in the Object Browser Suppose Server A EMO 3 has an external door alarm that triggers an alarm Door Alarm that directs the camera at the door On Server B create an alarm that loads live video from Server A s camera when the Door Alarm read property becomes true The expression for the Server B alarm is as follows EMO 3 Server Door Alarm EMO 3 Server True The alarm s On E
42. CUN Nd c aei atat 148 IP Device Status Monitor Permissions esos dee rubr re eatorehad cas secedisacadhdeedebbs AE RE Ede a 149 The Predelineg User GOUD ussceerantca ace od uci dcn eto te i ear od S pee wa aoe Ade e o ar Rr on de decore cR dee are tots 149 Pica New Se OUD MMRR TMT 150 cdita User GIOUN sa saraga naa anina EE E dc E E a ae Sa E EE a RA ENTA Ae atin eases teresa E a snopes A E A we E EERE RES 151 Delete User GOUN A e 151 eaaa a r a a de eee a eee a eet es ede ee eee eee eee 152 PREGeIMEC USER ACCOUNTS ssn 1 339 dber d dae ead nee band E PR Eod bd dd EXER Rd badd bod Edd edd dd Jod Rena 152 The Predefined Administrator Account usus eme mtb EERRERPYu REY wra beewdyes Dx dde pa be rbd pErc UR ERE cos 152 The Predefined Operator ACCOUNT iuessiesecesetes ie br REPRE EG t EY R3 HEY E RR R 6b RR GR ERG PESE ER dua 152 Adda NEW 15 MNREMEMEEEHCRH 153 PIE USED ge nose ek cance oa eee eer TT 155 EBlBIB USE ases acy og et ee ee ne be Fe oe ed oe ee ee te ee eee kee 155 Vh 156 Use Printocresn to Greate a Map HIE aus diua atau Ede REI EI RERO REESE X EEn duesdu RT AEE anwar 156 POG NUTS UIS o RNC RTT ERE TTL EE TERENTIUM 157 Edta Map SF MOUCINCS actpancacpnsc
43. Configure Configure the Server While It Is Running Current Status Scripts and Expressions Variables and Values Exit Shut Down the Server Q TIP You can log in and out of configuration mode while the server is running This allows you to perform administrative tasks without preventing operators from working in the VMX300 E client Refer to Configure the Server While It Is Running for instructions Save configuration When you change the server configuration most changes do not come into effect until after the configuration has been saved Only changes to device drivers and devices come into effect immediately with the exception of a device s local settings which come into effect after the configuration is saved Refer to Device Settings Edit a Devices Local Settings for information on local settings To save the server configuration select File gt Save or exit configuration mode and say Yes when asked whether you want to save the configuration The server will verify that all scripts and expressions are valid before saving Operators logged in to the VMX300 E client will be momentarily interrupted while the configuration is being saved After the interruption operators will see the new configuration If one or more scripts or expressions contain errors the server displays an error message and gives you the opportunity to make corrections Refer to Scripts and Expressions Syntax Error Checking for instructions on using the Scripts a
44. Control Device 2 RR e ees 112 ACCESS Control Device TOU 2 cass irte trit e ha EYES RE Ra RE PPISNRSARaug ees aunea obedeees bo 4040 px WES RE 112 Communications Tab for Access Control Device Serial Settings illlisssssssssssse RR 113 Communications Tab for Access Control Device IP Settings sisse 113 POC ss COMMON ONS TO 24 15 tes ate rasa de URe COS MERC EROFEAPEC RAM MDDaSES AREE A NUS REM OUNE PECIA 114 PONG ACCESS P UU RNV D NPRRETTEEETE ITE TETTE ETT T TTE TT M 115 Access Control Device Read and Write Properties iiiiiisissssssssssss IRR 115 xoa zer qd DITS 06 BOR RR EIC CEREREM 116 EHI ACEESSE IUCN OMG escenas eck ces addc uk ere a cucERE PREUUPESQU RAO ve Read RUEL EUER TERO PUNTI NE TI 117 x nsicinnaroP 117 PCOS MMOD Fanem LS E casero ta enteene ER EIER Secret ve emer TP pam a hae wie Ae NEP NNI B EROR RUN DI S CR 118 Greate a Custom Pater to Matth iae eta tacos a Ru dede QR re RC do ee rr dien Ra ar MA db a ced i RU runs 119 Assign a Reset Pattern to Match RR RR I rr 119 Create a Custom Reset Pattern to Match uus rrr mere rr Ed px aw 3TH CY UERRE pe Re ngu pe arm e eh da 120 Add an Alarm for the Access Control Point 0 0 ccc RR RR e hs 122 Associate Scripts WIE INE ALIIT eaire dr rr rrr acere utr youd ev rea IER Hau ER OVER SqENTerx dA wou Red rd E ous 123 CONNGCHONG Dialog DO serere riar ripari TIT DTIELSENMPKMRRR 124 voc
45. Device Label Properties Dialog Box Text Type up to three lines of text as the label contents When you place a device icon on a map this text will display in the label Fach line of text can be at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Text properties Select the justification you want for the device label s text All the lines of text will be justified the same Click Font to select the font for the label s text as well as display attributes like bold face and italics 162 3 o d c Background Select the background you want for the label you are creating A transparent background allows the underlying map to show through An opaque background makes the label appear as a colored rectangle Click Select Color to choose the fill color for an opaque label d Border Specify whether you want the label to have a border around it by selecting None or Single Line e Click OK The Edit Device Label Properties dialog box closes Device number If operators will be using a CCTV keyboard that employs numeric identifiers for devices select Enable the device number and type in the device number If operators will be using computer keyboards that allow the use of textual names for devices do not select this option Expose properties The Expose properties of this device so that they can be used in scripts and expressions field is enabled by d
46. General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Access control data patterns Supports Reset Pattern Pattern To Match Reset Pattern To Match Define a custom pattern or select one from the predefined list Custom Make Pre defined C Pre detined Select Description CardAccess Event Pattern Pattern To Match E 0 1J 0 9 ALNum Insert point number placeholder Figure 147 Create a Custom Pattern to Match Click the Pattern To Match tab Click Custom Type a description of the pattern in the Description field If you save the pattern to the Predefined Patterns list step 5 the description will appear beside the pattern in the list Type the pattern Refer to Pattern Syntax for information on creating patterns Optional Click Make Pre defined to the pattern to the Predefined Patterns list If you save the pattern in the future you can select the pattern from the list Select a Predefined Pattern as the Reset Pattern to Match Note that you only need to complete these steps if the access control device sends a reset string to indicate that the alarm condition is no longer in place C1553M B 4 05 Edit Access Control Properties General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Access control data patterns v Supports Reset Pattern Pattern To Match Reset Pattern To Match Define a custom reset pattern or select one
47. Output 2 Addananalog video connection to the server configuration for this device Refer to the Connections section for information on analog video connections Use the icon animation portion of the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of external monitor icons viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each monitor screen color When the device s Alarm property equals False device icons in the client display a monitor screen in the color specified here Each external monitor device can use a different screen color for its icons Border color When the devices Alarm property equals False device icons in the client display a border in the color specified here Each exter nal monitor device can use a different border color for its icons Alarm state When the monitor s Alarm property equals True the icon flashes alternately between Color 1 and Color 2 Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload To reduce the overall workload set Color 1 and Color 2 to the same color ADD A DX8000 DVR 66 The DX8000 device driver controls Pelco DX8000 Series digital video recorders DVRs In this document the term DX8000 DVR is used to refer to any DVR in the DX8000 series that is supported by the DX8000 driver Note that the VMX300 E supports DX8000 software version level
48. Panel Administrative Tools Q TIP If you run a device driver as a service you can set the driver to restart automatically in the event of failure Once the driver is running as a service go into Windows Control Panel Administrative Tools open the driver service and set the restart options on the Recovery tab To start a device driver 1 A C1553M B 4 05 Run the device driver application from the Windows Start menu or double click the driver icon if there is one on the Windows desktop If this is the first time you are launching the device driver the Corrupt or Missing Database message appears because VMX300 E must create a new database the first time you use it Click Create If this is not the first time you are launching the device driver and the Corrupt or Missing Database message appears then the driver data base is corrupted or missing If this is the case you will need to either restore a backup or create a new database Creating a new database destroys the existing database if there is one For information on restoring a backup refer to Database Utilities Corrupt or Missing Database x The database for Serial Output Driver could not be opened You may either restore the database from a backup or create a new blank database i Create Cancel Figure 16 Create or Restore Database Dialog Box Once a valid database is in place the Configure Driver dialog box opens Configure External Monitor D
49. Select Tools gt License Manager from the menu bar The License Manager dialog box appears e Click your license and then click Properties The License Properties dialog box appears DELETE A LICENSE If you delete the base license the server will ask you if you want to enter a new license If you select No the server will shut down If you select Yes the Add License dialog box will open Refer to Add a License for instructions on entering licensing information 1 In the Licenses area of License Manager select the license you want to delete and click Remove The server prompts for confirmation 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the license click Yes The license name disappears from the Licenses list and details for that license are removed from the summary Q TIP Delete any licenses that have expired as they serve no purpose They cannot be reactivated 30 C1553M B 4 05 Starting and Stopping Device Drivers START A DEVICE DRIVER Start each device driver needed to control the devices in your system You can start the drivers before you start the VMX300 E server or after When you start a device driver you have the choice of running it as an executable or as a service If you ever have to restart a driver that is run as an executable you will have to follow the steps outlined here To restart a driver that is run as a service restart the computer the driver is installed on or start the driver through the Windows Control
50. Sor tre eoa 218 Accessing Alarms and Events on Another Server 0 000 RR e s 221 Add Now Category Dialog BOK eros eret ites wed codons Petr U tec AARE e eimai oo bce Soe ES eE EEG EREE 227 Ec C aeggro Wig BO oi sas dtr eS mE ePUPAPCRUEERPUUSPSexeed ERAN DEI Rer SersiterequbitesddeRu Ee au 224 Add New Alarm or Event Dialog Box 2 eee enn eee a rrr 225 C1553M B 4 05 246 24 248 249 250 251 204 209 254 299 256 25 250 209 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 211 212 213 214 215 2 6 211 210 C1553M B 4 05 Edit Label Properties Dialog BOX essees ea mmt recor ERR Re rH RR rae bp aor RU EXE A EiS E s sr Rd pi 226 Syncronizing DVR Wit SBIVET Usus cadre p DERIT bes seine middie rede d RP rE E REE e uer Pub rROU NEUE esu ole 221 R nning an Archive SelVBl ia sesso seed tten EAE E SCPEPRETPDRPPA DAR EX PESE RARINEER ERARE EE E EG DAT EG EGER rs 227 PCA UIC MEM U E E A EE E eed E SE E AE 228 Associating d Source DEVICE sua neos tha Hades cse eESCERPIRSU Ae RA KLEN aii aaa ARES Erp R ideas 228 Bet ee al eee E E E E E E E EE E E E E E EEEE E NES 229 Fat Alam Event AcUON Dialog BOX sorres desc bxblruseqse 5bberuesiiosSstsbrgeresis4 E ErP ERARE KARREN EIEREN 229 Pa Alain or Eveni Fropernes Dialdg BOX da dua duasia poiat peeraa Ae r rekon e PD PCT 230 Aano ON eea e sed eds tone EAEE E S EAEE EN se 232 Pie al ADC oT RTT 233 Edit Label Properties Dialog BOX 2 22 c2 cets eae atidedGedoeenedd rm oErbr er mi p DE
51. They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to initiate FIP image captures in scripts For information on using the FTP script statement refer to Write an FTP Script Remote host information he Remote Host Information area is used to enter information about the FTP server where image files Will be sent and stored If you are missing any of the information in the Remote Host Information area contact the system administrator of the FTP server 1 2 3 4 5 6 Address In the Host name or IP address box type in the address of the remote host you will be uploading images to You can type in the remote host s Web address such as www webhost com or IP address or if the host is on your local network the computer name Port Type the port the remote host opens to FIP traffic Port 21 is the standard FIP port User name lype the user name you enter to upload files to the remote host If no user name is defined on the remote host then type anonymous in the User Name box Password Type the password you enter to upload files to the remote host If no password is defined on the remote host leave the Password box empty Directory lype the name of the directory on the remote host where the captured images will be stored For example if you will be storing the captured
52. This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 1000 Expect echo This field is reserved for future development C1553M B 4 05 101 102 CONFIGURE THE RELAY POINTS TAB Add New Device General Properties Communications Relay Points DIP Switches Model y Number name Scripta A 001 Point 001 Point_001 002 Point 002 Point 002 003 Point 003 Point 003 004 Point 004 Point_004 005 Point 005 Point_005 006 Point 006 Point O06 007 Point 007 Point 007 008 Point 008 Point_008 009 Point 009 Point 008 010 Point 010 Point 010 011 Point 011 Point 011 012 Point 012 Point 012 013 Point 013 Point 013 014 Point 014 Point 014 Point 015 Point 015 Diet 140 Die NAC oft i Cancel Figure 121 Relay Points Tab for CM9760 REL The Relay Points tab lists each relay point in the device and the name and script tag used within VMX300 E to refer to the point The list of relay points also appears in the Device Control dialog box in the VMX300 E client The Relay Points tab allows you to rename points to give them meaningful names Rename a Relay Point 1 Double click the point you want to rename The Edit Point dialog box appears Note that the relay point number appears in the Number field and the relay point s script tag appears in the Script Tag field These fields cannot be edited gt Point Properties Number 005 Name Point 005 Script Tag Point 00
53. a recipient group for a category of alarms or events Refer to Schedules Add a New Schedule for instructions on selecting a recipient group for a schedule For example if you create an alarm that is triggered when an exit door is opened you might define a script that loads video from a camera cover ing the area around the door When the alarm is triggered a recipients workstation will automatically display video of the exit door saving the recipient from having to locate the source of the alarm and load the video manually Edit Category Door Alarms i x m General m Attributes Name Door Alarms Priority 50 Color Default Color LI Type Door Alarms Sound Sound File p This appears in the Client Session Manager Play sound continuously Recipients Behavior v Requires acknowledgement Suppress subsequent events Zuto acknowledge in a seconds C Send action to first available user group 5 IF mo response in NA seconds move to next available usergroup Py r Archiving Send action to all available users groups w Archive events of this category caresi Figure 257 Recipients THE PREDEFINED RECIPIENT GROUP VMX300 E provides one predefined recipient group All Users If you select All Users as the recipient group for a schedule or alarm or event notification will be sent simultaneously to every user configured on the server who is logged in when the sched
54. add a remote server driver is to Browse All and select the desired driver Refer to Server Ties and Alarms and Events Access Alarms and Events Defined on Another Server for information on remote server drivers AUTODISCOVER DEVICE DRIVERS The Autodiscover All Drivers function locates all drivers that are running on the local area network LAN To add a driver that is running on a wide area network WAN use the Add New Driver option NOTE In order for the VMX300 E system to locate a device driver automatically the driver must be installed at a network location that is visible to the VMX300 E server If you know the IP address and port number of a driver that was not located use the Add New Driver option Note that changes to device drivers such as autodiscovering drivers come into effect immediately You cannot discard your changes by exiting configuration mode without saving 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Device Drivers In the right pane double click Autodiscover All Drivers The server warns you that autodiscovering all device drivers will add to or update the currently configured drivers C1553M B 4 05 43 MX300 Enterprise i X Autodiscovering all drivers will add or update drivers currently configured in your system Drivers currently configured and not Found by the autodiscovery process will not be affected Do you wish to proceed Yes No Figure 33 Autodiscover Warning 2 f y
55. an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the global tags new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Global Tags In the right pane double click the global tag you want to change or right click the global tag and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Global Tag Properties dialog box opens Edit Global Tag x E E REPERI Tag Information Script Tag Device Online 0 5 value Uninitialized True False Cancel Figure 229 Edit Global Tag Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the global tag as desired Refer to Add a New Global Tag for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Global Tag Properties dialog box closes C1553M B 4 05 205 DELETE A GLOBAL TAG Deleting a global tag is irreversible If you delete a global tag and then change your mind you must add a new global tag Also note that if you delete a global tag any script that refers to the global tag will contain an error 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Global Tags In the right pane right click the global tag you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the global tag click Yes The selected global tag is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted global tag disappears from the Object Browser 206 C1553M B
56. an icons size refer to Scale an Alarm Event Icon 1 With the desired map loaded right click the alarm event icon you want to move and select Move from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the icon not the label before right clicking 2 Move the pointer to the icon s new location The icon follows the pointer as you move it If the icon s label is displayed it moves with the Icon 3 When the icon is located where you want it press the left mouse button The icon freezes in place If the map has a grid the icon snaps to the grid C1553M B 4 05 231 232 SCALE AN ALARM EVENT ICON NOTE To minimize the CPU workload icons should be as small as possible Changing the size of an alarm event icon does not affect its position For information on changing an icon s position refer to Move an Alarm Event Icon 1 With the desired map loaded right click the alarm event icon you want to resize and select Scale from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the icon not the label vMX300 Enterprise Configuration 377 Licenses Remaining 41 Days Remaining Bl x File View Zoom Tools Help Object Browser El Corway Facility E Alarms and Events Corway Facility Alarms Administration Edit Door Alarms E zm Move Events i e 3 Norma Clients Remove E LILJLIL AIL cbse ommna ooo T IM Oo ooo Jl Admin Level 1 Admin Level 2 Admin Level 3 Corway Facilit
57. appropriate button Selecting Lower Frame Rate Settings 1 loselect lower frame rate settings click Optimize Encoder Parameters for Software Decoding The Software Defaults message appears Software Defaults x This will overwrite some encoder settings in the unit to optimize them for software decoding Do you wish to proceed 9 Figure 53 Software Defaults Message 2 Click Yes The MPEG 4 configuration on the PelcoNet device is changed to the following settings otream 1 VMX High Quality otream 2 VMX Standard Quality 3 Optional To change individual settings click Go on the Properties tab to display the PelcoNet Device Control window Restoring Factory Default Settings 1 lo select factory default settings click Return Encoder Parameters to Factory Defaults The Factory Defaults message appears Factory Defaults j X This will return all encoding settings back to Factory defaults Do you wish to proceed 9 9 Figure 54 Factory Defaults Message 2 Click Yes The MPEG 4 configuration on the PelcoNet device is changed to the factory default settings 3 Optional To change individual settings click Go on the Properties tab to display the PelcoNet Device Control window The factory default settings provide higher frame rate settings for connections with high bandwidth based on parameter preset 1 Refer to the appropriate PelcoNet manual for detailed information 58 C1553M B 4 05 HOW TO CHOOSE THE VID
58. b erre Ras had rud ewes 234 3015 gc ITE 235 Add New Recipient Group Dialog BOX 251a es pia cadet a E od eee ai pte entered iren a ws Ea edi eben e sor oer 236 Edit Recipient Group Properties Dialog BOX 2 0 0 eben RR ees 237 vn A E 238 ENOTA DOVON ecciesia RIEN LSR ERORAOAMUM enee rE aE RENS AMO ERES CEN pauses EART 739 DON er ASF TS GNC eVCING aod u eor UPRERIEPREPCIMSEOIIT ey cceaee soot on eee E E decER P eCPP ERES UE LU 239 Sample Three way Server Tie Scenario iiiiiisssssssssssee RR RR e eee 240 Creating Lonnection tor SOTUBE coss autre eset er tiena ie RS PSONSA NC EI RdESITES ESAE ade ened AET FTN NE 241 Creating Uer SERI RRRRRETETERTTIT TT ETE TE ET TT TED TT TIRE 241 Selecting a Remote Server Driver 225 near we eee aeuo aa ma mae be dtd ee mex deca xa es Rack aes 9d edades quidem pase ons d 242 Viewing Devices Alarms and Events 2 0 00 RR hh e hls 242 Created Connection For Sever B csse adde coded ook temeedeu bit eed ues erei tebkrisS UTERE EN EEEE 242 Add New Server Tie Dialog Box 0 RII RR a n s 243 Edit Server Tie Properties Dialog BOX lliississsssssseesess een nnn aae 244 New FIP Site Properties General Tab reetur ordia e EERE RR e ees 245 New FIP Site Properties Firewall Tab 0 RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR rs 246 Fat FIP ose Propendes Dialog BOK cu ucazes etas sepcuspscuciRPReeres E SATE EPER ENE qeu t EEEE days Rd dpt E ac 247 FIF SCOUT GOs os
59. be running so the backup server can access them 135 SWITCHING TAB 136 Project Properties f x mO Network i Switching Archiving Date Time E mail Free Paths Find free paths Have the system automatically select a path C Allow user to select the path from a list Overridable Paths If no free paths are available Find overridable paths and order them based on number of users affected C number of destinations affected C number of devices in the path C priority of users affected From the ordered list Have the system automatically use the optimal path C Allow the user to select a path r Server Eo Server Forward remote server routing information Figure 170 Switching Tab The Switching tab allows you to specify how you want the server to select the switch path when a user or script accesses a video or audio device The server uses free paths paths that are not in use whenever possible If there is only one free path the server uses it automatically When there are two or more free paths the server finds as many free paths as you have specified then either automatically uses the path through the least number of devices or presents the list to the user to select from A user or script with higher priority can override use of a path by a user or script with lower priority In this case the path is considered to be overridable The se
60. been placed on that map or any other map If you change your mind after removing a label from a map you can add it back as described in Place a Label on a Map With the desired map loaded right click the label you want to remove from the map and select Remove from the pop up menu The label disappears from the map DELETE A LABEL NOTES e Deleting a label is irreversible If you delete a label and then change your mind you must re create it as described in Add a New Label f you have placed instances of a particular label on one or more maps and you delete the label every instance of the label will be removed from any map that has one regardless of whether the map is loaded at the time The label will disappear from your server configuration altogether e Deleting a label that is referred to in a script introduces an error into the script Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Labels In the right pane right click the label you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the label click Yes The selected label is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes All instances of the deleted label are removed from maps The name of the deleted label disappears from the Object Browser C1553M B 4 05 177 Scripts and Expressions 178 Use scripts and expressions as tools to automate your sys
61. camera is not in an alarm state Auxiliary 0 Turn on the camera s Auxiliary feature Note that i equals the auxiliary number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Renaming the auxiliary renames this property Refer to the Add an ASCII Camera section for instructions on renaming auxiliaries n Turn off the camera s Auxiliary feature Pattern DontCare When a SET statement with a FOR clause runs a pattern the pattern runs for at least the dura tion specified in the FOR clause Setting the Pattern property to DontCare releases the camera from having to run the pattern for the specified duration allowing the pattern to be stopped setting Pattern to DontCare does not itself terminate the pattern it simply enables the pattern to be stopped For information on locking ASCII cameras refer to Devices in the Client Operation Manual pattern Run this user defined pattern This value is created when you create the pattern Note that equals the pattern number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the C1553M B 4 05 KBD300A PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists Pelco KBD300A device properties that can be used in scripts and expressions Table AD KBD300A Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Read Username Reserved for internal use by system Password f Reserved for internal use by system Camera
62. category the associated alarm or event belongs to This ensures that alarms and events belonging to that category are recorded on the archive server To turn archiving on add or edit the desired alarm event category and select Archive events of this category Refer to A arm Event Categories for more information C1553M B 4 05 22 228 r General r Recipients Edit Category Door Alarms i H X Attributes Name Door Alarms Type Door Alarms This appears in the Client Session Manager Behavior At Users im Send action to first available user group m If no response in NA seconds move to next available usergroup Send action to all available users groups Priority 70 Color L Default Color L IW Sound Sound File R Play sound continuously v Requires acknowledgement Suppress subsequent events Auto acknowledge in NA seconds caresi Figure 249 Activating Archiving To associate a source device with an alarm or event complete the following steps a Edit the alarm or event Add or edit the alarm or event you want to associate with a source device Refer to Alarms Events and Normal Occurrences for instructions b Associate the source device Select Associate source with this alarm event Select the desired source device from the drop down box the expression editor by clicking the expression editor button This provides you with a larger
63. characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks User names are not case sensitive Password A password is optional but recommended Passwords can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks A password does not have to be unique Passwords are case sensitive For example Operator and OPERATOR are not equivalent to operator1 Confirm password Retype the password If the passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password boxes differ in any way you will not be allowed to add the new user E mail Address If you want the user to receive e mail notification of alarms and events type the user s e mail address In order to be notified via e mail the user must belong to a recipient group for an alarm event category that uses e mail notification In addition the e mail server must be configured Refer to Project Properties E mail Tab for instructions on configuring the e mail server Refer to Recipient Groups for information on defining recipient groups Refer to Alarm Event Categories for information on configuring alarm event categories to use e mail notification Full name Type the user s proper name The full name appears beside the user name in the right pane of the Object Browser Description lype any pertinent comments about the user or the account Member of group s The Member of Group s ar
64. dialog box appears Configure Driver PelcoNet MPEG l General Time Server Local network adapter 10 104 10 89 m Listening port 2005 v Options Start the driver as an executable Install the driver as a service C Remove the driver as a service Cancel Figure 35 General Tab for PelcoNet Driver 2 If necessary configure the settings on the General tab and then click the Time Server tab The Time Server fields appear Configure Driver PelcoNet MPEG l General Time Server Network Time Servers gl Hostname IP Address Port tick usno navy mil 37 tock usno navy mi 37 Synchronize every 60 minutes Figure 36 Time Server Tab for PelcoNet Driver 3 Click Add to specify a server to synchronize to The Add Time Server dialog box appears x Hostname or IP Address Port swisstime ethz ch 37 EX Cancel Figure 37 Add Time Server Dialog Box 4 Type the time server s host name or IP address and the port number the time server opens for synchronization requests 5 Click OK The Add Time Server dialog box closes and the time server appears in the Network Time Servers list C1553M B 4 05 45 6 Optional repeat steps 3 5 to add time servers as necessary 7 Optional Each time server that you add to the list is checked by default If you do not want to use a particular time server click it to uncheck the server If more than one time server is selec
65. digit or special character Device names are not case sensitive The optional description appears in the Object Browser beside the device name C1553M B 4 05 109 CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Add New Device General Properties Icon Animation Device Settings Unit IP Address 12 144 1 52 Browse to this device v Ping this unit every fio seconds to see if it is online Figure 133 Properties Tab for an IP Device Status Monitor 1 Unit IP Address Type the IP address of the device you want to monitor 2 Browse If the device you are monitoring has an embedded web server click Browse to this device to open the embedded web server in a new window This provides access to the device s internal configuration 3 Ping this unit To monitor the device click Ping this unit and then enter the frequency in seconds with which you want the device monitored To temporarily suspend monitoring clear the check mark from the Ping this unit field CONFIGURE THE ICON ANIMATION TAB Add New Device m Np eee esses eese ses esses sese e sere ores nonno Device in unknown state Choose Device in normal state Choose Device in alarm state Color 1 Choose Icon amp nimation Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose DK Cancel Figure 134 Icon Animation Tab for an IP Device Status Monitor Use the Icon Animation tab to configure the animatio
66. distinguishes them from the scripts associated with labels hotlinks timers prompts and alarms and events which cannot be run from other scripts If there is an action you want performed by more than one script define the action in a global script and call it from the other scripts as needed Global scripts can also be run directly from a custom window in the client provided the operator has permission When you create a user group If you check the permission for a particular global script then operators who log in under that user group can run the global script Refer to User Groups Group Permissions for more information on permissions For information on how an operator runs a global script from a custom window refer to Custom Windows in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual Local Variables The VMX300 E scripting language has local Boolean variables that are declared in a scripts DIM or VAR statement They are local in the sense that they can be accessed only within the script that declares them as well as from any global script the script calls using the CALL command They cannot be accessed from a global script run using the RUN command Any script global or local can declare local variables ADD A NEW GLOBAL SCRIPT 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Global Scripts Double click Add New Global Script in the right pane or right click Global Scripts in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The A
67. double quotation marks Label names are not case sensitive A tag resembling the name appears in the Script Tag box If the name contains special characters they are omitted from the tag Spaces are replaced with underscores Leading digits are removed 3 Script tag f you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the label in scripts For a list of label properties that can be scripted refer to Scripts and Expressions Properties of Objects 4 Details To edit the text and formatting of the label click Details The Properties dialog box opens 174 C1553M B 4 05 Edit Device Label Properties x Text Text Properties Tees New C Left Justify T Center Justify Line 2 C Right Justify Line 3 Camera Font Border Background Transparent Mone C Single Line EN Figure 206 New Label Properties Dialog Box C Opaque Text Type up to three lines of text as the label contents When you place the label on a map this text will display in the label Each line of text can be at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double
68. echo E Cancel Figure 100 Communications Tab for KBD300 Internet Settings a Protocol If the keyboard is connected to a PelcoNet device follow the instructions in step 1 If the keyboard is connected to some other kind of device follow the instructions in step 2 1 2 select the PelcoNet protocol from the Protocol drop down list If the PelcoNet device has a user name and password defined in the internal device settings you will be prompted to enter the user name and password before proceeding Then complete the following fields as described below Local IP The local IP is the IP address of the computer that the Pelco KBD300 device driver runs on Select the local IP from the drop down box Local Port The local port is the port the Pelco KBD300 device driver uses to transmit commands If your system is secured behind a firewall enter one of the ports made available by the firewall Otherwise enter 0 to have the driver randomly assign an available port Tip To find out what port the driver assigned switch or control the device in the VMX300 E client and then use the netstat command at the DOS prompt to view assigned ports Remote IP Enter the IP address of the PelcoNet device in the Remote IP box Remote Port In the Remote Port box select the port on the PelcoNet device that the keyboard is connected to Select 1 if the keyboard is connected to COM 1 on the PelcoNet device Select 2 if the keyboard is conn
69. for Daylight saving Time DST If you set the PelcoNet s clock when DST is in effect during the summer set the clock one hour behind DST Refer to the appropriate PelcoNet manual for instructions on setting the device s time zone and clock RECORDING NOTES e lodisplay internally archived video in a custom window the window s canvas must be configured to display the Internal Storage signal type For instructions on configuring the canvas refer to the Canvases section e When integral recording capability is selected the PelcoNet HDD property becomes available for use in scripts and expressions Refer to the Scripts and Expressions section for more information Miscellaneous Use this portion of the Properties tab to configure the PelcoNet device s internal settings 1 Click Go The PelcoNet Device Control window appears Device Control 10 104 201 1 B x PelcoNet PELCO VIDEO TECHNOLOGIES FOR DIGITAL NETWORKS Live Video Server Push Control Setup PelcoNet Setup Information Video Encoder Settings MPEG 2 MPEG 2 Video quality Resolution Bandwidth Settings Start page settings MPEG 2 MPEG 4 Video Encoder Settings MPEG 4 MPEG 4 Video quality Resolution Bandwidth Settings Start page settings MPEG 2 MPEG 4 General Settings Unit identification Time amp Date and Version IJ PEGI2 FER Video Decoder Settings n Refresh Done Figure 51 PelcoNet Device Control Window 2
70. from the predefined list C Custom Make Pre defined Pre defined Select Description Pelco ASCII Protocol Alarm Pattern Reset Pattern To Match Se ALNum 5Ea Insert paint number placeholder Figure 148 Assign a Reset Pattern to Match Click the Supports Reset Pattern field Click the Reset Pattern To Match tab Click Pre defined and then click Select The Pre defined Patterns list opens Refer to Se ect a Predefined Pattern as the Pattern to Match for a description of the predefined patterns provided by VMX300 E Double click the pattern that you want to use The Pre defined Patterns list closes and the selected pattern appears in the Reset Pattern To Match box 119 120 Create a Custom Pattern as the Reset Pattern to Match Note that you only need to complete these steps if the access control device sends a reset string to indicate that the alarm condition is no longer in place Edit Access Control Properties General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Access control data patterns v Supports Reset Pattern Pattern To Match Reset Pattern To Match Define a custom reset pattern or select one from the predefined list Custom Make Pre defined C Pre defined Description card Access Event Pattern Reset Pattern To Match EV 0 1 J 0 9 ALNum Insert point number placeholder Figure 149 Create a Custom Reset Pattern to Match 1
71. front door is breached Suppose the door alarm was triggered some time during the night and an operator wants to review the video associated with the alarm To do this the operator locates the alarm in the Session Manager and drags it to a custom window that has an appropriate DVR canvas This loads the archived video from Front Door Camera into the window The video automatically starts playing cued to the time of the alarm For more information on how an operator retrieves archived video using source association refer to the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual Associating a source device with an alarm or event is a simple matter of editing the alarm or event and selecting the source device from a drop down box In addition to defining the association itself you must complete the following steps a Synchronize the DX9000 DVR and VMX300 E server clocks using a time server This ensures the time stamp on the archived video is identical to the time stamp on the archived alarm or event Either synchronize the DVR to the VMX300 E server or synchronize the VMX300 E server to the DVR To synchronize the DVR to the VMX300 E server configure the VMX300 E server by selecting Allow this server to act as a Network Time Server on the Date Time tab of the Project Properties dialog box Refer to Project Properties for more information Configure the DX9000 DVR using the soft ware provided with the DVR by setting the DVR to synchronize to the VMX300
72. handling capabilities provided by VMX300 E including operator notification and automated execution of scripts you can define a VMX300 E alarm based on an CM9760 ALM alarm input To define a VMX300 E alarm that is triggered by an alarm unit contact add a new alarm to the server configuration and use the appropriate CM9760 ALM alarm input point in the alarm expression Example Use the following syntax to define a VMX300 E alarm that is triggered by Point 001 on the alarm unit named CM9760 ALM 1 Alarm Module 1 Point 001 Alarm Module 1 Irue Refer to the A arms and Events section for instructions on adding alarms to the server configuration Defining Normally Open and Normally Closed Alarm Inputs Alarm inputs are commonly wired as normally open N O so that if the sensor contact closes the alarm is triggered When the alarm is triggered the alarm state corresponds to True in VMX300 E whereas False corresponds to the normal nonalarm N O state of the input When an alarm is wired as normally closed N C the alarm state still corresponds to True in VMX300 E and False still corresponds to the normal non alarm state which is N C in this case When you define an alarm expression in the server configuration the expression tests whether the point is True regardless of whether the actual alarm input is wired as N O or N C as shown in the following table Table AF Defining Normally Open and Norm
73. icons and Session Manager entries for alarms and events in this category display in the alarm color Default color Select a color to signify that the alarm is not in an alarm state Alarm event icons and Session Manager entries for alarms and events in this category display in the default color once the alarm or event has been acknowledged or if it does not require acknowledgement once it becomes complete The icon for an alarm or event that has never been triggered displays in the default color Sound f you want a sound to play on recipients workstations when the alarm or event is triggered select Sound Sound file Click Sound File to select the file for the sound you want to play on a recipients workstation when the alarm or event is triggered VMX300 E supports one file format for sound files wav Test the selected sound file by clicking the speaker button Play sound continuously f you want the selected sound to play repeatedly select Play sound continuously The sound plays until the operator stops it by clicking the Silence Alarm button on the Session Manager tool bar 6 Behavior C1553M B 4 05 d Requires acknowledgement To require that a recipient acknowledge an alarm or event in this category select Requires acknowledgement An alarm or event that requires acknowledgement will remain active in the Session Manager until it has been acknowledged after which it has status Complete If more than one user is
74. load a map directly from a named view Refer to Named Views Load a Named View for instructions 158 C1553M B 4 05 CUSTOMIZE YOUR MAPS VMX300 E provides a number of tools that allow you to customize your maps Place device icons on maps Place icons representing installed devices on maps allowing operators to control the devices by clicking the icons Refer to Device Icons for more information Store different views of a map Create named views that allow operators to quickly focus on a particular view of a map Refer to Named Views for more information Define links between maps Create hotlinks that allow an operator to load a related map or named view with a single mouse click Refer to Hotlinks for more information Run scripts by clicking a map Create scripts to automate common actions that operators can run by clicking a label or hotlink on a map Refer to Labels and Hotlinks for more information Place alarm event icons on maps Place icons representing alarms and events on maps so operators can respond to an alarm by clicking the icon Refer to Alarms and Events Alarm Event Icons for more information DELETE A MAP NOTE Deleting a map that is referred to in a script introduces an error into the script Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information Deleting a map does not affect the original map file If you change your mind after deleting a map you can reimport the map as described in Add a New Map 1 C
75. msec This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 1000 Expect echo This field is reserved for future development 52 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE CAMERA MODEL TAB Edit Camera Properties General Properties Communications Camera Model Auxiliaries Select a Camera Model to ensure accurate feature support Peico Spectra ll D Protocol Figure 46 Camera Model Tab select the camera model and protocol from the drop down box Refer to the appropriate camera installation operation manual for the recommended protocol CONFIGURE THE AUXILIARIES TAB Edit Camera Properties General Properties Communications Camera Model Auxiliaries Auxiliary Mames Auxiliary 1 awdaryt 0000000 0 Auxiliary 2 awdery 00000 Auxiliary 3 awdiary 0000000000 Auxiliary 4 Jauxiary4 000000 0 Auxiliary 5 JouxiiaryS Auxiliary 6 Jauxiiary Auxiliary 7 awdary Auxiliary 8 awdaryB 0 omen Figure 47 Auxiliaries Tab The Auxiliaries tab allows you to give the cameras auxiliaries meaningful names By default auxiliaries are named Auxiliaryr where is the auxiliarys number Auxiliary names appear in the VMX300 E client where auxiliaries are controlled and also appear in scripts where they are used to refer to the auxiliary When you rename an auxiliary the write property for that auxiliary is changed to the name you have specified
76. name Device Drivers Pelco KBD300 Devices 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New Pelco KBD300 dialog box appears You can also configure settings after you have added the keyboard to the server configuration Right click the keyboard and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New Pelco KBD300 dialog box 3 Configure the keyboard settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New Pelco KBD300 x General Communications Logical Mapping Location New Pelco KBD300 Description pee Cancel Figure 98 General Tab for KBD300 Use the General tab to enter a location name and an optional description The location name is used to identify the device The location name can be a maximum of 50 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Location names are not case sensitive CONFIGURE THE COMMUNICATIONS TAB 1 Connection Type Specify the type of connection between the keyboard and the switcher e DIRECT SERIAL The keyboard is connected directly to the VMX300 E workstation using a PV140 converter e INTERNET PROTOCOL The keyboard is connected to the serial port on a networked device such as a PelcoNet device e MODEM This featur
77. notified of an alarm or event only one user needs to acknowledge it for it to be considered complete Suppress subsequent alarms Under some circumstances an alarm or event can be triggered more than once in quick succession For example a door alarm could be set off several times in quick succession if someone opens and closes the door repeatedly In this case it is only meaningful to deal with a single instance of the alarm since there is a single cause to the multiple occurrences of the alarm 223 To limit the system s treatment of an alarm or event that is triggered multiple times in quick succession select Suppress subsequent alarms The first time the alarm or event is triggered an entry will appear in the Session Manager and the sound will play No additional entries will appear nor sounds play until the alarm or event has been acknowledged The next time the alarm or event is triggered a new entry will appear and the sound will play You can only suppress subsequent alarms for alarms and events that require acknowledgement c Auto acknowledge f you want the server to automatically acknowledge alarms and events in this category select Auto acknowledge in _ seconds and type in the number of seconds you want to elapse before acknowledgement When an alarm or event is auto acknowledged the On Acknowledge script runs Having auto acknowledge selected does not preclude a recipient from manually acknowledging an alarm or event
78. numbered 1 to 8 Can edit presets 9 and above In the VMX300 E client create save rename and unassign presets numbered 9 and higher and set and clear the home preset Can edit patterns In the VMX300 E client create save rename and unassign patterns and set and clear the default pattern KBD300A PERMISSION Each KBD300A keyboard that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Table N KBD300A Permission Make Pelco KBD300A icons visible in the client and list the device in the Device List CM9760 ALM PERMISSIONS Each CM9760 ALM alarm interface unit that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Table 0 CM9760 ALM Permission Can access device control dialog Do not use this permission it is reserved for future use Can view device icons on client Make alarm unit icons visible in the client and list the alarm unit in the Device List C1553M B 4 05 147 CM9760 REL PERMISSIONS Each CM9760 REL relay interface unit that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Edit Group Properties Name Operators Permissions Dxeoo0 CM9760 REL Relay Can access device control dialog Can control device Can edit points Can view device icons on client Front Door Camera E Cancel Figure 185 CM9760 REL Permissions Table P CM9760 REL Permissions Can access device control dialog Access the relay unit s Device Control dialog
79. of the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of PelcoNet device icons viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each device Unknown state When the device s Status property equals Commloss or Unknown device icons in the client are the color specified here Normal state When the device s Status property equals Normal device icons in the client are the color specified here Alarm state When the devices Status property equals CommonAlarm the icon flashes alternately between Color 1 and Color 2 Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload To reduce the overall workload set Color 1 and Color 2 to the same color C1553M B 4 05 55 Recording This portion of the Properties tab applies to PelcoNet NET350 encoders only If the PelcoNet device has built in ability to record audio and video click This unit has an integral recording capability To use the recording feature you must set the PelcoNet device s time zone and clock to ensure that you can locate video archived using the integral recording capability Note the following parameters e Time zone Set the time zone on the PelcoNet device to the time zone where the PelcoNet device is installed e Clock Set the clock on the PelcoNet device to the local time where the PelcoNet device is installed without compensating
80. or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Timer names are not case sensitive A tag resembling the timer name appears in the Script Tag box If the timer name contains special characters they are omitted from the tag Spaces are replaced with underscores Leading digits are removed Script tag If you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the timer in scripts and expressions For a list of timer properties that can be scripted refer to Scripts and Expressions Properties of Objects Expression ype the expression that will start the timer when it becomes true and reset the timer when it becomes false If the expression is too long for the box open the expression editor by clicking the expression editor button This provides you with a larger window to work in Or you can use the expression wizard to create the timer expression by clicking the Wizard button Refer to Scripts and Expressions for information on the syntax of expressions Delay value In the Enable timer output after _ seconds box type in the number of seconds for the timer to count down The delay value must be between 0 1 of a second and
81. pop up menu to open the Archive Server dialog box then select File Exit or click the Close button at the right end of the title bar You are prompted for confirmation 2 lf you are sure you want to shut down the archive server click Yes The archive server shuts down NOTE If the archive server is running as a service you can also shut it down through the Windows Control Panel Administrative Tools 132 C1553M B 4 05 Project Properties As part of the server configuration process you must use the Project Properties dialog box to configure the following conditions e Which ports are used for clients drivers and FIP traffic e How you want the server to select switch paths e Whether archive servers and time servers will be configured e Whether the server will be used as a primary server or as a backup server Note that archive servers and backup servers are available only with VMX300 E systems To set the project properties right click the project name at the root of the Object Browser and select Edit from the pop up menu The Project Properties dialog box opens NETWORK TAB Object Browser x ee Corway Facility larms and Corway Facility Clients Connection Device Drivi FTP Sites Global Scripts Global Tags Labels Logs Maps Prompts Dock Left Dock Right Undock Recipient Groups Schedules Server Ties Timers User Groups Users C Alarms and Events 3 Clients C Connections
82. ranges 1 Enter the number of physical inputs available for switching cameras To prevent VMX300 E from using some of the switcher s physical inputs exclude them from the count of available inputs For example if the switcher has a total of 16 physical inputs 14 of which you want available for switching cameras enter 14 in this field 2 Enter the number of physical outputs available for switching cameras If some of the switcher s outputs are partitioned for dedicated use by another type of device such as a joystick exclude them from the count of available outputs For example if the switcher has eight physical outputs in total two of which are going to be used by other devices enter 6 in this field 3 Optional To specify the logical numbering scheme click Specify Logical Ranges The Edit Logical Ranges dialog box appears Edit Logical Ranges i Logical Range Settings Input Range fi 01 103 108 112 115 121 Output Range f 01 104 Figure 93 Edit Logical Ranges Dialog Box By default VMX300 E assigns sequential identifiers to the available inputs and outputs Inputs are named Input Input2 Inputi where Iis the total number of physical inputs available for switching cameras Outputs are named Output Output2 Outputi where is the total number of physical outputs available for switching cameras Looping inputs are named Looping nput1 Loopinglnput2 Loopinglnputi where is the total number of physical inputs
83. requires a password type the password in the Password box If no password is defined on the firewall host leave the Password box empty 4 Click OK The server tie is created and the Add New Server Tie dialog box closes The new server tie appears in the Object Browser 246 C1553M B 4 05 EDIT AN FTP SITE 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name FTP Sites In the right pane double click the FTP site you want to change or right click the FIP site and select Edit from the pop up menu The Properties dialog box opens Corway Web Site Properties i x General Firewall a ae 2 Mame 2 Corway Web Site Script tag Corway Web site Remote Host Information Host name or IP address Port 192 168 1 144 21 ES Username Password anonymous Directory icaptures Connection type Passive m Figure 273 Edit FTP Site Properties Dialog Box 2 Change the properties of the FTP site as desired Refer to Add a New FTP Site for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Properties dialog box closes WRITE AN FTP SCRIPT THE FTP COMMAND The action of capturing and uploading an image to an FIP site is controlled through the FIP script command The syntax of the FIP statement Is FTP window tag camera tag preset tag delay FTP site tag file name Briefly VMX300 E interprets the FTP statement as follows Switch the camera to the custom window and mo
84. s you want the encoder decoder to receive For information on configuring the streams refer to the appropriate PelcoNet manual If the MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 streams will be displayed in a custom window the window s canvas must be configured to display the MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 signal types For instructions on configuring the canvas refer to Canvases Encoder Parameters VMX300 E provides the option to quickly configure the internal MPEG 4 settings of the PelcoNet device for either lower frame rate settings which have been designed to work well with VMX300 E or the factory default settings NOTE If the video stream is being recorded by an NVR these encoder parameter changes will not take effect Wait until the video stream recording is complete and then click the appropriate button Selecting Lower Frame Rate Settings 1 loselect lower frame rate settings click Optimize Encoder Parameters for Software Decoding The Software Defaults message appears Software Defaults 1 X This will overwrite some encoder settings in the unit to optimize them For software decoding Do you wish to proceed 9 Figure 56 Software Defaults Message 2 Click Yes The MPEG 4 configuration on the PelcoNet device is changed to the following settings MPEG 2 2MBPS Low Delay MPEG 4 VMX Standard Quality 3 Optional To change individual settings click Go on the Properties tab to display the PelcoNet Device Control window Restoring Factory De
85. select Show from the pop up menu The Archive server window opens eu Archive Server Iof x File Tools Remote IP Remote Port 192 168 1 145 2179 192 168 1 145 2449 Start End 2 Connections Tuy ree E TIERE TERRIER AL Figure 166 Archive Server Window The top pane of the window lists the IP address and port number of the servers that are connected to the archive server and any clients that are connected to those servers C1553M B 4 05 131 The bottom pane of the window lists the date range of any queries being made against the archives from the Session Manager Queries include searches on a particular date or filters being applied The information on queries is used for diagnostic purposes 2 Options To change the folder where the archive files are stored click Tools gt Options The Options dialog box will open Navigate to the desired folder and click OK 3 Close window Io close the Archive Server window right click the archive server icon in the Windows system tray and select Hide from the pop up menu or click the Minimize button at the right end of the title bar 4 Shutdown To shut down the archive server click File gt Exit or click the Close button at the right end of the title bar You will be asked to confirm Click Yes SHUT DOWN AN ARCHIVE SERVER 1 Right click the archive server icon in the Windows system tray and select Exit from the pop up menu Alternatively select Show from the
86. site they are monitoring complete with installed devices such as cameras and video recorders VMX300 E provides tools to create links between maps and to customize maps with icons that represent installed equipment and alarms The first time you start the server no maps are listed in the Object Browser You must individually add each map you want to make available to VMX300 E operators VMX300 E does not offer the capability to create maps Use graphics or CAD software to create your maps and then import them into VMX300 E as described in Add a New Map Or you can use the Print Screen key on your workstation keyboard to create a map file as described in Use Print Screen to Create a Map File Note that you cannot change a map file through VMX300 E Nothing you do in VMX300 E will affect the original file specified when the map is added File formats VMX300 E accepts the following graphic file formats e JPEG jpg e Bitmap bmp e Windows metafile wmf e Extended metafile emf To reduce the CPU workload map files should be as small as possible Avoid using files with a file size over 1 MB Q TIP f you have an AutoCAD drawing that you want to use as a VMX300 E map create a wmf version of the drawing by opening the drawing in AutoCAD and exporting the drawing as type Metafile wmf USE PRINT SCREEN TO CREATE A MAP FILE 156 Display the image you want to use as a map on your computer Click the image to ma
87. specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Window Properties dialog box closes 36 C1553M B 4 05 DELETE A CUSTOM WINDOW Deleting a custom window is irreversible If you delete a custom window and then change your mind you must add a new custom window Also note that if you delete a custom window any script that refers to the custom window will contain an error 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Clients gt client name gt Windows In either pane right click the window you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the window click Yes The selected window is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted window disappears from the Object Browser CANVASES Any custom window that will be used to display video must have at least one canvas defined for it Canvases specify the video display technology available to the client the custom window is configured for This can include both analog and digital IP technologies VMX300 E supports two analog video display technologies e Quad Video Display e Video for Windows To use either of these analog technologies the client computer must have an appropriate video card installed in it If you add more than one canvas to a custom window VMX300 E will have a choice of which video display technology to employ when an operator views video in that window VMX300 E makes its cho
88. specified in Step 1 The settings must match the settings specified within the relay unit Refer to the CM9760 REL installation operation manual for information on unit settings Direct Serial Settings Add New Device General Properties Communications Relay Points DIP Switches Model Connection Type Direct Serial C Internet Protocol C Modem Settings COM Port COM 1 Baud 19200 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Expect echo Miscellaneous Re arm Interval sec f EX Connection amp ttempts B Attempt Interval sec Comm Timeout msecy pooo Idle Disconnect sec p omen Figure 118 Communications Tab for CM9760 REL Serial Settings a Select the COM port the relay unit is connected to from the drop down box b Set the baud rate to match the DIP switch settings on the relay unit s IN port 19200 is recommended If the relay unit is daisy chained from another relay unit use the same baud rate for all the units in the chain c The remaining settings should specify no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no flow control d Referto Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section Internet Protocol Settings Add New Device General Properties Communications Relay Points DIP Switches Model Connection Type Direct Serial Internet Protocol Modem Settings Local IP fio
89. the camera to the server configuration Right click the camera and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New Fixed Camera dialog box 3 Configure the camera settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add new Device dialog box CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New Fixed Camera x General Properties Location New Fixed Camera Description pe Figure 39 General Tab for Fixed Camera Use the General tab to enter a location name and an optional description The location name is used to identify the device The location name can be a maximum of 50 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Location names are not case sensitive 48 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB d Icon Animation Normal color Choose Device in alarm state color 1 Choose Device in alarm state color 2 Choose cma Figure 40 Properties Tab for Fixed Camera Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of fixed camera icons viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each camera Normal state When the device s Alarm property equals Fals
90. the client are the color specified here Alarm state When the camera s Alarm write property equals True the icon flashes alternately between Color 1 and Color 2 Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload To reduce the overall workload set Color 1 and Color 2 to the same color C1553M B 4 05 85 CONFIGURE THE AUXILIARIES TAB Add New Camera General Properties Auxiliaries Auxiliary Mames Auxiliary 1 awdaryt 000000 Auxiliary 2 jauxiiary2 Auxiliary 3 jauxiary3 0 Auxiliary 4 jauxiary4 000000 Auxiliary 5 avdiarys 0000000 Auxiliary 6 JouxiiaryS 00 Auxiliary 7 aidiery 00000000 Auxiliary 8 asdieryB 00000000 omen Figure 97 Auxiliaries Tab for ASCII Camera Auxiliary names appear in the VMX300 E client where auxiliaries are controlled and also appear in scripts where they are used to refer to the auxiliary When you rename an auxiliary the write property for that auxiliary is changed to the name you have specified Example You might rename an auxiliary that controls a camera s wiper to Wiper then use it in a script as follows SET Camera1 Wiper On FOR 3 To rename an auxiliary click the box next to the auxiliary you want to rename and then type the new name No two auxiliary names can be the same for a particular camera but the same auxiliary name can be used for different cameras Auxiliary names can include any letter digit or spe
91. the lock prior to the specified time allowing the camera view to be changed immediately For information on locking PTZ cameras refer to Devices in the Client Operation Manual preset Go to this user defined preset This value is created when you create the preset Note that equals the preset number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Pattern DontCare When a SET statement with a FOR clause runs a pattern the pattern runs for at least the duration specified in the FOR clause Setting the Pattern property to DontCare releases the camera from having to run the pattern for the specified duration allowing the pattern to be stopped Setting Pattern to DontCare does not itself terminate the pattern it simply enables the pattern to be stopped For information on locking PTZ cameras refer to Devices in the Client Operation Manual pattern Run this user defined pattern This value is created when you create the pattern Note that equals the pattern number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Alarm True 1 Set Alarm to True to indicate the device is in an alarm state Device icons flash in the alarm colors when Alarm is True False 0 False 0 Set Alarm to False to indicate the device is not in an alarm state Auxiliary Turn on the camera s Auxiliary feature Note that 7 equals the auxiliary number which can range from 1 to the maxi
92. the maximum number of MPEG 4 primary streams you want the encoder to transmit at one time in the Stream 1 field The default setting is the maximum number of MPEG 4 streams the encoder is capable of transmitting without multicasting To limit bandwidth utilization reduce the setting below the maximum To display Stream 1 in a custom window the window s canvas must be configured to display the MPEG 4 signal type Stream 2 Enter the maximum number of MPEG 4 secondary streams you want the encoder to transmit at one time in the Stream 2 field The default setting is the maximum number of MPEG 4 streams the encoder is capable of transmitting without multicasting To limit bandwidth utilization reduce the setting below the maximum To display Stream 2 in a custom window the window s canvas must be configured to display the MPEG 4 Secondary signal type NOTE If a NVR300 Series network video recorder is being used to record video from this encoder you should subtract a stream from the total number of streams entered on the Encoding tab For example if you would normally transmit one primary stream and five secondary streams and you record the secondary stream then you should enter 1 in the Stream 1 field and 4 in the Stream 2 field For instructions on configuring the a canvas to display MPEG 4 steams refer to Add a New Canvas PelcoNet Multicast This feature is available only if your network supports IP multicasting To configure multicast setti
93. the point number followed by the literal number sign followed by the termination literal a e Pelco ASCII Protocol Alarm Pattern ALNum Ea This pattern matches a string that contains the point number followed by the literal E followed by the termination literal a e Default Generic Pattern lt CC ALNum gt This pattern matches a string that contains the literal CC followed by the point number followed by the literal C1553M B 4 05 Table C Symbols Used to Build Patterns SYMBOL MATCHES EXAMPLE Marks the following character as a special character or a opecial character W is a special character that matches any literal letter number or the underscore see below Literal V means to ignore the special value of and match the literal Similarly A matches and N matches Matches any letter number or the underscore ALARM w matches ALARMx and ALARM9 and ALARM Equivalent to a zA Z0 9 etc Matches the position at the beginning of an input string Nats the postions he begimning ofan input sting S Nate tte positon artn ond ofan int sting Matches the position at the end of an Input string Matches the preceding subexpression zero or more times zo matches z and zo and zoo and zooo etc Matches the preceding subexpression one or more times Z0 matches zo and zoo and zooo and zoooo etc does not Equivalent to 1 match z Matches the preceding subexpression zero or one time
94. to RS 422 converter or using an RS 422 PC serial port e Internet Protocol The device is connected to the serial port on a networked device e Modem This feature is reserved for future development 2 Settings Complete the instructions provided below for the appropriate connection type specified in Step 1 The settings must match the settings specified within the access control device Refer to the access control device documentation for information on configuring the device s internal settings Direct Serial Settings Edit Access Control Properties General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Connection Type le Direct Serial C Internet Protocol C Modem Settings COM Port COM 1 Baud 9600 Parity None Data Bits i Cancel Figure 138 Communications Tab for Access Control Device Serial Settings a Select the VMX300 E COM port the access control device is connected to from the drop down box This is the COM port on the workstation that the Access Control driver runs on b The remaining settings must match the values set in the access control device Internet Protocol Settings Edit Access Control Properties General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Connection Type Ic Direct Serial Internet Protocol C Modem Settings Local IP f 92 168 1 144 Local Port p Protocol PeicoNet v Remote IP
95. to the CM9760 ALM installation operation manual for information on unit settings Add New Device General Properties Communications ALM Points Model Connection Type Direct Serial C Internet Protocol C Modem Settings COM Port COM 1 Baud 19200 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Miscellaneous Device Address Re arm Interval msec poo e Connection Attempts B Attempt Interval sec b Comm Timeout msec rooo Idle Disconnect sec p t a Expect echo i Cancel Figure 110 Communications Tab for CM9760 ALM Serial Settings a Select the COM port the alarm unit is connected to from the drop down box b Set the baud rate to match the Port 0 DIP switch settings on the alarm unit 19200 is recommended If the alarm unit is daisy chained from another alarm unit use the same baud rate for all the units in the chain c The remaining settings should specify no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no flow control d Referto Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section Internet Protocol Settings C1553M B 4 05 Add New Device General Properties Communications ALM Points Model Connection Type Direct Serial Internet Protocol C Modem Settings Local IP 101041147 v Local Port bl Protocol PeicoNet Remote IP Remote Port koo 2 Miscellaneous
96. toc ce oeaee oes eee ca er EAE LES RE CORERURNN ETSER EFEO EEE 195 Upenimg a Est ar Properties uaa ite Rr RC Sd REOA Fre ea be Ce d prAna RICE TR EINER AGERE bud rd REHUREGGS 195 Cicking thie Expression Editor BUTTON RETE 196 Context Sensitive Help at the Beginning of an Expression 0 0 RII 196 Context Sensitive Help for Object Properties iiiiiiiiisssssssssss RR tte eben tenet Ie 197 Context Sensitive Help for Property Values iiiissssssssssssssee RR RR e eel 197 Opening the Expression Wizard from the Expression Editor Dialog Box 2 0 0 RR 198 Expression Wizard xesck roseo racer dna Xov do ERONRAC RR UR LIU OG E RUBUS HE Padi dd UO DESCR PORAC CR oops 198 ATI CNV Va a 199 Opening Mie SCOR Vial ee oae dtc oscars Sr POE actu bee Quaeque he Hon aus ei ve aE oes heen aden aanuenewh 199 Giot oynak HOV HERD si ec ae ae ra oe wq ee AE a E A S a E ee ee 200 Seriot and Expression Verification Dialog BOX 2 ara a ode nate atro Odd itr iis Dr enr eed ele aco be oboe aatis 200 Miaa AS Gi sc oodd Rte a ERR IXEESdOnURS C REST QSWas RUN RENE SERT POSU RP REM Soe sat IE SS TS ESTE iu 201 Camera seguente DOIIDE eraut rcnt se E e ace Pitra we ER uei EE domos Wd AEE E E quls ard 201 2X SITES LIRE ETE PIECE TEE TET CER S RTT DT NE ERE E 202 Add New Global script Dialag BOX usas conned ueeda esse nest pede ua xdibt end satz dre tae sott as
97. unknown state Choose Device in normal state Choose Device in alarm state Color 1 Choose Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose pm i Cancel Figure 70 Properties Tab for DX8000 Camera Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of the DX8000 camera icon viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each camera Unknown state When the camera is not communicating normally with the recorder the icon is the color specified here Normal state When the camera is communicating normally with the recorder the icon is the color specified here Alarm state When the camera s Alarm write property equals True the icon changes to the color specified here If you change either Color 1 or Color 2 then the icon flashes alternately between the two colors when the camera is in the alarm state Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload CONFIGURE THE AUXILIARIES TAB Add New Camera General Properties Auxiliaries Auxiliary Names Auxiliary 1 Jauxiaryt 0000000000 Auxiliary 2 awdary 000 Auxiliary 3 awirya Auxiliary 4 lauxiary4 0000 Auxiliary 5 JauxiaryS 0000000 Auxiliary 6 JauxiaryS 00000000 Auxiliary 7 asdiery Auxiliary 9 asdieryB 0000000 Cancel Figure 71 Auxil
98. use 5 Start number Type the start integer for numbering the new objects 6 Padding zeroes f you want the numbering to always have the same number of digits in it select Include padding zeroes For example if you create twelve copies of something the first nine will be numbered 01 02 03 09 instead of 1 2 3 9 This keeps the objects ordered 7 Number of copies Type the number of new objects you want to create 0 Press OK The Paste Many dialog box closes and the new objects are created The names of the new objects appear in the Object Browser 9 Edit the new objects as desired Q TIP You can also create multiple objects based on a particular object by using Paste multiple times In this case the new objects will be sequentially named Copy i of name of copied object where is an integer C1553M B 4 05 255 256 C1553M B 4 05 PRODUCT WARRANTY AND WARRANTY Pelco will repair or replace without charge any merchandise proved defective in material or workmanship for a period of one year after the date of shipment Exceptions to this warranty are as noted below Five years on FT FR8000 Series fiber optic products Three years on Genex Series products multiplexers server and keyboard Three years on Camclosure and fixed camera models except the CC3701H 2 CC3701H 2X CC3751H 2 CC3651H 2X MC3651H 2 and MC3651H 2X camera models which have a five year warranty Two years on standard motoriz
99. want to open the lobby door Prompt Buttons Button Text Button No 1 Yes Button No 2 cancel Button No 3 Button No 4 Button No 5 L 4 4 5 4 4 Preview Lo Cancel Figure 231 Example of a Prompt 7 Button action Click Edit to open the Edit Script dialog box and define a script to run when the button is pressed The script is required for any button that does not dismiss the dialog box It is optional for buttons that dismiss the dialog box Type the script actions directly into the Action column or use the script wizard to help you write the script For more information on writing scripts refer to Scripts and Expressions SET Lobby Door Status Lobby Door pen OK Cancel Figure 232 Edit Script Dialog Box 0 Dismiss dialog Select Yes from the Dismiss Dialog drop down list if you want the prompt dialog box to close after the operator has responded If you want the dialog box to remain open after the operator has responded select No You must define a button action for any button that does not dismiss the dialog box 9 Repeat steps 6 8 for each button you want to define 10 Prompt timeout In the event that the operator does not respond within a certain time you can elect to have the prompt automatically click a button of your choice To set the prompt to time out select Automatically press button after In the seconds box type the number of seconds you want to elapse
100. will treat the alarm like it would a custom alarm or event belonging to the category you have specified The server will notify the recipients for the specified category according to the category s settings for color sound acknowledgement and archiving To specify how you want device events handled select an alarm event category from the drop down list to the right of Map device Events to To specify how you want device normal signals handled select an alarm event category from the drop down list to the right of Map device Normal to If you want the VMX300 E server to discard a category of signal select None from the drop down list for that category Refer to Alarms and Events for detailed information on how the VMX300 E server handles alarms and events NOTE Configuring device alarm mapping is a two step process In addition to the device alarm mapping defined through the local settings you must configure the device alarm mapping through the Edit Device Properties dialog box Refer to Edit a Device s Properties for instruc tions on opening the Edit Device Properties dialog box Refer to the Devices section for information on configuring the different alarms and events sent out by devices of that type Click OK The Edit Local Settings dialog box closes Click File gt Save changes to a devices local settings do not take effect until you save the server configuration C1553M B 4 05 VIEW A DEVICE S READ AND
101. window to work in Or you can use the expression wizard to create the alarm event expression by clicking the Wizard button Add New Alarm or Event Information Priority so Use Category priority Display the label For this alarm or event v Associate Source with this Alarm Event Annex Camera Annex Camera Name Front Door Breached Script Tag Front Door Breached x Edit JEast Wing Camera Foyer Camera Front Door Camera k Loading Bay Camera Main Entrance Camera Jel r Action Alarm Event Action Comment required on acknowledgement OK Cancel Figure 250 Associating a Source Device Refer to Scripts and Expressions for information on the syntax of expressions 7 Expression Type the expression that will trigger the alarm or event when it becomes true If the expression is too long for the box open C1553M B 4 05 Add New Alarm or Event x Information Name west Fire Exit Breached Script Tag west Fire Exit Breached Priority o v Use Category priority v Display the label for this alarm or event Edit v Associate Source with this Alarm Event Camera 42 Expression poor_Alarm_12 Value True TO Action Alarm Event Action Comment required on acknowledgement OK Cancel Figure 251 Entering Expression 0 Action f you want to associate one or more scripts with the alarm or event click Alar
102. 0 0 0 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RI 183 DX8000 Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions 0 0 unanenn aaee 184 ASCII Device Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions 0 cece RR 186 KBD300A Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions 0 00 0 0c cece RR RII 187 CM9760 ALM Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions 0 00 eee RR 188 CM9760 REL Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions iilii RR 189 serial Output Device Property Exposed for Scripts and Expressions 00 0 00 cece cece tee RR 190 IP Device Status Monitor Property Exposed for Scripts and Expressions iilis 190 Access Control Device Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions iiiiiiiiiissseees tenet eee eee 190 Current Status View Run Time Values of Variables isses RR 191 SA CSOUI I MRRERRETEERMOQTROTTTTCIDTTUTTEE m 191 SEINS MS RENTE ws one whee anna sare T TT TO T oe Same E ake neha ee ae ade ens eases 192 Mechanics of Editing scripts and EXDIGSSIONS us coa s4eadedendeenasthondvddundegaa A4 RP ERE eds sese egbadetias enn 194 Xs Rip cXss i E T 194 Gontext Sensitive Help Tor Scripts use cu cob sure e er PE ORE ndwwae ded EE dd ex raid xeludud bates dais 195 Context Sensitive Help for Expressions 0 nnn eee teen RR e lle 196 TREAEXOPECSION VIZ aaccitcaveapcaded E RSARAREPEGNCCIAS ETE NAS EROR PERENE MAC 198 WG SONIC uc
103. 0 Active Connections Nj 8 Available Destinations p Figure 153 Selecting Source b In the right pane select the desired destination device and select Tools gt Connect or click the Connect button S or double click the destination device or right click one of the selected devices and select Connect from the pop up menu Analog Video Connections File Edit Tools S sSeF tile Source Device Description Destination Description Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Codec 1 Codec 2 Codec 3 Decoder 1 Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Bob Codec 1 Codec 2 Opsi Ops2 Destination Device Description 1O x VFW Card No 0 Input Input Codec 3 e Ops Monitor Input VFW Card No 0 VFW Card No 0 9 7 Sources 1 Selected Ss 0 Active Connections nj 8 Available Destinations 1 Selected p Figure 154 Selecting Destination The destination device moves beside the source device in the left pane 124 C1553M B 4 05 J Analog Video Connections E ial xl xod File Edit Tools aix v e Source Device Description Destination Description Destination Device Description Camera 1 Output Bob VFW Card No O Camera 2 Output Codec 1 Input Camera 3 Output Encoder 1 Input Codec 2 Input Codec 1 Output Codec 3 Input Codec 2 Output Ops Monitor Input Codec 3 Output Ops1 VFW Card No 0 Decoder 1 Output Ops2 VFW Card No O
104. 0 dialog box 3 Configure the DX9000 settings as described in the following sections Note that you must configure the settings in VMX300 E to match the DVR settings configured through the software provided with the DVR Refer to the appropriate DVR installation operation manual for information on internal DVR settings 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New DX9000 x General Properties Alarms and Events Location Description Figure 85 General Tab for DX9000 DVR Use the General tab to enter a location name and an optional description The location name is used to identify the DVR The location name can be a maximum of 50 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Location names are not case sensitive CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Has Looping Outputs Figure 86 Properties Tab for DX9000 DVR 1 The Properties tab lists all the DX9000 DVRs that were successfully configured from the VMX300 E server NOTE f your user name and password have not been configured as described in the Preparing to Configure the DX9000 DVR section no DVRs will appear on the Properties tab 2 To enable looping outputs on a DVR that supports it click Looping Outputs Looping outputs allow the DVR to function as a source device when defining connections Refer to the DVR Connections section for mo
105. 02 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 221 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 291 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 ASCII Camera PermiSSIONS 0 0 ccc ce RRRRRRRR RR EEEE 147 CIV COFFEE POMMISSIONS oer duos cuo ute E DERE bes seein manda 5 click ed eee SoA Gse RUE SEES cade IU uo nit 148 serial Output Device Permissions 00 eee E EEEE TEENE deeb e enn ney 148 Add NOW Group Dialog BOX ee cme eeenvosedeuiee deca gadesep ey sscieees R ee TEIS Jaden ot EEEE EE a p ASEN EP i 150 Edit Group Properties Dialog BOX iis ocio ceded veut sn odor eicere oin OE KEEP 4 eaa Ea Pac RE agre 151 PUGUINOW Se UIGIOO BUS cnx cane nomeee Fone cone E sea eee estes apeees ent EE E PUCRUC REPLIES nS 153 Prowse Clo Dialog BUE od onis eritm srar ne denned seode eat urdioserseeiwecs oid pau severed aaeusevesssancsaseta 154 Pole Usor iOpen Dialog POX S ue sorsra rips ara FOE ubousohuataenuones RAER FONS ERO ON ED P ences 155 Ada New Map Dialog DOK RRRERETE TTC ET ITE narre EEEE E ENEI OEE RS ETATER 157 Edit Map Properties Dialog BOX us aeu gracie ig aaa eds ex Re eaae eor Sese eae eda A ra eae qe ace ine does oe EDA eds 158 Edit Device Properties Dialog Box 2 e RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRIR e I err 160 Fait Cocal sees Dialog BON eres etm ev tere te a vida oe eee Geeta gets teen Sane PNE E PREND PERI ERE EN ook 161 Edit Device Label Properties Dialog BOX 0 0 2c22eedcer
106. 1 1 00 1121 only A DX8000 DVR is a specialized PC that runs the Windows operating system If your system has more than one DX8000 DVR each one must be configured PREPARING TO CONFIGURE THE DX8000 DVR DX9000 recorders are password protected To access a DX8000 recorder each client workstation and the DX8000 driver must have an account defined in the Power User group on the recorder For information on setting up Power User accounts refer to the DX8000 documentation Add Accounts to the Power User Group for Client Workstations For each client workstation that will retrieve video from the recorder add a Power User account with the following settings e USER NAME The user name must be the computer name of the client workstation The user name is at least 4 characters in length and is case sensitive If the computer name is less than 4 characters in length change the computer name to a name that is 4 or more characters long or you will not be able to use the computer to access video from a DX8000 recorder e PASSWORD Each client workstation account and the device driver account must all use the same password The password must be 6 11 characters in length The password is case sensitive Add an Account to the Power User Group for the Device Driver Add a Power User account for the DX8000 driver e USER NAME Define a user name of your choosing The user name is at least 4 characters in length and is case sensitive Do not use the na
107. 104 1117 v Local Port bp a Protocol PeicoNet Remote IP Remote Port koo 2 Figure 119 Communications Tab for CM9760 REL IP Settings Miscellaneous Re arm Interval sec f Connection Attempts B El Attempt Interval sec Comm Timeout msecy 000 Idle Disconnect sec p Expect echo C1553M B 4 05 a Local IP The local IP is the IP address of the computer that the Pelco Relay driver runs on Select the local IP from the drop down box b Local Port The local port is the port the Pelco Relay driver uses to transmit commands Enter the local port c Remote IP Remote Port Protocol The remote device is the device the relay unit is physically connected to If the relay unit is connected to a PelcoNet device follow the instructions in step 1 If the relay unit is connected to some other kind of device follow the instructions in step 2 1 PelcoNet Select the PelcoNet protocol from the Protocol drop down box If the PelcoNet device has a user name and password defined in the device settings you will be prompted to enter the user name and password before proceeding Enter the IP address of the PelcoNet device in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box select the port on the PelcoNet device that the relay unit is connected to Select 1 if the relay unit is connected to COM 1 on the PelcoNet device Select 2 if the relay unit is connected to COM 2 2 Other Select the desired transp
108. 1553M B 4 05 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Maps In either pane right click the map you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens If you are sure you want to delete the map click Yes The selected map is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted map disappears from the Object Browser If the map was loaded when it was deleted it disappears from the viewport 159 160 Device Settings EDIT A DEVICE S PROPERTIES A device has certain properties in virtue of being a device of a particular type These properties are inherited from the device driver When you add a device you specify values for these inherited properties You can also change them after the device has been added by editing the device In addition to the inherited properties a device has properties that pertain to how the device is represented within VMX300 E This includes whether the device will be used in scripts and expressions and how the device s alarms will be mapped These properties are set through the device s local settings Refer to Edit a Devices Local Settings for more information My NOTES e hesettings accessed through the Edit Device Properties dialog box are driver specific For more information on the settings for the device you want to edit refer to the Devices section for the appropriate device driver e lo edit a device the driver must be running on the network Cha
109. 2 Vx O VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM e VIVDCSO0 Server Configuration Manual C1553M B 4 05 Contents darte e TER oe oe ccs poten alee poe ae eaten ooo ea ees Babee ea E ee ete i AS ee ee Se ee ee eke 17 OBIQUEIB a New OVE IBI 22 vaaierancs ste eaeats an ee ARETES EREE Sou pee deohschoutseauate 18 Set Up the Minimal CONMOULANON lt 2 ncncenstlosaneaeeadedcedusactesecdecdesantededs bea baeeadedesenekeeebeeseiasuabes 18 Pest Te Minimal ConnguratioM nc resser era opt ex raid concent ee leona caer wet er SERERE nC PNE CRUCES ES 19 Log On and Configure Operating System Settings 0 ne ee eee nnn els 20 Configure Operating System Settings 2 6 eee RR 4 elis 20 Assign an IP Address to the VMX300 E Workstation 2 00 0 RR RR III 20 Identify the VMX300 E Workstation on the Network sssssssssssss s RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR I el 22 MS ARIE IEE ENETECEETCCT TETTE NETT oo eet te ee ce wed ce eee bees Be ce ee eer Geena ne eee wee 23 Starting and STOPPING tlie SeIVel 5a ses oe ca eau ee dese ERR cee ee valine EEEE TEA REN QUI Cae REX Ru PNE RE Pe n Ps o rn 2D Launch he SENE govecuedeeueue noanea sean TETTE 26 Configure the Server While It Is Running 2 2 RRRRRRRRRRIRRIRRIR ecc HIR Iris 2 Log Out of Configuration Mode and Launch Run Mode 02 e RRRRRRIRRIRRR s 2 SHU Down the Sever co ioci carere meet s tnd pr Prem Mop octets FECI Een en De na Pace e stas oid tard eel xo e or 4d s RUN Ee put ei
110. 277 Log Viewer Window 2 Filter Categories are listed at the bottom of the window with the number of entries in each category to the right of the category To filter out entries of a particular category clear the check box to its left 3 Previous next lo view the next log click Next To view the previous log click Previous 4 When you have finished viewing the logs click Done The Log Viewer window closes Q TIP Double click the Log Viewer title bar to maximize the dialog box Double click again to restore the window C1553M B 4 05 Appendix ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY ADJUST THE OBJECT BROWSER DISPLAY When the Object Browser is docked you can adjust its width Position the pointer over the border that abuts the map viewport When the pointer changes to a double headed resizing pointer drag the border to the right or left As you change the width of the Object Browser the map view port automatically adjusts to fill the available space You can also drag the vertical bar in the center of the Object Browser to adjust the relative size of the two panes Undock the Object Browser You can undock the Object Browser as follows 1 Click the Object Browser title bar and hold the mouse key down 2 Drag the pointer away from the title bar A gray rectangle surrounding the pointer appears 3 Release the mouse button The Object Browser moves to the space defined by the gray rectangle Alternatively right click anywhere in the Object Br
111. 5 L Figure 122 Edit Point Dialog Box 2 lypea new name for the point The name can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks 3 Click OK The dialog box closes and the new relay point name appears on the Relay Points tab and in the client Device Control dialog box C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE DIP SWITCHES TAB Add New Device EEEE SEREREEEER LOK __cancel_ Figure 123 DIP Switches Tab for CM9760 REL The DIP Switches tab provides a schematic of the DIP switches located under the front panel of the relay unit Set the DIP switches in the schematic to match the DIP switch settings on the relay unit CONFIGURE THE MODEL TAB Add New Device Pelco 9760 Relay v Figure 124 Model Tab for CM9760 REL The Model tab displays the model of relay unit supported by the Pelco Relay Driver Only one model is currently supported C1553M B 4 05 103 ADD A SERIAL OUTPUT DEVICE The serial output driver can be used to send ASCII commands to an external serial RS 232 device For example you could send ASCII commands to report alarms to an access control system start a VCR in play mode or control a camera Note that the particular device control commands that are available and the ASCII strings that represent them depend on what is available in the specific device Refer to the device s product documentation for information on the protocol for tha
112. 53M B 4 05 Table AN Script Commands Continued Optional arguments are in parentheses Refer to Properties of Objects for valid properties and values of different types of objects tead o LOAD map tag named view gt Load the specified map or named view into the map viewport ON ERROR GOTO label identifier If an error occurs continue running the script at the specified label ON ERROR GOTO 0 If an error occurs continue running the script at the beginning of the script ON ERROR RESUME NEXT If an error occurs continue running the script at the next line PAUSE duration Pause the script for the specified number of seconds The dura tion can be a decimal amount e g 3 5 PROMPT prompt tag Display the specified prompt in the client window RUN global script tag Run the specified global script in a new thread SET client tag Workspace path name gt oet the client workspace to the workspace file specified in the path name e g SET Client1 Workspace cAWorkspaces Operator Workspace wsp SET device tag name gt lt write property gt oet the write property for the device to the specified state for the device tag name state FOR lt duration gt specified number of seconds SET global tag gt lt property name value oet the global tag property to the specified value Refer to Properties of Objects for valid properties and values SET hotlink tag gt lt property name gt lt
113. 6 Output Pelco ASCII Switcher Input amp Camera Output Cameras Output Pelco ASCII Switcher Output External Monitor 1 Input Pelco ASCII Switcher Output2 External Monitor2 Input Pelco ASCII Switcher Output3 Operator 4IVPN No 0 Red Input Pelco ASCII Switcher Output4 Operator 4IVPN No 0 Green Input Pelco ASCII Switcher LoopingInput1 External Monitor3 Input Pelco ASCII Switcher LoopingInput2 Pelco ASCII Switcher LoopingInput3 Pelco ASCII Switcher LoopingInput4 Pelco ASCII Switcher LoopingInput5 Pelco ASCII Switcher LoopingInput amp Pelco ASCII Switcher LoopingInput Pelco ASCII Switcher LoopingInput8 g 20 Sources S 8 Active Connections my 6 Available Destinations A Figure 163 Connecting ASCII Devices inputs VMX300 E will not be able to switch the cameras until connections are defined for them Two of the switchers four outputs Output1 and Output2 are connected to external monitors The other two outputs are connected to a video display card s inputs on the client called Operator The switcher s Loopinglnput1 which transmits the input from the switcher s Input1 is connected to External Monitor3 Since Input is connected to Camera External Monitor3 will always display the video from Cameral C1553M B 4 05 129 Archive Servers Archive servers are used to permanently store information about alarms and events When an alarm or event be
114. 86 400 seconds 24 hours Click OK The Add New Timer dialog box closes and the new timer is created The name of the new timer appears in the Object Browser C1553M B 4 05 EDIT A TIMER NOTE f you change the script tag for a timer any script that refers to the timer will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the timer s new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Timers In the right pane double click the timer you want to change or right click the timer and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Timer Properties dialog box opens Edit Timer Properties Timer Information Mame Sequence Delay Script Tag Sequence _Delay Timer Details Start timer when the following expression is true Device _Commloss Value 1 ol Qj Enable timer output after fio seconds med Figure 236 Edit Timer Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the timer as desired Refer to Add a New Timer for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Timer Properties dialog box closes DELETE A TIMER Deleting a timer is irreversible If you delete a timer and then change your mind you must add a new timer Also note that if you delete a timer any script that refers to it will contain an error 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Timers In the right pane right click the timer you
115. C Device Drivers C Global Scripts Cd Global Tags Labels E Logs CJ Maps CJ Prompts Ga Recipient Groups C Schedules Server Ties CJ Timers CJ User Groups users Figure 167 Opening Project Properties Dialog Box CONFIGURE A PRIMARY SERVER C1553M B 4 05 Project Properties Project Name Headquarters Facility Network switching Archiving Date Time E mail This Server Server Type Primary v Client Port sz000 Driver Port 32001 FTP Port s2002 j Cancel Figure 168 Configuring Primary Server 133 134 To configure a primary server 1 Server type The Server Type option is only available under software licenses that support backup servers Select Primary from the drop down list 2 Project name lype a descriptive name for the project The project name is at least one character and at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks By default the computer name is used as the project name The project name appears at the top of the Object Browser Wherever instructions for navigating the Object Browser are given in this manual the top of the Object Browser is referred to as project namel As well the project name is used as the server name in server configuration mode and in the client For example if you browse servers when defining a server tie the servers are listed by project na
116. CC ALNUM gt Default Generic Pattern Figure 146 Predefined Patterns List VMX300 E provides the following predefined patterns e Pelco ASCII Protocol Switch Pattern Use this pattern for any access control device that employs the Pelco ASCII Protocol to switch cameras to monitors in response to alarms In this case the point number in the alarm string is a camera number Refer to How to Define Alarms Based on Access Control Points Example for instructions on configuring VMX300 E to switch cameras to monitors in response to alarms e Pelco ASCII Protocol Alarm Pattern Use this pattern for any access control device that sends out an actual alarm number rather than a camera number as the Pelco ASCII Protocol Switch Pattern does The VMX300 E response to an alarm that matches this pat tern is determined by the scripts you associate with the VMX300 E alarm or event that is triggered when the point s read property is set to True e Default Generic Pattern Use this pattern for access control devices that allow you to customize the strings that are sent out when alarm conditions are detected For a description of the syntax used in the predefined patterns refer to Pattern Syntax 3 Double click the pattern that you want to use The Pre defined Patterns list closes and the selected pattern appears in the Pattern To Match box C1553M B 4 05 Create a Custom Pattern as the Pattern to Match Edit Access Control Properties
117. Click the Supports Reset Pattern field 2 Click the Reset Pattern To Match tab 3 Click Custom 4 Type a description of the pattern 5 Type the pattern Refer to Pattern Syntax for information on creating patterns 6 Optional Click Make Pre defined to the pattern to the Predefined Patterns list Pattern Syntax A pattern is a regular expression that is used to match patterns of text in access control alarm strings Patterns are written using special symbols each of which describes one or more text strings Note that you can only define one Pattern To Match per access control device so the pattern must be general enough to match every alarm string you want VMX300 E to manage Table C describes the symbols you can use to define patterns Point Number Placeholder he point number placeholder is the symbol that matches the point number within the alarm string The symbol for the point number placeholder is ALNum Every Pattern To Match and Reset Pattern To Match must contain a single instance of the point number placeholder To insert the point number placeholder into a pattern quickly and easily click Insert point number placeholder in the Pattern matching Dialog box You can also type in the point number placeholder Syntax in Predefined Patterns e Pelco ASCII Protocol Switch Pattern 0 9 Ma ALNum a This pattern matches a string that contains a number made up of one or more digits followed by the literal Ma followed by
118. Color 1 Choose Fal Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose i Cancel Figure 117 Properties Tab for CM9760 REL Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of the CM9760 REL unit s icon viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each relay unit Unknown state When the relay unit s Status property equals Unknown the icon is the color specified here Normal state When the relay unit s Status property equals Normal the icon is the color specified here Alarm state When the relay units Alarm write property equals True the icon changes to the color specified here If you change either Color 1 or Color 2 then the icon flashes alternately between the two colors when the relay unit is in the alarm state Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload C1553M B 4 05 99 100 CONFIGURE THE COMMUNICATIONS TAB 1 Connection Type Specify the type of connection between the device driver and the relay unit e DIRECT SERIAL The relay unit is connected using an RS 232 to RS 422 converter or using an RS 422 PC serial port e NTERNET PROTOCOL The relay unit is connected to the serial port on a networked device e MODEM This feature is reserved for future development 2 Settings Complete the instructions provided below for the appropriate connection type
119. Control Mone v Figure 127 Communications Tab for Serial Output Device Serial Settings C1553M B 4 05 105 a Select the VMX300 E COM port the serial output device is connected to from the drop down box This is the COM port on the workstation that the Serial Output driver runs on b The remaining settings should specify 9600 baud no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no flow control Internet Protocol Settings Add New Serial Output Device General Properties Communications Custom Buttons Connection Type Ir Direct Serial Internet Protocol C Modem Settings Local IP 101041147 Local Port 5b a Protocol Peiconet gt Remote IP NENNEN Remote Port koo Figure 128 Communications Tab for Serial Output Device IP Settings a Local IP The local IP is the IP address of the computer that the Serial Output Device driver runs on Select the local IP from the drop down box b Local Port The local port is the port the Serial Output Device driver uses to transmit commands Enter the local port If your system is secured behind a firewall enter one of the ports made available by the firewall Otherwise enter 0 to have the driver randomly assign an available port When the local port is set to 0 the driver has many ports to choose from If two or more users attempt to control the serial output device at the same time the driver assigns a different port to each user When a specifi
120. DEEDEE EEEE EEEE DEERE aed dd ndis 134 DIE NC E 136 i TIE P A 137 Bo nia 232 at caren none enue T E Hert cele os bate E ede sees eeb tale teed beets dese su EAE 138 SUNL MF 139 User Groups ME 141 Groun Penes OS eeror EE EET EEA AE REE EE E RE E A FUE AS 141 Mixed Camera PEIRISSIBIY eernorgsediipre tekir eune E rE EE enti aE Eee EARED one 142 SPA MTS TO serr eta ps chip e EE E E E Stearate EARR E ES 143 C1553M B 4 05 5 PelcoNet Device Permissions 0 ccc a RR RR RR as 144 External Monitor Permission deus baswpro rb ocean ke ooeb02 ewebee tones pccd wand Souseded dee EEEE p d eges iura 144 DOO OOF SWS SOS sane a teers reese aces Ea ete eos erate eee a a ees eet ei et eo eee EE 145 DOO SIN 222 ec ade ces hoses eee TITRE 146 ASCII Device PermlissloflS us scoperte a davon Ro a cto potere retra d ee an tance nen ode eee ees 146 RB JUUA PENISON s 2od 5c0ccece erect ces Ere ee nee ee eoEe eee coed poset IMPERII he ica ue ELE 147 CM9760 ALM PermisslollS 2044 eee e des vantage eem ed wale ee Hues me ee e Re alsa Ne tu eb Rr oe Weds por ae Era e ax 147 CITC HEL Penis ONS C os pedea Lee teri reRChetuE ida ne eoueies odd be caadudecstate ERE REED E ade 148 SECA DUEDUEPEPTUSSIO IS xxeuskteucz wn ardov acai M bci a aire on Rer e ac rae on i c Ae oca A Rocca o de dier en
121. Driver 192 168 1 102 ORION 192 168 1 151 2036 192 168 1 151 caresi Figure 266 Selecting a Remote Server Driver Remote Server Driver 192 168 1 136 32001 Alarms and Events Clients Connections El Device Drivers External Monitor Driver 192 168 1 144 2003 B Lo Camera Driver MS 168 iF 144 iue B Sarver EMO 3 Read Properties Door Alarm Write Properties Sources Cami Cam2 Cam50 Camb53 PN50 00 07 5F 20 04 21 PN53 00 07 5F 20 03 F4 I ese ese E FTP Sites Global Scripts Global Tags Labels Logs Maps Prompts Recipient Groups Schedules Server Ties Timers User Groups Users Figure 267 Viewing Devices Alarms and Events C Create connection If you are sharing analog signals create a connection from the server tie to the destination device s input Refer to Connections for instructions Analog Video Connections f oj xl F Edit Tools p PS 7 THER T7777 7777 RR DestinationDevice LocalServer Server Tie From to B Switcher B InputO00001 Switcher B InputOOO002 Switcher B OutputOoo1 Monitor Input Switcher B InputOooo03 Switcher B OutputOooo2 Switcher B Inputooo004 Switcher B Inputoooo0s Switcher B Inputoooo06 Switcher B InputOooo07 Switcher B Inputooo00s 9 3 Sources Ss 2 Active Connections ry 7 Available Destinations A Figure 268 Creating a Connection For Server B C1553M B 4 05 d Add
122. E server Refer to the appropriate DVR installation operation manual for information on DVR internal settings To synchronize the VMX300 E server to the DVR configure the VMX300 E server by entering the IP address or hostname of the DX9000 DVR in the Network Time Servers list on the Date Time tab of the Project Properties dialog box Refer to Project Properties for more information If you have more than one DX9000 DVR synchronize each one to a particular DVR then synchronize that DVR with the VMX300 E Server C1553M B 4 05 Project Properties 3 x Network Switching Archiving Date Time Network Time Servers gl Hostname IP Address Port Add Remove 60 Synchronize every minutes Server Corway Facility fol Figure 247 Synchronizing DVR with Server b Run an archive server This ensures that alarms and events can be recorded First launch the archive server Refer to Archive Servers for instructions Then add the archive server to the server configuration using the Archiving tab of the Project Properties dialog box oelect the archive server Refer to Project Properties for instructions on adding and selecting archive servers Project Properties x Network Switching Archiving Date Time Archive Servers Port v DEMo 3 192 168 1 101 32003 Figure 248 Running an Archive Server c Turn on alarm event archiving Turn on archiving for the alarm event
123. E Admin Level 3 lt aD oe A A E Corway Facility Site Iv Y Global Scripts Figure 255 Changing Label Size 2 Move the pointer away from the label to make the label larger Move the pointer towards the center of the label to make the label smaller 3 When the alarm event label is sized the way you want it press the left mouse button The label s size freezes NOTE You cannot change the orientation of an alarm event label Labels are always oriented horizontally C1553M B 4 05 233 234 EDIT AN ALARM EVENT LABEL 1 Right click the alarm event label and select Edit Label from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the label not the icon before right clicking Alternatively navigate the Object Browser to project name Alarms and Events alarm event category name In the right pane double click the desired alarm or event or right click the alarm or event and select Edit from the pop up menu then click Edit Label The Edit Label Properties dialog box opens Edit Label Properties x Text Aa AT Text Properties irai Door Alarm C Left Justify Center Justify Line 2 C Right Justify Line 3 Font r Background Border C Transparent C None Opaque Color Single Line TN Figure 256 Edit Label Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the label as desired Refer to Add a New Alar
124. EEEE redd pug Deva lds 68 L ontigure the Model lab ee scetur ta ae ma Goes lm em ence E qr wade Pri Pies sa mter bode wea grs We Daria eae 68 Petra TOULE E scu ePPETIUMRORIUdrIUS P ie guna COD eeeculut DN NE dd EIU Due a E 69 Contigure the General Jab 1s so secedescne ernea Rn DRE RED pea HREEERR INRET S P TAE RE RI S qur RP E ed E9 06 69 Lontgure te Properes TaD 2 2 2octterecas8eeeteue cde tdededdae rona ATEA EE DNE EEEE eter tupeddaxagetay i oces 70 CONTOUR the Auxiliares TAD ossi ru ore nares we hora RR REDE ER TRECE ne denla E EE E bode eg ERE REP a a E 70 Ped a UO EMT 71 Preparing to Configure the DX9000 DVR isse sseederh eventing Re eR TNE RR RH EEA REE debe ERIS FERE dates T Add a DX9000 DVR to the Server Configuration ics css ce bzRre ebbe p br rpE ER E DEEt Ie RR ETENEE aE DERE Eb 78 GONTIQUIE the General TAD access ae ends Rashes we nm m haa ew eee pe Peer PERS LE FE bode wea a E E Pere pao ea 78 L ontigure the Properties TaD i abren exa pue yee edd D ERI RR S ERREUR odd EE EE EAEE bed E ours cues 78 Configure the Alarms and Events Tab 0 0 0 nnn e rens 79 DVR Troubleshooting If You Change the VMX300 E Operating System Password 0000 00 ees 79 nord piti 3 2 5 2 anes opis d ba emia aE Puna aes EE bs cee E eats spaces odd a es wae aces 79 Lontgure tie General Tlf o4cn20 25cn ned Giro tre ESSO eie Patre eouleeaw duros ide geli dated ag od ndi d 80 Configure The Properties TAD is cer ot ceo scr reet FEETRR EY DERI TYPI IDE Ge
125. EO STREAM SETTINGS FOR YOUR CONFIGURATION VMX300 E can combine analog and digital video streams for viewing on the VMX300 E client The total number of digital streams that can be displayed is limited by the size and type of images selected for viewing Table B identifies the CPU workload and bandwidth amounts used for each type of video stream Table B includes the recommended PelcoNet setting identified by the gray row Your selections may vary depending on system bandwidth limitations or other restrictions A N CAUTION System performance will be compromised if the number of video streams is exceeded or if the PelcoNet settings exceed the C1553M B 4 05 recommendation provided in Table B Also note that CPU workload could vary depending on additional system activity that may be occurring at the same time For example using scripts viewing analog video or using hyperlinks to change map displays could all affect the CPU workload It is recommended that you monitor the CPU workload level under a variety of system conditions while testing your system configuration to identify the optimal number of digital video windows allowed for your configuration Note that if the VMX300 E client is operated from a separate workstation instead of the same workstation running the VMX300 E server then you may be able to display more digital windows since the VMX300 E client would not be using the VMX300 E server s CPU A NOTE ABOUT MULTIP
126. EVICE PERMISSIONS Each Access Control device that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Table S Access Control Device Permissions Can edit points Do not use this permission it is reserved for future use Can access on screen display Do not use this permission it is reserved for future use Can view device icons on client Make device icons visible in the client and list the recorder in the Device List THE PREDEFINED USER GROUP VMX300 E provides one predefined user group Users The Users group initially has all Window Content and Client Workspaces permissions but no Administrative permissions You can change the privileges granted by the Users group rename the group and delete the group The predefined operator account belongs to the Users group Refer to Users The Predefined Operator Account for more information C1553M B 4 05 149 ADD A NEW USER GROUP Once you have created a new user group you can then make any new or existing user a member of the group There is one exception groups that grant the Can configure software permission are not available to users who can manage users but cannot configure software This prevents users who can manage users but cannot configure software from giving themselves software configuration privileges 150 You can create a new user group from scratch or you can base new groups on an existing group To create a new user group based on an existing group ma
127. I 117 Define Alarms Based on Access Control Points liiiiissssssssssesssssseee RIRs 122 OS OMG GENTS O 124 Managing COMMECUONG oaccncteceecoaccs ee derecedees ec eT EEIE EE ye PANI UPDAIENERUCESUPITAEEN eSI FUN EEEIEE ES 124 Feeo Ct GONMECHIONG ss saxi aenea i iren Erara eee seen Aae aean i ou see teense aoanceases 126 Wy CONIMOGHOING 2226 ee ecueen 4 e524 cree ee adee eo ccetes eeeuereaue det ee hensaneon E E set aeyeeseestet as 128 ASCI CONME CIOS 22 44 2460 55 enenaye sorts oaueded oceae oon Ss dee POPMA CM Ani NE eM APVT EIE 129 PU ING OCIVCNG acces acre at oan ee IRR PU semen bese abean ne occa dened AVETE MUNI SERR ied aoe ERR 130 DELLI KOM SCRE oe ecucenctdennaces pyeseec E laet as ieerue tae muni SENE sub E EE Lad 130 View Archive Server Slats cc acancoecicuad sed Gate SSComiseerhber gerntig4ebribes ss ded tabsddastaracadechdesie batasdaes 131 DUE Down an Archive CINE cn ceudayeeses ew oteas riera ENAERE ses vnc nde yee Nene ue meee aes de ud CEDENS RESI 132 PIGJCCE TOPICS EE kena ee cance susees puesGehahdteeteneesd noises octee nae eee aes pubes obese nee ue SE veer sas 133 du d MT C 199 CORMIOUES a Priman SVET c eaotton ces POE S ES Scis Hoke Bene eaten UNU EE EEEREELPUN DURUM EURO RUE ERES 133 Configure a Backup Server sies scssesesd i ererpid eaei inc biberet
128. I NG WIGAN sas ce boone en sane TETTE OEE EEE EET EEEE EE TEET TETEE TTT 203 Adjust the Object Browser Display Seca es cona iret tac hutetr du dowd b d etcas sd acerbe studs daSuntEH gae Catia s 293 Biss ism VINGOWS saerad eer ERIAREN AAAA RA AETERNE RETETE TEESE 254 BE e GOING E EE E E EE E EEES EE E 254 RUE TIU 4 08 aye hen E E E E E EEEE E EEE EE EEE T E EEEE EEE EEE E 254 Use Copy and Paste to Create a New Object 0 cence RR le 755 Use Copy and Paste Many to Create Multiple New Objects 000000 eee teen eens 255 C1553M B 4 05 9 C1553M B 4 05 List of Illustrations o N o o Aa WN 94 00 06 9 08 99 C1553M B 4 05 UTOR USdI C 115 15 REN EEETECT ETE TT TE TUO Tu 19 Session Mandager TODI Dal societe Set RULES EbS SES OX RUMPIT SEEN AEE PASST RS SEPS IE RES NIST 19 Opening the Local Area Connection Properties Dialog BOX lssssssssssssssseRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRIERHII 21 Intermec ProreeoH TCP IP Properties Dialog BOX ossa due ure end bed ERE RGGexueE dad RiNGUI RSS ESIRXGe Aha S OIRincexa 21 Identify the VMX300 E Workstation on the Network issssssssssssss eR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RR RR e 22 Advanced TCP IP Settings Dialog Box WINS Page 2 dsuscduecctcascednetesesesdedsiseasgysdadecaxereeceadeuiadesvst 23 Windows Operating System Services WindOW 0 0 RR RR s 24 TCP IP NetBIOS Helper Properties Dialog BOX iiiiisssssssissssssssse RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRM III 24 GOTVEI MOOI Diai
129. I O cre ucact tases dep sateen a dee a ae ohare ond Und 4 ere ae oes gu ado ws Gab SUME SA Seth US Go oes POOR aoe 210 C1553M B 4 05 7 TIMES ARCRRRCCTERERRCREE I L I 211 Aa NAON TOR RET ERTNEC TREE tt oe cect es oo RR TTME M ER A 212 Se E 8 0 S E E EE ee ee ee 213 Pelee a TIMET cites te cee eect neee Sac eee ee ope ue bebe awe ones eccbee ae oes eed de adabes ee euebese cet 713 SEDET E S E EE E E E E E E E EE 214 Auda New ochedUlE Lecco said be ee pe e E rE A ADEA E EA EP E E 214 edita o Odes soo esu PR aah aes oo ones eS ee Pod 6 en ee oe ee PCR EP REP TOU eSI bseU 218 Delet adach dE TEREETCREETTTOTEERTTTTEIETTTTETCTTRRUru E 218 AE NU EVCWNS EEEE E EE E E E sander E E E E EE E 219 Ove eis he Velie WOK o esce actua ATAN Ae AS See te uses gt eh e a NREN 219 When an Alarm or Event is THOQGGICO ox cua cosas dedero bte erii deli Eee ed 4394 tad RSSeEEGSGsi24s abdesedabatadsees 219 perator DEB o acude E den T needa cudeyeey oe cae vente san sade eo Ead Ud ats deat aes 220 PEKDONWIGHUEUIBNE erossspectbsickuscSscssciESsSESUSSSCISPSOOIRDSQIPRRP Ne t UsJCPRERUPLeSSPGOSERROOIEPSSOPRSRE OE 220 Access Alarms and Events Defined on Another Server RR Re 27 Alam ds SQUE SP serres eerste aus sodtacs 1eeededeaeieucarde haved Hd mced sid ban bd peste ecateedesseceavassins 222 Add a New Alarm Event CUO Tc 227 zou ri cuis RP RTT
130. I Switcher oelect the switcher model from the drop down box ADD AN ASCII CAMERA The Pelco ASCII device driver controls cameras routed through a Pelco matrix switcher using the Pelco ASCII protocol The Pelco ASCII device driver supports the following cameras e Any fixed camera e Pelco Spectra II e Pelco Spectra Ill e Pelco Esprit Before you can add an ASCII camera to the server configuration you must first start the ASCII device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers Pelco ASCII Driver Cameras 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New Camera dialog box appears You can also configure camera settings after you have added the camera to the server configuration Right click the camera and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New Camera dialog box 3 Configure the camera settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box 5 Configure the analog connections between the switcher cameras and output devices Refer to the ASC Connections section 84 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New Camera l General Properties Auxiliaries Location New Camera De
131. IP addresses of any NVR300 computers that are recording a stream from this device Remove Configure OK Cancel Figure 60 NVR300 Recording Tab Pelco NVR300 Series network video recorders are used to record streams encoded by the PelcoNet device When you add an NVR to the VMX300 E configuration the following functionality becomes available e A camera connected to the PelcoNet device is enabled as an archive video source An operator can then view video from the PelcoNet camera that has been archived through the NVR e The NVR300 IP signal source property becomes available for that NVR Refer to PelcoNet Device Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions for more information Note that you must set up and configure the NVR for recording Refer to the Pelco NVR300 documentation for instructions on working with the NVR300 You can also click the Configure button on the NVR300 recording tab to access the NVR configuration application Complete the following steps to add an NVR300 to the list of network video recorders 1 Click Add The Add NVR dialog box appears C1553M B 4 05 63 Network Settings IP address Browse Cancel Figure 61 Add NVR Dialog Box 2 You can either enter the IP address of the NVR you want to add or click Browse If you click Browse to automatically locate the NVR300s that are visible over the network the Browse Units dialog box appears Click the desired NVR and the
132. LE CLIENTS If your system requires only one client the client and server applications can both run on the same workstation To optimize system performance in a multiple client system each client application should run from a dedicated client work station Additional servers in the same system VMX300 E only should be run from dedicated server workstations as well Table B Digital Video Stream Settings Maximum Number of Streams PelcoNet NET300 Series and NET350 Series Transmission Systems VMX High Quality Stream 1 Optimize setting 16 VMX Standard Quality Stream 2 Optimize setting 16 High Quality CIF Factory default setting DX9000 Series Digital Video Recorders Half Frame Rate Live Video Archived Video Full Frame Rate Live Video Archived Video PelcoNet NET 4001A Transmission System MPEG4 High Quality CIF Factory default setting VMX Standard Optimize setting MPEG2 5 MBps High Quality Factory default setting 2 MBps Low Delay Optimize setting DX8000 Series Digital Video Recorders 320x240 5 IPS Normal image quality setting 6 740x480 30 IPS Normal image quality setting 3 or 6 if using two DX8000 units 640x480 10 IPS Normal image quality setting 59 60 CONFIGURE THE ENCODING DECODING TAB PELCONET 4001A ONLY Add New PelcoNet 40014 d Encoding Number of simultaneous streams MPEG 2 m MPEG 4 5 Multicast
133. LOAD maptag namedview where maptag a valid map tag namedview optional named view 4 map with tag BAXTER_BUILDING does not exist Figure 221 Script Syntax Hover Help If there is an error in a script or expression when you save the server configuration the Script and Expression Verification window appears and gives you the option of correcting the error before exiting Ey Script and Expression Verification Compilation initiated 5 27 16 PM Wednesday January 07 2004 Creating equations Creating equations complete 0 error s Found Start of procedure compilation Compiling Script Camera Sequence T 000000 0 Compiling Script Camera Sequence 1 complete 1 error s Found Compiling Script Camera Sequence 2 Compiling Script Camera Sequence 2 complete 0 error s Found Compiling Label Map2 Title Compiling Label Map2 Title complete 0 error s Found Compiling Label Map1 Title Compiling Label Map1 Title complete 0 error s Found Compiling Hotlink Level 2 Compiling Hotlink Level 2 complete 0 error s Found Compiling Hotlink Level 3 Compiling Hotlink Level 3 complete 0 error s Found Compiling Hotlink Level 4 SE 10 ET I lt Previous Fix Next gt OK Figure 222 Script and Expression Verification Dialog Box To correct errors caught when you save the server configuration 1 Inthe Script and Expression Verification dialog box double click the error y
134. Loca Server Browse Behavior C Dynamic IP Fixed Analog Signal Compatibility analog video vr 1 Cancel Figure 270 Edit Server Tie Properties Dialog Box 2 Change the properties of the server tie as desired Refer to Add a New Server Tie for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Server Tie Properties dialog box closes DELETE A SERVER TIE Deleting a server tie is irreversible If you delete a server tie and then change your mind you must add a new server tie 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Server Ties In the right pane right click the server tie you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the server tie click Yes The selected server tie is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted server tie disappears from the Object Browser 244 C1553M B 4 05 FTP Sites FTP File Transfer Protocol is a set of communication rules that allow two computers to exchange files over a network The FTP image capture feature allows you to capture live video in a custom window and upload the image file to an FIP server such as a Web host The action of capturing and uploading an image is controlled through the FTP script command To use the FTP image capture feature you must do the following procedures e Configure FTP site Add the FIP site to the server configuration Refer to Add
135. My Network File name Server B_backup_2FEB mdb Places Files of type Microsoft Access Database mdb Cancel A Figure 276 Restore Database Dialog Box Click Browse to navigate to the folder containing the backup file that you have created Click the backup you want to restore and then click Open Click OK in the Restore Database dialog box A confirmation message box appears Click Yes The database is restored and you are reminded to restart the server Click OK to close the reminder dialog box 4 To access the restored version of the database shut down the server and relaunch it C1553M B 4 05 251 System Logs VMX300 E maintains a log of system activities for diagnostic purposes Activities fall into three categories e System Background activities that are not seen by users such as opening sockets and compiling scripts e Administrative Server configuration mode activities e Operational Activities initiated in the client such as operator initiated changes to a device s controls or acknowledgement of an alarm or event You can filter out categories of activity that you do not want displayed Logs are stored in text txt files a new one for each day the server is run The VMX300 E server provides a log viewer to locate and view log files The log viewer displays one day of logged activities at a time You can step forward and backward through logs without exiting and reopen ing the viewer Ea
136. NICS OF EDITING SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS You can create and edit scripts and expressions by directly typing the code or by using the script wizard and expression wizard In either case context sensitive help is available to help you create error free code KEYSTROKE EDITING Use the keystrokes listed in Table AO to edit your scripts These are also available from a pop up menu by right clicking the line of code you want to edit Edit Global Script Properties Global Script Information Name Camera Sequence 1 Script Tag Camera Sequence 1 m Global Script Events 4 SET RecipientObject Windowl Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Paste Insert Ctrl P Delete Del 1 Move Up Ctrl U Move Down Ctrl D OK Cancel Figure 209 Keystroke Editing Camz Output Cam3 Output Table AO Keystrokes for Editing Scripts Q TIPS e You can apply the keystroke editing options to more than one line at a time Select multiple consecutive lines by clicking and dragging the line numbers in the Event column e l fyou delete a line of code from a script then change your mind use the Undo option to undo the deletion Right click the line you deleted the code from and select Undo from the pop up menu 194 C1553M B 4 05 C1553M B 4 05 CONTEXT SENSITIVE HELP FOR SCRIPTS To he
137. OM A MAP Removing a device icon from a map does not affect any other icons for that device whether they are on the same map or another map nor does it affect the device in the Object Browser If you change your mind after removing a device from a map you can add it back as described in Place a Device Icon on a Map Q TIP You do not need to have a device icon on a map in order for the device to function The icon s role is to provide operators with an active visual representation of the device its status and controls With the desired map loaded right click the device icon you want to remove and select Remove from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the icon not the label before right clicking The device icon disappears from the map If it is displayed the device s label also is removed from the map C1553M B 4 05 165 MOVE A DEVICE LABEL You can move a device label independently of the icon itself To adjust the position of a device label 1 With the desired map loaded right click the device label you want to move and select Move from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the label not the icon before right clicking 2 Move the pointer to the label s new location The label follows the pointer as you move it The icon does not move 3 When the label is located where you want it press the left mouse button The label freezes in place SCALE A DEVICE LABEL Changing the size of a d
138. ONS Source devices and destination devices Devices that transmit a signal are called source devices For example any device with video out such as a camera is a source device Devices that receive signals are destination devices For example any device with video in such as a monitor is a destination device Some devices such as switchers act as both sources and destinations 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Connections In the right pane double click the type of connection you want to manage The Connections dialog box opens Source devices are listed in the left pane Destination devices are listed in the right pane Analog Video Connections File Edit Tools ial x Camera 1 cm Bob VFW Card No 0 Camera 2 Output Codec 1 Input Camera 3 Output Codec 2 Input Codec 1 Output Codec 3 Input Codec 2 Output Encoder 1 Input Codec 3 Output Ops Monitor Input Decoder 1 Output Ops1 VFW Card No 0 Ops2 VFW Card No O 7 Sources Ss 0 Active Connections inj 8 Available Destinations p 2 Adda connection Figure 152 Connections Dialog Box a Inthe left pane select the desired source device Analog Video Connections File Edit Tools lal x Bob VFW Card No 0 Codec 1 Input amer Output Codec 2 Input Codec 1 Output Codec 3 Input Codec 2 Output Encoder 1 Input Codec 3 Output Ops Monitor Input Decoder 1 Output Opsi VFW Card No O Ops2 VFW Card No O 7 Sources 1 Selected F
139. OSTARSIDO BO ee as cee ae Serene PERI cease ea ceeee SI ork eh rene Rosen aece ne dusEPPtqe PEEL yeaa 13 select Users Or Groups Dialog BOX xa ccsa seecee ipis iP reU es RRERERNRII dei panke pSxuaddedyes es ede dene 74 New User Added to Avusers BIOUD cc essa mar RE Ee Ru ER e ine x Ra der eae wakbbesadu dees donned evicewnees 74 SUG OT LOGI WNGG BOX 15 ST EIER 1S1 NE 2p neste enaudow ances yeeant S NRA nee oe foo ene NE eae eee aces whee eetne ean de eee ze ris Entering DASODU NAME iu o ced cadecebevercad scan dave se aehaveretaeaivsdewetetiae ss ideed augeeseduediwaedacdaes 76 Adamo DA SUE ru EE 76 success or Failure Indication 2 ene eee ttn e ele TI DA9DUD CODDOUESEIOFI Pall se oco ceed trade o cte 9 eI aTe E E DERE REE FA AOTEA R E E PE TAE S ores 71 General lab Tar DAJO Dri T 78 wis emissa ao DASS VB eassa eacee aaea ae aE EAEE a R S R A A E AAE A SESE E O E E EARN EE EE PAURA AOE as 78 General Tab tor an ASIE SWINE o ccn06d aree a pu pes a ert pEr eE A a EXTR CENE ED re EE ER ot ER cows 80 Properties Tab for an ASCII Switcher 0 RR RR RR Rei 80 Communications Tab for Switcher Serial Settings cc 220 506 dengeceeaw edad agen teogweddexede dace seiewddeence ey eo isderss 81 Communications Tab for Switcher Internet Settings ss 0 e RRRRRRRRRRRRRIRRRRRR es 81 Miscellaneous Section of ASCII Switcher Communications Tab 2 2 ananuna anaana aaaea aaea aeaaea 82 UO Ja
140. PERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Read Commstatus The device driver is successfully communicating with the camera Offline The device driver cannot communicate with the camera This could be a result of the serial cable being removed or the camera s power being turned off In Spectra III cameras offline status could indicate that feedback expected from the camera was not received Preset The camera s current view is not the result of a preset preset The cameras current view results from going to this user defined preset This value is created when you create the preset Note that equals the preset number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Pattern NoPattern The camera is not currently running a pattern pattern he camera is currently running this user defined pattern This value is created when you create the pattern Note that f equals the pattern number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Continued on next page C1553M B 4 05 181 Table V PTZ Cameras Properties and Values Continued TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Preset DontCare When a SET statement with a FOR clause causes a camera to go to a preset the camera is locked in the preset view for the duration specified in the FOR clause The lock is auto matically released once the specified duration has elapsed Setting the Preset write property to DontCare releases
141. Pre defined Patterns list opens 2 Click the pattern that you want to delete You can only delete patterns that were created as custom patterns and then saved to the Pre defined Patterns list with the Make Pre defined feature You cannot delete the predefined patterns that are provided with VMX300 E 3 Click Delete The pattern is removed from the list 4 Click Custom to return to the Pattern To Match tab or the Reset Pattern To Match tab C1553M B 4 05 121 DEFINE ALARMS BASED ON ACCESS CONTROL POINTS The Access Control driver sets a read property to True when it identifies an alarm from an access control device Any further action by VMX300 E depends on alarms and events created by you to detect the change in the read property s value Depending on the nature of the alarm you might want to simply archive a record of the alarm or you might want to write scripts that perform complex tasks in response to the alarm Alarm Expression To define a VMX300 E alarm or event that is triggered by an access control alarm add a new alarm to the server configuration and base the alarm expression on the appropriate point For example to define a VMX300 E alarm that is triggered by a Point 3 alarm from the device AxCtrl use the following expression AxCtrl Point 3 AxCtrl True Resetting Alarms Once a VMX300 E alarm or event has been triggered by an access control alarm you must reset the point s property to False If you do no
142. Processes Performance Networking MEPU Usage CPU Usage History Figure 1 Windows Task Manager Using the Session Manager to Evaluate CPU Workload The rectangle at the right end of the Session Manager tool bar in the client application represents the CPU usage of the workstation you are logged in to As usage increases the rectangle fills with color from the bottom Position the pointer over the rectangle to see a dynamic numeric readout of the CPU usage percentage aar eaea RD Figure 2 Session Manager Tool Bar C1553M B 4 05 19 Log On and Configure Operating System Settings N CAUTION Contact your network administrator to assist you in configuring the network features of the VMX300 E workstation 1 Connect the VMX300 E workstation power cord to the workstation power input and then to an uninterruptible power supply UPS 2 On the front panel of the workstation press the power button to power on the unit 3 The VMX300 E boots and then the Microsoft Windows log on dialog box appears 4 Logon to the Windows desktop with the following user name and password User Name AvUser Password 1234 5 Click OK The Windows XP desktop appears 6 Configure the operating system settings as described in the following sections 7 Repeat steps 1 6 for each VMX300 E workstation in your system CONFIGURE OPERATING SYSTEM SETTINGS Before starting the VMX300 E you must configure the f
143. R RRODR ERE EEE ened gr AEE d pedro bode eg aaa 105 Configure the Communications BD es ssresricrsiaskerirrers tatn On TEE AR EErEE REEDER a EIE DUREE 105 CGontigure the Custom BUttONS LED vea uec o acpentterg Freya Era A E a PEWS EATE REE EE S TEE na dnt 107 Limitations of Controlling a Serial Output Device sssssesssssssssseseRRRRRRRRRRRIRRRRIRRIRIR III 108 Add an P Device Status Monitor uen eca emt sarees re emet er waded ewes edo E prae eed a ees AE xe Dae eae 109 Conng re the General MTRC 109 Configure the Properties Tab ss eocsete nonu tx eR E ORPHEUS exe cued aos Hele WA ae Hew a boa y coe eds eles ewan eden 110 COMTIOUIE The kon Animation Tab 2 o5heccnde2eesddusstettcreddee rin Ers HOM Re rribpPe4ss RP ste Ee AGREED 110 Add an Access Control Device 2 ene rr rae 111 How the Access Control Driver WOIKS 22e cue erre aaron Thri E Eene Rr RR E ERE ERE rr Rd da 111 Add an Access Control Device to the Server Configuration 0 0 00 RII 111 Comig rethe General Tal sues ogttesced pee reker or dkr AiE eoddors dhe PU Sees RP PPSR PRAE Pddq pug Detg iMd 112 Configure the Properties Tab oe eee e aas 112 Configure the Communications Tab i sscsscescu e eR he Rr Rr rb ey Ia ped seeds esweeweesedetesas 113 Contigure ACCESS Control PONS s eost tt crece p Dr THEE ENEE cues aes EEPERRUMPENSPUSHS PNIS purge P Pqeuue a Ears 114 Configure Pattern Matching for Incoming Alarm Strings 0 0 0 0 RR RI
144. Rd ANSA UP su IEEE 192 keystrokes TOI EBD SCHNE aad caducum dad ate bt ex d Rte tidaddud eed other sensdeseadassvasdsgcatdondexUbs deri des 194 TIMER ODE nd VO sess taedas Slee ee S EPPEACC AS oe ee I ERR SAEC Rd TU RE ER ERREN 211 Pop up Menu Commands oaaao a aaan RR e ees 254 C1553M B 4 05 Introduction The Pelco VMX300 E Video Management System uses a Windows based interface to control any combination of analog and IP devices in a single integrated video security system With a mouse you can click a camera icon on a system map and then drag it to a video display window Mapping configurations and a visual interface allow you to easily control the following devices e Matrix switchers CM6700 CM6800 CM9740 CM9760 CM9770 CM9780 e PelcoNet MPEG Series transmission systems NET300 Series NET350 Series NET4001A e DX8000 and DX9000 Series digital video recorders DVRs and NVR300 network video recorders DX8000 software version level 1 1 00 1121 only e Spectra and Esprit camera positioning systems e M9760 ALM and CM9760 REL input output devices VMX300 provides control and monitoring of CCTV equipment in a client to server configuration VMX300 E provides control and monitoring of CCTV equipment in the following configurations client to server multiple clients to server or server to server Each VMX300 E system must have at least one workstation with server software Workstations with server software always incl
145. RepRRREHER canted Ta RR hesveuwelewstadtea wap rersaesdeles 62 11 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 ANVR SOO Recording TaD 63 PO PU DIODO eoir reer p heres DERTERUPeETIEIUI exe ensedU DUI kes ceot eecete ee eels R r oles 64 Embedded NVR300 Web Server 2 IRR RR RR RR e ees 64 General Tab Tor External MORET iuuat dr dam ete rod thor edd gee eke eat eed eee T ree recae eines RA ade dare n 65 Properties Tab Tor External MOTUITDE olus ERE DR RE E RR tiin ati RrXSWRATeXTa GR XG i RES OX P dee ry Go xd on are a 65 oeneral Tap Tor UXSUOU DYR P 67 FIODeHICS TID TOF DAGUUU DVR erreian rrisin piee ANEA EEEIEI EEEN EIRAN ESNEA TERETA NUTS 67 Communications lab Tor DASUDD DV obruit ERRARE RS rutru AR AGE RARPEWax Ue Cad E XacE CRT QE EEErbea eS 68 Modol Taoto DASOOU DVR ETE 68 General Tab for DX8000 Camera needed ee tbe bet RR ele 69 Properties Tab for DX8000 Camera 0 RR RR RRRRR RR RR RR ell 70 Auxiliaries Tab tor DXGUGU Cameras acier ua caa att t hr b EXC EON A OS iae e ed br v baw kesh pr Rea bue aree 70 Computer Management WiINGOW gt ease sspDERPSROe t arIPzere4 4 REprid erc bari Seeds coches fee bdenddeusseetarzotad H 8 0 ICI ERNRRRCRCRERERCTRTCROMTE pr NeW Ser Didog DOK ENEERMTREE iZ CONS ON RRERCCTPC m 73 Auser PIOBERI
146. Replay script can also be run on demand by a recipient To run the On Operator Replay script the recipient selects the entry in the Session Manager An alarm or event can be replayed no matter what its status When an operator replays an alarm or event the following occurs e he On Operator Replay script runs e On the workstation of the operator who replayed the alarm or event an entry recording the replay appears in the Session Manager The entry displays in the alarm event category s Color Operator replays do not do the following e Change the icon color e Change the icon animation e Play the alarm sound e Require acknowledgement e Affect the workstation of any operator except the operator who replayed the script ACKNOWLEDGEMENT If Requires acknowledgement is selected for the alarm event category the entry will remain active until the alarm or event has been acknowl edged either by an operator or by automatic acknowledgement If more than one operator is notified of an alarm or event only one operator needs to acknowledge it To acknowledge an alarm or event an operator must do one of the following e Highlight the alarm entry in the Session Manager and click the Acknowledge or Acknowledge with Comment button on the Session Manager tool bar e Right click the alarm event icon and select Acknowledge or Acknowledge with Comment from the pop up menu If the alarm or event has been triggered more than once in quick successio
147. SIONE acne snis n EUD R CURED oar Ace E 4 ance mati deranas deat quanto WR gate OR IIU WU NEdUN AE Up ds ae en ee RUIN ERU 146 ASCII SwWitEher PENIISSIONS reenen nEri eU ial Rae aeui Per rri dob eris C pice er V ea dyes md CUR ede ei dunt 146 Bol Camera Petmils tol Ss omen cria bodes chen EP dod etd hie dne dba oia fad qiciAdbd qid RPG Esdr dd Ex WES RE 147 PoU OUA TON Oe ees etes wy kia ore oe tees ected o quePITPEqUEAMUPICILCRPREETRETIE REV CDD E E E S dO PEE RES 147 CMY76J ALM Penni SiO i 2 2a d rci sc P9 dro Pp ERR IRSE RD PREDA Fo bpIuES D yx ud eds es ResTbM Ps 147 CI GUHREL cr OMMMCSIONG sense eser ur Ra W aen RC LCNI PERS ERdUSeEaC ELA A EACP M saheancagedaeu aeua ec E dC eS 148 oeral Duiput Device Permilsslo 18 s s ome dada exa ay rS deci RS TRASY ERNATEN Eg ede E Ead dessus xA sede iu 4E 149 IP Device Status MODIOITSITTUESSIODS sca acute R3 atop RC ri rra ce ba S SC OG E atio cce e S Eee vans 149 Access Control Device Permissions 0 00 0 RR RR RR RR elles 149 Properties and valges OF DDI BISLus cosa ed dez uat coven bee taute ceva kan WEM sad hee eau Sob cede SUUS aUa ETE ta s 180 Fixed Camera Properties and Values 2 0 ene et nee RR e ees 181 PIZ Cameras Properties and Valles Ja eiue chem ctm tn b ect ek ero Ts a wow x Rc Reo We deci E awl a Ga i eg oA 181 PelcoNet Device Properties and Values iiiiisssssssssseseeeee eR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RR RH ens 182 External Monitor Properties and Values liiisssiessssss
148. Schedule Dialog Box 2 Schedule name Type a unique descriptive name for the schedule you want to create Schedule names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Schedule names are not case sensitive 3 Enabled disabled f you want the action to execute as scheduled click Enable If you want to prevent the scheduled action from executing click Disable This gives you a quick way to suspend a schedule temporarily without having to delete the schedule and re create it later 4 Frequency and start time lo select the frequency with which you want the scheduled action to execute click the appropriate radio button a Monthly Click Monthly to have the scheduled action execute once a month In the Start At area specify the day of the month and time of day for the action to execute To set the time select the hour minutes or seconds and click the up and down arrows To execute the action on the last day of every month regardless of how many days there are in the month select 31 as the day b Weekly To have the scheduled action execute once a week click Weekly In the Start At area specify the day of the week and time of day for the action to execute To set the time select the hour minutes or seconds and click the up and down arrows Select a day of the week from the drop down list 214 C1553M B 4 05 C1553M B 4 05 C Da
149. Script Tag Camera_Sequence_1 r Global Script Events Action LABEL StartSequence SET RecipientObject LiveSource Cam3 0utput SET Cam3 Preset NorthView FOR 5 PAUSE 5 SET Recipient bject LiveSource Cam4 Output PAUSE 5 SET Recipient bject LiveSource Cam3 Output SET Cam3 Preset UpperLevel PAUSE 5 OK Cancel Figure 224 Camera Sequence Script C1553M B 4 05 201 EXAMPLE 3 ALARM LOCATION SCRIPT The following alarm scripts highlight an area on a map when the alarm is triggered then return the area to its normal appearance once the alarm has been acknowledged The scripts use a hotlink called Aread1 to do this The On Event script changes the hotlink s normal and mouse hover colors to red and makes the hotlink background visible by giving it a transparency of 10 The On Acknowledge script sets the hotlink s colors back to the default color and makes the hotlink background invisible The effect is to make the hotlink appear red when the alarm is triggered Edit Alarm Event Action Edit Alarm Event Action E xi On Event 3 Actions On Operator Replay 0 Actions On Acknowledge 3 Actions RENI SET Area5l HoverFillColor Default SET Area5l NormalFillColor Default SET rea5l NormalTransparency 100 OK Cancel Figure 225 Alarm Scripts 202 C1553M B 4 05 Global Scripts Global scripts are scripts that can be run from other scripts using the RUN or CALL command This
150. TCR TTE T 199 eu C EITOTSC ODIO a oa secco tuas um 644 ETE qReRESTeerbeubent dues ebaued ved Ven Bi eeedewcevesdausecearassdes 200 Ear SCN aves eee eee ied sa MEME UM ebd E A nde ewok a canoes UM EE IEEE 201 Example T Inrralizatton ST IDE a race annoy a e nos d arte ae ede ud ed Radio aX EEIE SEENE ERATEN EIRE RES 201 Exam Caner SEDUBDIPE 2 eure waduu dere cece tae Re PU CER LAME UIDES Fanos abun casa ENNET 201 Example S Alam LoESHODY SCHL 23 uoa attt died doa dre e tt enibra Se ERE d x mut ied ER kd end cw datedid creatos de eda dens 202 CNG EE E REPETIT ORT RTT TRPLEITT n7 203 Adda New Glogal SEDE ac curia aite orn nac icit RR anda aule c uitae actes tenant iu ad area xor eset aids alge ee unda geratur eats 203 Edit a Global Script iiiiisiiisssssssssseeese RR RR RR RR eee ls 204 I6 IE GGG OCHO 4 cect wen vex ueber eet nace cares IDEE Baoan 45 4 UID RIMIS QE ENS MERE Cru i d dde Ra dS 204 DB PQ 205 o NLIS SUID MI TEE 205 zB e 205 3 cre NE TI 206 Wisi MEMRRRCH MIRM 207 BOO e EU POM saute Ga ame eager gas tates ird ha dE RECEN EESEI ARS OP RA dS aad SERI E YES 207 UNG MONDE MR E 209 Daro a
151. Test controlling the camera Repeat this for all the cameras that are configured Test the other devices in the Device List How you test each device will depend on the type of device Refer to Devices in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual for more information 6 Evaluate the CPU workload It is recommended that you monitor the CPU workload under a variety of system conditions while testing your system configuration If your system frequently exceeds 85 CPU usage you may experience system performance problems The following factors can contribute to a high CPU workload e The number of custom windows that an operator is using at one time to view digital video streams e hequality bit rate and type of digital video streams e hefile size of a map that an operator is viewing e he size of device icons and alarm event icons on maps e The size and function of hotlinks on maps e Whether a device icon or alarm event icon is flashing to indicate an alarm state To monitor the CPU workload you can use either the VMX300 E Session Manager in the client application or the Windows Task Manager Using the Windows Task Manager to Evaluate CPU Workload Open the Windows Task Manager and then click the Performance tab The CPU Usage portion of the window displays the current workload level You can also click on the Processes tab to see which programs are using which percentage of the CPU iol xj File Options View Help Applications
152. Through Switcher 126 C1553M B 4 05 Encode video from switcher s looping inputs The PelcoNet device encodes video that is from a switcher s looping inputs The PelcoNet device s input is connected to the appropriate looping input on the switcher CAMERA MATRIX SWITCHER NET4001A Analog Video Connections ipi x File Edit Tools Sa eke tale Source Dev Description Destination Description Destination Device Camera Output Matrix Switcher Inputi Matrix Switcher ZU Matrix Switcher Output1 Matrix Switcher Input3 Matrix Switcher Output2 Matrix Switcher Matrix Switcher LoopingInput1 Encoder Input Matrix Switcher LoopingInput2 Matrix Switcher LoopingInput3 Matrix Switcher LoopingInput4 Ng 7 Sources n 2 Active Connections Nj 3 Available Destinations Figure 158 Encoding Looped Video Decode video to output device The PelcoNet device decodes video directly from an output device such as an external monitor The PelcoNet device s output is connected to the output device s input NETWORK NET 350 EXTERNAL MONITOR ioj xi File Edit Tools iw tle Sourc Description Destination Description Destination Device Description Decoder Output Monitor Input Mg 1 Sources n 1 Active Connections Nj 0 Available Destinations Figure 159 Decoding Video Directly Decode video to switcher The PelcoNet device decodes video that is
153. Tor CMS760 ALIVI eases aeaa aE tmc ctr ns cae etit ence Ret occ Rr acc ce loe wah Ra t 94 Properties lan Tor CM9 GO ALM 94 Communications Tab for CM9760 ALM Serial Settings 0 nee en enn e ee 95 Communications Tab Tor CM9760 ALM IP Settings 2 20060 eren RR RE a RR RE ERREUR Ed w ER Rer ELDER REL ET 95 Miscellaneous Section of Communications Tab 2 RR eel 96 UENIRE Susi 2d 97 Eu PON IBID DOK cou endtesncsb oS pet sod eed teeeseeecdssebndee snare ntanede dead edd peds ected AEAEE maiis sd 97 Mogel Tab TOP CI GUL orae eat PRETCURS ReRP ER ERO Rc came tae vue wea a s Sei ate ae RCM d eT ra Ed 98 General Tab TOP OU RE nd aco sre vd d ande QU ERG dueinbzasehcerbereweidegqicsds iuis de sqe09kRerCeicvRAes 99 Properties Tab for CM9760 REL ue cia aren ooo i fro wanders anne bem ae USae x ena care x eat Male macicieln alsa ae Dex pag aede mown 99 Communications Tab for CM9760 REL Serial Settings lisssssssssssssssss RR 100 Communications Tab Tor CMS7OU REL IP SeHiIntiS ss uiua rex tene bt Renee Gd eens sooty ees a ERR ER SLE EE 100 Miscellaneous Section of Communications Tab sss cea bE pier ek DER eR Eg D PebER Re dees evod wteetides ols 101 Relay Points Tab Ter 6M B7OU BEL uir mrcgrkdets tcm Record E ek ard tatis Rc woe es c bor ws deae iru ee Pace a o re eo aos 102 C1553M B 4 05 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 192 133 134
154. Use the computer name to refer to the client in scripts and expressions For a list of client properties that can be scripted refer to Scripts and Expressions Properties of Objects 3 Default workspace If you want the server to supply a default workspace to the client you are adding type in the pathname of the workspace file you want to load or Browse to select the desired file VMX300 E loads the default workspace for any operator whose user preferences are set to Use the workspace supplied by the server Refer to Workspaces for information on creating workspaces 4 Click OK The Add New Client dialog box closes and the new client is added The name of the new client appears in the Object Browser EDIT A CLIENT S PROPERTIES 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Clients In either pane right click the client whose properties you want to change and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Client Properties dialog box opens Edit Client Properties Client nono ererieisueneni ees E P E EE Computer Mame operations 1 Browse Nee te e eee c Cameleon Enterprise Workspaces default opere Browse Figure 19 Edit Client Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the client as desired Refer to Add a New Client for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Client Properties dialog box closes 34 C1553M B 4 05 DELETE A CLIENT NOTES e Deleting a client is irreversible If yo
155. WRITE PROPERTIES Devices have read and write properties that can act as variables in VMX300 E scripts and expressions Read properties Read properties indicate the state the device is in at a particular time You can use the device s read properties in any context that reads the value of a property but does not change it such as an alarm event expression or an IF THEN command You can view the value of a read property at any time using the Current Status option refer to Current Status View Run Time Values of Variables in the Scripts and Expressions section Write properties You can use the device s write properties in any context that changes the value of the property such as the SET command For example a script that turns on the wiper for a camera with script tag Camera would include the following statement SET Camera Wiper Camera1 On Specific Device Read and Write Properties The particular properties of a device and the values each property can take are device dependent To find out the properties for a particular device that is installed on your server display the Read Properties and Write Properties for the device Refer to the Scripts and Expressions section for a complete list of each device s properties Refer to Scripts and Expressions for information on the scripting language in VMX300 E NOTE A devices properties can only be used in scripts and expressions if they are exposed All device properties are exposed by defau
156. Whenever you change how a device driver is configured in the primary server configuration copy the updated driver database to the backup location to ensure the backup is current Update driver information In server configuration mode on the backup server edit each device driver in turn to change the IP address and listening port to the address and port of the computer the backup driver is installed on This ensures that the backup server accesses the backup copies of the device drivers rather than the primary copies Run backup archive server Running a backup archive server is recommended if the primary archive server is installed on the same computer as the primary server application since access to the archive server is lost if the computer fails If you are archiving alarms and events configure and run a backup archive server This ensures the backup server can provide access to archived alarms and events Launch the archive server at the backup location On the Project Properties Archiving tab in the primary server configuration add and select the archive server running at the backup location You should have two archive servers configured on the primary server the primary archive server and the backup Alarms and events will be recorded on both archive servers NOTE For automatic switchover to the backup server to occur the backup server must be running when the primary server fails The backup device drivers and archive server must also
157. a New FIP Site for instructions e Write script Write a script that initiates an FTP image capture Refer to Write an FTP Script for more information You might also want to do this e Adjust image attributes Adjust the dimensions and quality of captured images Refer to Clients Custom Windows and Canvases Canvases Add a New Canvas General for more information ADD A NEW FIP SITE To add a new FIP site 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt FTP Sites Double click Add New FTP Site in the right pane or right click FTP Sites in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The New FIP Site Properties dialog box opens with the General tab showing 2 General tab C1553M B 4 05 Add New FTP Site x General Firewall Name 2 New FTP Site Script tag New_FTP_site Remote Hast Information Host name or IP address Port Username Password Directory h Connection type Passive Cancel Figure 271 New FTP Site Properties General Tab Name Type a unique descriptive name for the FIP site you want to add FTP site names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks FIP site names are not case Script tag If you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long
158. a eins 28 Shutting Down While in Bun MOGe gosse steer Ert brR Rer aeron kri arnari E EARE EEE EEA A E RR nd 28 Shutting Down While in Configuration Mode Only iuuusuusssssssssseeeeRRRRRRRIRRRIRRRRRRRR IRR 28 Ep MPNERETRRRERRETRI OESTE 29 Adda IDs co eaves er cect eee ee Ge ee es ee oe ee ee fe ae ee eee MEME EE LE EM 29 HOIBIG EE uses heddbesqenbicrbuierauucereabuesepRU ae eed RI an eo tea oe ae eet d eden iud do Mera 30 Staring and Stopping Device DEINBIS iue nc venues dod cindtdeletscaeadeecasd sd betedsdaueddeatassddced reeds deoeteteotsedeers 31 S rong 13 DINED 22 uns ceed ween raa e Sr kee Lacs noe bene tue seas yo esens obec beste eset taceuess 31 oH Downa Device DIUI cae scuste aerem ich eEdiddux ieeus uvsidieribRoserssiedcaEGJeudaieewNd ideis dudam ded 32 Clients Custom Windows and Canvases iisssssssssssssee EEEE J3 Bir EET EEEE EEE E EEE TEA ls ae reenter a ee ne oe ee eee 33 Workspaces M 33 ioo ES cs CRISI sesane TETUR obo de bee ei eoda eee ben basins ade g EE eer ase bee eeeee leads 34 Edit a Client s Properties icssesess e reeex E e REX eben RR eet Ram ERES RIT ASa RE acad Ea pres 34 Delta CIENT EC 35 Custom Windows 0000 RR RR RR RR RR Re les 36 How Many C stom Windows to DORTIGUEG sat re eee cs cacti fe acce Soa aoa erated bon eins ce eeeese wens ETE DUS od Soap d ed 35 Add a New Cus
159. a user name and password complete the Username and Password fields Click OK The Firewall Settings dialog box closes 2 Ifthe e mail server requires a user name and password complete the fields in the Logon section C1553M B 4 05 User Groups User groups are a security feature A user group embodies a set of privileges called group permissions that are granted to every member of the group These permissions delineate which parts of the VMX300 E software group members can access To limit a user s access to the software restrict the users permissions oetting up user groups requires forethought about what tasks you want different users to do If you want a user to do a certain task you must set up a user group with the permissions needed for that task then make the user a member of that group Conversely if there are certain tasks that you want to preclude a user from carrying out you must make sure the user does not belong to any group that grants the permissions needed for that task A user can belong to more than one user group When a user who belongs to more than one group logs in to the VMX300 E server the permis sions are treated as cumulative in the sense that the user is granted all the permissions of each group he belongs to For example a user who belongs to two groups Group A and Group B has all the permissions of Group A in addition to all the permissions of Group B when logged in to the server Unlike the serve
160. ables can be compared to They are written as follows object tag name property value name where object tag name is an object s script tag and property value name is a value of that particular object property For example the following are all valid property values Door_Alarm True DVR2 Online Alarm Timer True Other possible values are the following e Numeric values e X Boolean values False True or 0 1 Refer to Properties of Objects for a list of valid object properties and values C1553M B 4 05 179 180 PROPERTIES OF OBJECTS Object properties perform the role of variables in VMX300 E scripts and expressions Table T lists the properties different types of objects have and the values each property can take oince device properties are device dependent the specific properties of each device are listed in the tables following Table T Refer to View a Device s Read and Write Properties in the Device Settings section for more information on viewing read and write properties Table T Properties and Values of Objects uu e 5 path e g c Program FilesCS ProgramFilesvalarmworksapce wsp custom Windos device tag name map tag name Date DayOfMonth se 2294 DayOfWeek Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday computer name or IP address URL e g www devicesrus com YY eg 200 Global Tag False true or 0 1 URL URL e g www devicesrus com eae
161. above the destination device are already connected the destination device will not move 125 b Move down To move a destination device down in the list select the connection and select Tools gt Move Down or click the Move Down button Jb Alternatively right click the connection and select Move Down from the pop up menu The destination device moves down to connect to the next available source device below it in the list leaving the source device it was originally connected to unconnected If all the source devices below the destination device are already connected the destination device will not move 0 Autosize column headers To adjust the width of the columns in the Connections dialog box select Tools gt Autosize Column Headers or click the Autosize Column Headers button Columns that are not wide enough to accommodate the full device names are increased Columns that are wider than they need to be are reduced 9 Print connections a Select File gt Print or click the Print button 4 or press Ctrl P The Print dialog box opens b Select the desired printer and click Print The list of connections prints The list includes additional information not provided in the Connections dialog box specifically the driver each device is configured under and the driver s IP address and port 10 When your connections are set up as you want them click OK or select File Close or click the Close button at the right end of t
162. affect the value of the expression the expression is evaluated If the expression becomes true as a result of the event the timer starts counting down If the expression becomes false as a result of the event the timer is reset to its delay value If the value of the expression does not change as a result of the event the timer is unaffected Property Timers have one property Value that can be used in scripts and expressions The Value property can be True or False 1 or 0 It becomes true when the timer reaches zero It is reset to false when the timer is reset to its delay value States Timers have three states 1 Reset he timer is set to its delay value 2 Countdown The timer is counting down from its delay value 3 Expired he timer has finished counting down to zero Reset In the timer s reset state the expression is false and the timer is set to its delay value In this state the Value property is false Countdown When something happens that could affect the value of the timer s expression the server evaluates the expression If the expression becomes true as a result of the event the timer is started The Value property remains false This is the countdown state If an event occurs while the timer is counting down which makes the expression false the timer is reset to its delay value Expired f the timer counts all the way down to zero the Value property becomes true This is the expired state The timer remains in the e
163. al sec 3 Comm Timeout msec 000 Idle Disconnect sec p 4 Expect echo Figure 91 Miscellaneous Section of ASCII Switcher Communications Tab Idle Disconnect sec X Enter the number of seconds of inactivity you want to elapse before VMX300 E closes the COM port direct serial connection or the local port IP connection The port will open again automatically when a new connection is established with the switcher Use the default value of 0 to indicate that the port should never be closed while the driver is running Note that the following fields should not be changed Poll Interval sec This field is reserved for future development Connection Attempts This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 3 Attempt Interval sec This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 5 Comm Timeout msec This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 1000 Expect echo This field is reserved for future development 82 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE 1 0 TAB Edit Properties New Switcher General Properties Communications yo Number of Physical Inputs f 6 Number of Physical Outputs k Ez Specify Logical Ranges Looping Inputs Figure 92 1 0 Tab for ASCII Switcher Use the I O tab to specify how many physical inputs and outputs are available for switching cameras and to specify logical number
164. ally Closed Alarm Inputs State of Contact NO NC C1553M B 4 05 CM9760 REL PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists CM9760 REL relay interface unit properties that can be used in scripts and expressions Table AG CM9760 REL Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Head Status The device driver cannot communicate with the device The device is in its normal state Unknown The communications status between the device driver and the device cannot be determined Alarm The relay unit is currently in an alarm state The relay unit is not in an alarm state Point_ii The relay output numbered is True The relay output numbered is False Alarm set Alarm to True to indicate the CM9760 REL is in an alarm state CM9760 REL icons flash in the alarm colors when Alarm is set to True set Alarm to False to indicate the CM9760 REL is not in an alarm state Point oet Point to True Example SET Relay Unit 01 Point 001 True oet Point to False Example SET Relay Unit 01 Point 001 False Note that iii equals the relay output number which can range from 001 to the maximum number available on the relay units the maximum number for one relay unit is 64 with two daisy chained relay units the maximum number is 128 and so on Changing the State of a Relay Point An operator can change the state of a relay point by working within th
165. alue of a device property Priority Enter the priority with which the schedules activities are to be treated by the server VMX300 E uses priorities to resolve situations in which two or more objects attempt to control a particular device at the same time The object with the higher priority number is given control of the device The highest priority you can assign to an object is 99 The lowest is 1 System events have priority 100 Users schedules and alarms and events all have a priority The scripts associated with these objects inherit the object s priority Recipients Select the recipient group you want notified when the scheduled action executes Recipients are only notified if they are logged in to the client when the scheduled action executes specifying recipients also determines which clients the schedule s script runs on A schedules script runs on the client of any operator specified in the schedule s recipient group provided the client is running and the operator is logged in when the script executes If the client is not running or the operator is not logged in or if no recipients are specified in the schedule VMX300 E runs as much of the script as possible namely statements that do not require a recipient such as a statement that sets the value of a device property C1553M B 4 05 Recipient group Select the recipient group from the drop down list If you have not created the recipient group yet finish adding the new sche
166. amp Canada Tel 800 289 9100 Fax 800 289 9150 International Tel 1 559 292 1981 Fax 1 559 348 1120 www pelco com IS09001 United States Canada United Kingdom The Netherlands Singapore Spain Scandinavia France Middle East
167. and expressions For a list of alarm event properties that can be scripted refer to Scripts and Expressions Properties of Objects 4 Priority Enter the priority with which the alarm or event s activities are to be treated by the server in the Priority box or select Use category priority to inherit the category s priority Refer to Alarm Event Categories Add a New Alarm Event Category for instructions on setting the category s priority VMX300 E uses priorities to resolve situations in which two or more objects attempt to control a particular device at the same time The object with the higher priority number is given control of the device The highest priority you can assign to an object is 99 The lowest is 1 oystem events have priority 100 Users schedules and alarms and events all have a priority The scripts associated with these objects inherit the object s priority 5 Alarm event label f you are going to place alarm event icons on maps and you want the icons labeled select Display the label for this alarm or event To edit the text and formatting of the label click Edit The Edit Label Properties dialog box opens C1553M B 4 05 225 226 Edit Label Properties f x Text Text Properties Line 1 West Fire Exit Breached C Left Justify Center Justify C Right Justify Background 4 Border C Transparent C None Opaque Color Single Line
168. and freight should be prepaid Ship to the appropriate address below If you are located within the continental U S Alaska Hawaii or Puerto Rico send goods to service Department Pelco 3500 Pelco Way Clovis CA 93612 5699 If you are located outside the continental U S Alaska Hawaii or Puerto Rico and are instructed to return goods to the USA you may do one of the following If the goods are to be sent by a COURIER SERVICE send the goods to Pelco 3500 Pelco Way Clovis CA 93612 5699 USA If the goods are to be sent by a FREIGHT FORWARDER send the goods to Pelco c o Expeditors 473 Eccles Avenue South San Francisco CA 94080 USA Phone 650 737 1700 Fax 650 737 0933 REVISION HISTORY Manual Date Comments C1553M 8 04 Original version C1553M A 3 05 Revised to reflect software changes as a result of ECO 04 10212 C1553M B 4 05 Revised Table B Digital Video Stream Settings and revised the notes on using special ASCII characters in scripts and expressions Table Al Serial Output Device Write Property Pelco the Pelco logo Spectra Genex Esprit Camclosure and Legacy are registered trademarks of Pelco PelcoNet Endura and ExSite are trademarks of Pelco Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Copyright 2005 Pelco All rights reserved PELLO Worldwide Headquarters 3500 Pelco Way Clovis California 93612 USA USA
169. ar user has access to are determined by which user groups the user belongs to Refer to User Groups Group Permissions for more information PREDEFINED USER ACCOUNTS 152 THE PREDEFINED ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT VMX300 E provides a predefined administrator account that allows you to configure the server The user name and password for the predefined administrator account are the following e Username administrator e Password 2899100 The predefined administrator account cannot be deleted nor can it be fully edited The only properties you can change for the administrator account are the password the user s name and the priority Unlike other user accounts the administrator account does not acquire permissions through membership in user groups The administrator account allows you to log in to server configuration mode and perform all configuration activities You cannot log in to the client using the predefined administrator account To log in to the client use the predefined operator account or add a new user that belongs to at least one user group THE PREDEFINED OPERATOR ACCOUNT VMX300 E provides a predefined operator account that allows you to log in to the client without having to add a new user The predefined operator account can be edited and deleted Initially the predefined operator account has a user name but no password e Username user e Password lt none gt Like all properties of the predefined operator acco
170. ard Properties i x General Communications Logical Mapping Device Count 72 24 App Device Type Camera Monitor Keyboard Device a zl Import Export Coree Figure 106 Logical Mapping Range 4 Release the mouse button VMX300 E automatically numbers the selected devices consecutively starting from the number of the first device in the range Pelco KBD300 Keyboard Properties l x General Communications Logical Mapping Device Count 72 m Apply Device Type Camera Monitor Keyboard Device E zl Import Export ames Figure 107 Consecutive Logical Numbers ADD A CM9760 ALM ALARM INTERFACE UNIT The Pelco ALM driver supports the CM9760 ALM alarm interface unit which can be used to bring contact information into the VMX300 E system Examples of contacts that can be connected are motion sensors door switches and pushbuttons Refer to the CM9760 ALM Installation Operation manual for information on connecting devices to the alarm unit Each alarm module supports 64 alarm points and up to 4 modules can be daisy chained together for a maximum of 256 input points on one serial port Before you can add a alarm unit to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navi
171. arm Event Categories section for information on configuring alarm event categories Complete the following steps to configure an e mail server 1 C1553M B 4 05 select the appropriate server type If you use a Microsoft mail server follow the directions in step a If you use an SMTP server follow the directions in step b d b Microsoft Mail Click Microsoft Mail and then type the Profile Name Standard SMTP Click Standard SMTP and then complete the following fields Host Port Reply Address Firewall This is the IP address or computer name of the SMTP server This is the listening port assigned to the SMTP server This indicates where the e mail is from and appears in the From line of the e mail header This field is optional however some Internet providers reject e mail that does not have a reply address Complete the steps listed in the Configure Firewall Settings section following if the SMTP server is behind one of the following types of firewalls e Tunnel e Socks 4 e oO0Cks 5 139 140 CONFIGURE FIREWALL SETTINGS 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Firewall The Firewall Settings dialog box appears select the type of firewall from the Type of Firewall drop down box Type the address of the firewall host type either a web address such as www fwallhost com or an IP address Type the firewall host s listening port in the Port field If the firewall host requires
172. ate the Object Browser to project name Maps map Named Views In the right pane right click the named view you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the named view click Yes The selected named view is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted view disappears from the Object Browser 169 C1553M B 4 05 Hotlinks A hotlink is an area of a map that when clicked runs a script Hotlinks are generally used to run a script that loads another map effectively linking the maps If you want you can omit the script when creating a hotlink In this case the hotlink is for information only to define an area on a map ADD A NEW HOTLINK Q TIPS e locreate a hotlink that is perfectly rectangular apply a grid to the map The corner points of the hotlink will snap to the closest grid point If you want turn the grid off after you ve created the hotlink e Conventionally a clickable hotlink changes color when you move the pointer over it To create a hotlink and place it on a map 1 Load the map you want to create a hotlink for The map appears in the map viewport 2 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Maps gt map gt Hotlinks Double click Add New Hotlink gt in the right pane or right click Hotlinks in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu If you move the pointer over the map in the viewport it c
173. ate the Object Browser to project name Users In the right pane double click the user you want to change or right click the user and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit User Properties dialog box opens Edit User Properties User Information User Name DayOperator Password m HM Confirm Password iee E mail Address E Full name Day Operator Description Generic logon for Day Operators Member of Groupts Users operators Priority so 1 lowest 99 highest Import f Cancel Figure 191 Edit User Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the user as desired Refer to Add a New Userfor information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit User Properties dialog box closes DELETE A USER Deleting a user is irreversible If you delete a user and then change your mind you must re create it using the Add New User option 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Users In the right pane right click the user you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the user click Yes The selected user is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The name of the deleted user disappears from the Object Browser NOTE You cannot delete the user you are currently logged in as C1553M B 4 05 155 Maps Maps provide VMX300 E operators with a graphical representation of the
174. available for switching cameras a Enter the numbers you want to use to identify inputs in the Input Range box b Enter the numbers you want to use to identify outputs in the Output Range box You can list numbers and or specify ranges Example 101 103 109 112 115 121 is a valid input range for a switcher with 16 available inputs In this case physical Input1 will be named Input101 in VMX300 E physical Input2 will be named Input103 physical Input3 will be named Input 104 and so on If looping input is enabled for the switcher the Loopinglnputs will be named Loopinglnput101 Loopinglnput103 LoopingInput104 and so on NOTE f you assigned logical numbers to the inputs and or outputs when you configured the switcher through the management system provided with the switcher you must assign the same logical numbers in VMX300 E For information on accessing the management system functions refer to the appropriate switcher installation operation manual 4 To enable looping inputs on a switcher that supports it click Looping Inputs Looping inputs on a switcher allow the switcher to function as a source device when defining connections Refer to the ASCII Connections section for more information C1553M B 4 05 83 CONFIGURE THE MODEL TAB Add New Switcher General Properties Communications VO Model Specify a Device Model to ensure accurate feature support Pelco CM 6700 omen Figure 94 Model Tab for ASCI
175. b TOF ASUILSWIECDBES c aucem d uo ex daos Har ead bed bacio a dado xadoe atiende wasted dd eite eite EEEIEE 83 Edit Logical Ranges Dialog BOX s uecetenta qnt aro ox po s ope ORE ORE T RE ERE oda shy baer bok une sobbed een iaa 83 Model Tab for ASCII Switcher RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RR RR e eel 84 General Tab Tor ASGIMGGMOG seco ete eae rix ce anced aha eddie tre taco eae Pare x oR e t eate CR e e c AEE eau es 85 Properties Tab Tor ASCI Cameli acuerda eres RU ome RU ae bow twa eee hwnd RD kee ee dc we dO ce aine ir alee 05 Auxiliaries Tab for ASCII Camera oo ou etre temone rca ee Eat teet Ree c tec C eta acc en ec s Saas i 06 esas TOF RED GUO O Oh 87 Communications Tab for KBD300 Serial Settings 0 0 RR IIR 07 Communications Tab for KBD300 Internet Settings lllissssssssssssseesRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RI t 88 Misc Section of KBD300 Communications Tab 2 RR RR el 09 camne Baja ES BIST RT ERROR TT TEE TT EET TOTO TOO T 90 Fat Local COMING Dialog BOBO esca t arum s4eceesdeates AEREE PEIEE EEEN Jee cad ededusesncevscdauseeeares bids 90 Logical Mapping Aor EBO U TP 91 Mapping Consecutive Logical Numbers 0 0 0 0 e RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR Re ls 92 Logical Mapping NANO ae succeteteie hea scan Enek neee i eames eaei ena ea eea a TER EEEE E EERE e aen d3 Consecutive Logical Numb els cu cei Ede Recte rbyrR D bPeEFRRE RP aw be ebedaceteud deus intedielesadiaca 93 General Tab
176. before timeout Select the radio button for the button you want clicked when the prompt times out The button you select as the timeout button must dismiss the dialog box or have an action associated with it or both C1553M B 4 05 11 Preview Io see what the dialog box you have defined looks like click Preview The dialog box opens To close the dialog box click one of Its buttons Open Lobby Door Are you sure you want to open the lobby door Figure 233 Preview of Dialog Box 12 Click OK The Add New Prompt dialog box closes and the new prompt is created The name and script tag of the new prompt appear in the right pane of the Object Browser NOTE When you edit a prompt s script make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration before attempting to run the script EDIT A PROMPT NOTE If you change the script tag for a prompt any script that refers to the prompt will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the prompt s new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Prompts In the right pane double click the prompt you want to change or right click the prompt and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Prompt Properties dialog box opens Edit Prompt Properties Prompt Information Mame Title open Lobby Door Script Tag open Lobby Door Prompt Text Are you sure you
177. bel and select Edit Label from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the label not the icon before right clicking Alternatively navigate the Object Browser to project name Device Drivers device driver name Devices In the right pane double click Local Settings then click Edit Label The Edit Label Properties dialog box opens Edit Label Properties Text Line 1 camera Line 2 Line 3 m Background Transparent Opaque Color a Text Properties C Left Justify Center Justify C Right Justify r Border C None Single Line zone x caresi Figure 200 Edit Label Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the label as desired Refer to Edit a Devices Local Settings for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Label Properties dialog box closes REMOVE A DEVICE LABEL Removing a device label from one icon removes the label from all icons representing that device whether the icons are on the same map or different maps If you change your mind after removing a device label you can add it back as described in Edit a Devices Local Settings With the desired map loaded right click the device label you want to remove and select Remove from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the label not the icon before right clicking The device label disappears from the map and Display the label for this device is
178. between Color 1 and Color 2 Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload To reduce the overall workload set Color 1 and Color 2 to the same color 50 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE COMMUNICATIONS TAB 1 Connection Type Specify the type of connection between the device driver and the camera e DIRECT SERIAL The camera is connected using an RS 232 to RS 422 converter or using an RS 422 PC serial port e INTERNET PROTOCOL The camera is connected to the serial port on a networked device e MODEM This feature is reserved for future development 2 Settings Complete the instructions provided below for the appropriate connection type specified in Step 1 The settings must match the settings specified within the camera Refer to the appropriate camera installation operation manual for information on camera settings Direct Serial Settings Edit Camera Properties l General Properties Communications Camera Model Auxiliaries Connection Type Direct Serial Internet Protocol C Modem Settings COM Port COM 1 Baud 9600 Parity None Data Bits Miscellaneous Camera Address Poll Interval sec f ES Connection Attempts B Attempt Interval sec 3 Stop Bits Flow Control None Comm Timeout msec 1 00 Idle Disconnect sec p Expect echo Figure 43 Communications Tab for PTZ Serial Settings a Select the COM port that the camera is connected to fro
179. ble or not ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists access control device properties that can be used in scripts and expressions Table AK Access Control Device Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Point True The access control point numbered is True indicating that an alarm string has been received that matches Point and the point has not yet been reset The access control point numbered is False Point Do not use this property it is reserved for future use oet Point to False to reset the alarm received for the point Note that equals the access control point number which can range from 001 to the maximum number of alarms available on the access control device C1553M B 4 05 CURRENT STATUS VIEW RUN TIME VALUES OF VARIABLES When the server is running you can check the value of read property variables using the Current Status option 1 Right click the VMX300 E icon in the Windows server tray and select Current Status from the pop up menu The Current Status window opens Variable names are listed alphabetically Scroll to find the variables whose value you want to find out r Variables Cameleon Enterprise Status Back Door Opened Acknowledged Back Door Opened Value Date DayOfMonth Date DayOf Week Date Hour Date IsHoliday Date IsWeekday Date IsWeekend Date Minut
180. ble over the network the Browse Units dialog box appears Click a device in the list and then click OK The IP address of the selected device is uploaded from the PelcoNet device along with the device name description and multicast settings The uploaded settings will overwrite any existing settings in VMX300 E 2 Optional If the settings in the PelcoNet device have already been configured click Upload Settings to upload the device name description and multicast settings from the device If the device is not connected when you Upload Settings the settings are automatically uploaded once the device is connected Device name and description are located on the General tab Multicast settings are on the Encoding tab for encoders and the Encoding Decod ing tab for encoder decoders To change the address of a PelcoNet device complete the following steps NOTE The Change feature is becomes available once the IP address in VMX300 E has been synchronized with the IP address in the device Using the Browse option on the Communications tab or on the General tab makes the Change option available 1 Click Change The Set New Address dialog box appears Set New Address Network Settings MAC Address IP address 192 168 1 53 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 Set Cancel Figure 59 Set New Address Dialog Box 00 07 5F 20 03 F 4 2 Editthe IP address subnet mask and gateway as nec
181. box in the VMX300 E client This permission alone allows the user to view but not use the controls available through the Device Control dialog box In combination with the Can control device permission this permission allows the user not only to view the controls but also to use them Can control device In combination with the Can access device control dialog permission allows the user to set a relay units points to True set the points to False and use the Momentary feature Can view device icons on client Make relay unit icons visible in the client and list the relay units in the Device List Can enable and disable points In the VMX300 E client disable points so they cannot change state and re enable disabled points This permission does not affect enabling and disabling points in the server configuration SERIAL OUTPUT PERMISSIONS Each serial output device that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Edit Group Properties Name Operators Permissions v DX8000 Camera 1 v Serial Output Device Can access device control dialog Can lock device Can control device Can edit points Can access on screen display Can view device icons on client Dxs000 Figure 186 Serial Output Device Permissions 148 C1553M B 4 05 Table Q Serial Output Device Permissions Can access device control dialog Access the serial output devices Device Control dialog box in the VMX300 E
182. c non zero port is selected the driver is limited to using that one port If two or more users attempt to control the serial output device at the same time the port will only be available for the first user Other users will be unable to control the device while the port is assigned to the first user Q TIP To find out what port the driver assigned switch or control the device in the VMX300 E client and then use the netstat command at the DOS prompt to view assigned ports c Protocol Remote IP Remote Port The remote device is the device the serial output device is physically connected to If the serial output device is connected to a PelcoNet device follow the instructions in step 1 If the serial output device is connected to some other kind of device follow the instructions in step 2 1 PelcoNet Select the PelcoNet protocol from the Protocol drop down box If the PelcoNet device has a user name and password defined in the device settings you will be prompted to enter the user name and password before proceeding Enter the IP address of the PelcoNet device in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box select the port on the PelcoNet device that the serial output device is connected to Select 1 if the serial output unit is connected to COM 1 on the PelcoNet device Select 2 if the serial output device is connected to COM 2 2 Other Select the desired transport protocol from the Protocol drop down box Enter the IP address
183. center ERI MARRE DE SS PueuNS Kad REI RN oe ee S PR SPA CUIUS facies RENI RE 249 pee AMen cin ion MERPTEEE 250 estore Database Dialog BOX on 2ccincsesdscousveveds deedveesbckesteiases biededeient deeededabeuess 06454 2480850 251 POG s MIND E 207 Paste Many Dialog BOX unu seca n mtd end ded redddseusaqeenibtusetu s4eniBrpgeress dada ASEARA desisd4eri d 20b 15 List of Tables Doc RmEcC omouwozzr xc rocmnmoodusr Jouons tor ROMME 29 Digital Video Stream Seltllit S es uu ucorieeRREREIREAwERAS eX REI QSSE RR EERIDTISYUARERERGEREZERURI PRESSE RPSERSIEs RE gue 59 Symbols Used to Build Pate Siz 2 0 crim rar pua me ad dare E ab po We DRE UE EDO e DET enemas d nS TER dus 121 DUre OUD FENMISsIONG seen aceon dd FEE SIM AE ETER NEANS NEATA 141 Fred Smp PIS IUD eode do eaae exo ende acc tat inka eeu asiesnenes E SUP EAMMN Cad EUR E Re D EEG 142 PEA Camera OMISSIONS p220cnd ances cad ack TORT 143 PelcoNet Device Permissions 3 tram seit sc oe acciri eoa recte pares ios HOG pes da Cra ed Ree Be hase ee eee wee e 144 External Monitor Permission o 0ca0 lt secon eats RR ERE V ERE UR Dhecek RD ERER REG 40 does TaN deer DAS UE ee Kar d 144 DIXSDDO BeeOFder PetisslllS lt s xracicicecq e mats aco wkd He oe Ru ERREUR ee a no dta ea piede oe awe ERR Da DEA AE 145 DAGO Lamera PENTIS OS cate er dome d E Gd erdt eie dioi erede uded oer EOE i a vies eaten sous 145 DESSIDUDHPSTNO
184. ch log entry has the following information e Time he time of day the activity took place e Category System Administrative or Operational e Owner he initiator of the activity e Message Details of the activity VIEW SYSTEM LOGS 252 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Logs gt year gt month In the right pane double click the day whose log you want to view or right click the day and select View from the pop up menu The Log Viewer window opens The date of the log appears at the center top of the window lt Previous Day May 30th 2003 Category 12 22 14 PM Operational System Read property change WEST GATE STATUS OPENING 12 22 20 PM System System Alarm event West Gate Open k3 4 starting execution 12 22 20 PM Operational System Read property change WEST GATE STATUS OPEN 12 22 29 PM Administrative System User Administrator logged in to configure server 12 22 51 PM Operational Operator Starting acknowledge action West Gate Open k5 5 by user request 12 22 51 PM Operational Operator Acknowledging program k3 4 by user request 12 22 52 PM Operational System Program k3 4 complete or terminated 12 22 53 PM Operational System Program k5 5 complete or terminated 12 23 06 PM Administrative System User Administrator logged out of configuring the system shutting down server Show v System 373 w Administrative 14 v Operational 73 Done Figure
185. cial character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Auxiliary names are not case sensitive Refer to the appropriate camera installation operation manual for information on connecting auxiliaries NOTE Changing the name of an auxiliary that is referred to in a script introduces an error into the script Refer to the Scripts and Expressions section for more information ADD A KBD300A KEYBOARD 86 The Pelco KBD300 Driver supports the Pelco KBD300A keyboard in CM6800 ASCII mode which requires keyboard firmware version 5 00 or higher ADD USER ACCOUNTS You must add appropriate keyboard user accounts to the VMX300 E server configuration for each operator and administrator who will need to log in to the KBD300A keyboard Operators and administrators must use the user name and password configured for them on the VMX300 E server when they log in to the KBD300A keyboard Keyboard user names and passwords are comprised entirely of digits For example 1234 is a valid user name or password The maximum length of a user name or password is 50 digits Passwords are optional ADD A KBD300A KEYBOARD TO THE SERVER CONFIGURATION Before you can add a device to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project
186. clients custom windows and canvases If you have not already done so add each client that will access Server As video If signals from Server A are going to be viewed in a custom window add the window and configure the appropriate type of canvas for the window Refer to Clients Custom Windows and Canvases for instructions e Save configuration Exit configuration mode and save Server B s configuration Refer to Starting and Stopping the Server for instructions f Run Server B If it is not already running put Server B in run mode Refer to Starting and Stopping the Server for instructions NOTE f you add a new camera to Server A you can use an existing server tie to access video from the camera provided the server tie is for the correct signal type To make the new camera available to Server B you must synchronize Server B s configuration Synchronization is performed automatically when you log in to configuration mode on Server B or you can synchronize explicitly by editing the remote server driver and clicking Synchronize TEST A SERVER TIE 1 Login to the VMX300 E client connecting to both Server A and Server B with Server B as your home server Refer to Configuring Servers in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual for instructions on selecting the servers to connect to 2 Drag the Server A source device to the destination configured on Server B Make sure you drag the source to the correct destination For example if you are
187. coNet device follow the instructions in step 1 If the switcher is connected to some other kind of device follow the instructions in step 2 1 PelcoNet Select the PelcoNet protocol from the Protocol drop down box If the PelcoNet device has a user name and password defined in the device settings you will be prompted to enter the user name and password before proceeding Enter the IP address of the PelcoNet device in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box select the port on the PelcoNet device that the switcher is connected to Select 1 if the switcher is connected to COM 1 on the PelcoNet device Select 2 if the switcher is connected to COM 2 This port must be exposed in the PelcoNet device properties configuration For more information on configuring PelcoNet device properties refer to the section on Add a PelcoNet MPEG Device 2 Other Select the desired transport protocol from the Protocol drop down box The remote IP is the IP address of the VMX300 E workstation the remote device s driver runs on Enter the remote IP in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box enter the port the remote device s driver uses to receive commands d Referto Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section 3 Miscellaneous Optional Configure the following optional field in the Miscellaneous section of the Communications tab Miscellaneous Poll Interval sec f ES Connection Attempts B um Attempt Interv
188. comes complete the following information about the alarm or event is recorded e Date and time the alarm or event was triggered e Alarm event name e server the alarm or event is defined on e Alarm event category e Date and time the alarm or event was acknowledged e User name of operator who acknowledged the alarm or event e Operator comments entered when the alarm or event was acknowledged Only alarms and events belonging to an alarm event category that has archiving turned on are archived Refer to Alarms and Events Alarm Event Categories for more information Alarms and events are archived in database files a new file is created daily The VMX300 E client provides tools to locate and view archived alarms and events Refer to Event Picker and Session Manager in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual for information on locating and view ing archived alarms and events Any workstation on the network can be used as an archive server including a workstation that has the VMX300 E server or client application running On it START AN ARCHIVE SERVER 130 When you start an archive server you have the choice of running it as an executable or as a service If you ever have to restart an archive server that is run as an executable you will have to follow the steps outlined here To restart an archive server that is run as a service restart the com puter the driver is installed on or start the server through the Windows Contr
189. d duration and so on until either an operator has responded or the list of recipients has been exhausted If the list has been exhausted the prompt is then simultaneously redisplayed on every recipients workstation where it remains until someone has responded Send action to all f you want to send notification simultaneously to every member of the recipient group who is logged in when the scheduled action executes select Send action to all available user groups In this case the order of the members in the recipient groups Members list is irrelevant 9 Click OK The Add New Schedule dialog box closes and the new schedule is created The name of the new schedule appears in the right pane of the Object Browser p NOTE When you edit a schedules script make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration before attempting to run C1553M B 4 05 the script 217 EDIT A SCHEDULE 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Schedules In the right pane double click the schedule you want to change or right click the schedule and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Scheduled Action Properties dialog box opens Edit Scheduled Action Properties Schedule Information Schedule Name Daily Cycle All Sequences Enabled Disabled Frequency C Monthly C Sun Rise Set C By Minutes C Weekly C Hourly C By Seconds Daily Which Days C Once Start at 12 00 00 am Holidays
190. d properties appears 2 lo view the values a specific property can take click the desired property in the left pane or double click the property folder in the right pane The list of values appears in the right pane of the Object Browser C1553M B 4 05 163 Device Icons VMX300 E allows you to customize maps by placing icons on them that represent physical devices installed in the field Judicious placement of device icons provides operators with an easy to use visual representation of the installation they are monitoring Operators can control devices by clicking the icons Oct Before you can place a device icon for a particular device on a map you must add the device itself as described in Add a New Device Once you have added the device you can place as many icons representing the device as you want NOTES e You do not need to have a device icon on a map in order for the device to function The icons role is to provide operators with an active visual representation of the device its status and controls Operators can also access devices and their controls through the Device List e Device icons appear as a hollow outline in the VMX300 E client if the device driver is not running PLACE A DEVICE ICON ON A MAP 1 Load the map you want to place a device icon on The map appears in the map viewport 2 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Device Drivers gt device driver name gt Devices Click the d
191. d then select Properties from the pop up menu 20 C1553M B 4 05 Network Connections B x File Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced He Back r J2 Search me Folders Address e Network Connections Go Disconnected Ca U S Robotics 92 Fax PCI LAN or High Speed Internet acal Area Connection Connected Disable L alla eee Status Repair Local Area Connection Network cable unplugac Bridge Connections C ua Intel R 8255xER PCI A Create Shortcut Delete Rename wh New Connection Wizarc Figure 3 Opening the Local Area Connection Properties Dialog Box Wizard 3 In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box double click the Internet Protocol TCP IP listing The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box appears Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties CIES General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings C Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address Subnet mask Default gateway C Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server f Alternate DNS server f Advanced Cancel Figure 4 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Dialog Box By default the pr
192. d to display video from a DX8000 or DX9000 DVR must have a DVR canvas defined for it 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Clients client name Windows window name Canvases for the window that will be used to display video from a DVR 2 Double click lt Add New Canvas gt The Add New Canvas dialog box appears caresi Figure 28 Add a DVR Canvas 3 Select the appropriate DVR either the DX8000 or the DX9000 from the drop down box and then click OK EDIT A CANVAS To edit an existing canvas 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Clients gt client name gt Windows window name gt Canvases In the right pane double click the canvas you want to edit or right click the canvas and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Canvas Properties dialog box opens Edit Canvas Properties Select Canvas Quad video Display OK Cancel Figure 29 Edit Canvas Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the window as desired Refer to Add a New Canvas General for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Canvas Properties dialog box closes RE ORDER A WINDOW S CANVASES If you add more than one canvas to a custom window VMX300 E will have a choice of which video display technology to employ when an operator views video in that window VMX300 E makes its choice based on how the canvases are ordered in the Object Browser The se
193. d write properties in the Object Browser you must force the server to update its read write property lists for that device To do this open the Edit Driver Properties dialog box for that driver and then click Synchronize Table Z DX8000 Recorder Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Read Commstatus The device driver is successfully communicating with the recorder Offline The device driver cannot communicate with the DVR This could be a result of the network cable being removed or the DVR s power being turned off Unknown The device driver has just started up and has not yet received an alarm input event so it cannot determine the state of the DVR alarm input numbered Note that ii equals the alarm input number which can range from 01 to the maximum number available on the DVR 8 inputs on the DX8008 16 inputs on the DX8016 aa cannot determine the state of the DVR relay output numbered Note that ii equals the relay output number which can range from 01 to the maximum number available on the DVR 8 relays on the DX8008 16 relays on the DX8016 Write Alarm True set Alarm to True to indicate the DVR is in an alarm state DVR icons flash in the alarm colors when Alarm is set to True set Alarm to False to indicate the DVR is not in an alarm state Signal Channel opecify the source of the archived video to display in a custom window source Example To display archived vide
194. dd New Global Script dialog box opens Add New Global Script Global Script Information Mame New Global Script Script Tag New Global Script Global Script Events IU MEME 1 OK Cancel Figure 226 Add New Global Script Dialog Box 2 Name Type in a unique descriptive name for the global script you want to create Script names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Script names are not case sensitive A tag resembling the name appears in the Script Tag box If the name contains special characters they are omitted from the tag Spaces are replaced with underscores Leading digits are removed 3 Script tag f you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type in a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the global script in other scripts 4 Action Type the script action directly into the Action column or use the script wizard to help you write the script For more information on writing scripts refer to Scripts and Expressions 5 Click OK The Add New Global Script dialog box closes and the new global script is created The name and script tag of the new global script a
195. dda NEW DEVOE e cs 3525 eh ated soe oe etd aoe oa hn ha pea ne wee wate aes abe teen anes NS 47 C1553M B 4 05 3 Autodiscover Devices 2 0 ccc RR RR Rea aae aea 4 i ctEPI ID MNC 48 Adda FREJ Camera DOVO ie cave crt Goats ett nE EREE N be E EER E g EEEE Gece es EE a E wie halen pace E 48 L ontigure ihe General TaD sigue redet eco ROO EFPTI DX xd eddders EE ETENA Eee EEE ERES E ated 48 Configure the Properties Tab 1 ener ae ced e rm metr rm TAE E A E boda ae E wa Peta paolo 49 Add a Felco PLZ DOVE occu nendueecateebedie veced usr eee inesnet be coud be adeted poets ieacbde are ve dw REE a dE 49 Contig re the General TaD 1s eerte mco ike eraa EHE DEC E ED pe aoa Meee eee A PARERE Ra GRE S Gu ge dark e a cu a 50 Connigure the Fropemles Tan 2 2 cctheceeseteosdaweste ide ssddes rE Er E ke cent egeestuer ete boerodderepeind sla 50 Configure the COMMUNICATIONS Tab 2 4 eius ssh waned RERRERREEPREEEE LIP Ex p Rr ERE ee ERR ERR a a eden B Conigure the Camera Model T8D 2 oed Droba beet EPI Re mes eaten ER Rd bw ie E k aa EE EEE a E cb Pd de 53 COMMUNE the Auxiliaries Tacs acces saa cip sent eaten cleave EY DERRUETUP RISUS NEN S Gandia bev ded enemas Papas ened 59 Adda PelcoNer MPEG DOVE Lass sed iborrPDESRGSUdEP OE i E dide aduer cei PUES cachet d CS RE Ud RUE S UEtU PEDE 54 Configure the General 10 cece ce bes oe eed bee Pea ew ents rm rete ee eee poe cr mer Falke genu wa Dette paolo e 54 L ont
196. device drivers on the VMX300 E server 1 Launch the device driver Refer to Starting and Stopping Device Drivers Start a Device Driver 2 Add the device driver to the server configuration as described in Add a New Device Driver ADD A NEW DEVICE DRIVER NOTES e To add a device driver to the VMX300 E server the driver must be running on the network Once you have added a device driver to the server configuration you can add devices of that type e Changes to device drivers such as adding a new driver to the server configuration come into effect immediately You cannot discard your changes by exiting configuration mode without saving To add a new device driver to the VMX300 E server 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Device Drivers Double click Add New Driver in the right pane or right click Device Drivers in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Driver dialog box opens Add New Driver x Driver Information Name lt None gt IP Address 192 168 1 144 Listening Port Check Now Browse Local Browse All Cancel Figure 30 Add New Driver Dialog Box 2 Select the device driver you want to add using one of the following methods a Browse local lo browse the server workstation for running drivers click Browse Local The Browse Drivers dialog box opens x Driver Name Computer Name IP Address Fixed Camera Driver DXP S
197. directly This permission does not affect the execution of local scripts that call the global script e Devices For a complete list of a device s permissions refer to the following pages C1553M B 4 05 141 Corway Facity Administrative Can configure software C Can manage users C Can modify schedules Client Workspaces Show All Devices in device list C Can load workspaces L Can edit workspaces C Can save workspaces 6 0 Window Content Can view live video LL Can view archived video C Can view maps LL Can view web pages Can view remote PCs c Maps j L Admin Level 1 L Corway Facility Site Map C Client Global Scripts Camera Sequence 1 Initialize Devices C Switcher C Camera 1 C Camera 2 C Monitor Figure 176 Group Permissions FIXED CAMERA PERMISSION Edit Group Properties Name operators Permissions New Switcher New Camera DX8000 Camera 1 Fixed Camera Can view device icons on client New Serial Output Device Dx8000 Figure 177 Fixed Camera Permission Each Fixed Camera device that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Table E Fixed Camera Permission Can view device icons on client Make Fixed Camera device icons visible in the client and list the device in the Device List 142 C1553M B 4 05 PTZ PERMISSIONS Each Pelco PTZ camera that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list unde
198. display Access the On screen Display tab of the camera s Device Control dialog box in the client Can view device icons on client Make DX8000 camera icons visible in the client and list the camera in the Device List Can edit presets 1 8 In the VMX300 E client create save rename and unassign presets numbered 1 to 8 Can edit presets 9 and above In the VMX300 E client create save rename and unassign presets numbered 9 and higher and set and clear the home preset Can edit patterns In the VMX300 E client create save rename and unassign patterns and set and clear the default pattern C1553M B 4 05 145 146 DX9000 PERMISSION Each DX9000 device that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Edit Group Properties Name Operators Permissions Serial Output Device Dxs8000 Dx80004 CHO1 New Relay Device DX9000 Recorder Can view device icons on client Figure 182 DX9000 Permission Table K DX9000 Permission Make DX9000 icons visible in the client and list the DVR in the Device List ASCII DEVICE PERMISSIONS Each ASCII device that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices ASCII Switcher Permissions Edit Group Properties Name operators Permissions C New Camera Building 1 Matrix Can access device control dialog Can lock device Can control device Can access on screen display Can view device icons on client Can e
199. dit presets 1 8 Can edit presets 8 and above Can edit patterns C New Camera Figure 183 ASCII Switcher Permissions Table L ASCII Switcher Permissions PERMISSION ENAMESUSRTO OOOO C1553M B 4 05 ASCII Camera Permissions amp Edit Group Properties Name Operators Permissions _ New Relay Device Front Door Camera Can access device control dialog Can lock device Can control device Can access on screen display Can view device icons on client Can edit presets 1 8 Can edit presets 9 and above Can edit patterns Building 1 Matrix E Cancel Figure 184 ASCII Camera Permissions Table M ASCII Camera Permissions ENABLES USER TO Can access device control dialog Access the camera s Device Control dialog box in the VMX300 E client This permission includes the ability to control the camera s auxiliaries Can lock device Lock the camera in the client preventing users and scripts with lower priority from controlling the camera Can control camera In the VMX300 E client pan tilt zoom and focus the camera adjust the iris go to presets and run patterns Can access on screen display Access the On Screen Display tab of the camera s Device Control dialog box in the client Can view device icons on client Make ASCII camera icons visible in the client and list the camera in the Device List Can edit presets 1 8 In the VMX300 E client create save rename and unassign presets
200. driver so you can control the camera using the advanced controls made available by the PTZ driver and the Serial Output Driver so you can take advantage of custom buttons to access the additional features but unfortunately this will not work Only one device driver can have the communications port open Whichever driver you launch first will open the port and be able to control the camera C1553M B 4 05 ADD AN IP DEVICE STATUS MONITOR The IP device status monitor allows you to monitor the status of a networked device Since almost every other VMX300 E device driver allows you to monitor the status of that device you would only need to use the IP device status monitor to keep track of an IP device that is not in the VMX300 E system When you add an IP device status monitor to the VMX300 E system it acts as a placeholder for the IP device The IP device status monitor periodically pings the IP device and if the device fails to respond to the ping then the following actions occur e The IP device status monitors Status read property is set to Alarm e he IP device status monitor icon flashes alternately between the two alarm colors If you define an alarm or event to be triggered when the IP device status monitor s Status property equals Alarm then you can script a response and alert operators of the device status so that they can take appropriate action Example Configure a status monitor for an encoder decoder that is not i
201. driver does not provide you with access to the alarm event definition You cannot edit the alarm or event nor can you delete it from the server it is defined on Object Browser x Corway Facility Alarms and Events Clients Connections evice Drivers External Monitor Driver 192 168 1 144 2003 Fixed Camera Driver 192 168 1 144 2002 Remote Server Driver 192 168 1 136 32001 E Server EMO 3 El Read Properties Door Alarm Write Properties Sources FTP Sites Global Scripts Global Tags Labels Logs Maps Prompts Recipient Groups Schedules Server Ties Timers User Groups Users Name Driver IP Driver Port j Up a Add New Driver gt e lt Autodiscover All Driversz Lg External Monitor Driver L Fixed Camera Driver L Remote Server Driver 192 168 1 144 2003 192 168 1 144 2002 192 168 1 136 32001 Figure 242 Accessing Alarms and Events on Another Server To work with a remotely defined alarm or event create an alarm or event on your server whose expression tests the remote server s read property For example suppose you have added the remote server driver for a server called EMO 3 Suppose EMO 3 has an external door alarm that triggers an alarm Door Alarm that directs Camera at the door On your server create an alarm that loads live video from Camera1 into a custom window configured on your server Window1 when the Door Alarm read
202. ds the Configuration window opens Make whatever changes you want to the server configuration Save changes f you made changes to the server configuration select File gt Save to save your changes The server verifies your changes If one or more scripts or expressions contain errors the server displays an error message and gives you the opportunity to make corrections Refer to Scripts and Expressions Syntax Error Checking for instructions on using the Scripts and Expressions Verification tools to make corrections Exit configuration mode Click File Close or click the Close button at the right of the Configuration window title bar If you made changes to the configuration that have not been saved the server asks whether you want to save your changes Click Yes to save your changes The server verifies your changes Make corrections as needed Once there are no errors the Configuration window closes momentarily interrupting operators logged in to the client The server continues to run NOTE You must exit server configuration mode to make changes to the configuration come into effect The exception to this is changes to device drivers and devices which come into effect immediately LOG OUT OF CONFIGURATION MODE AND LAUNCH RUN MODE To put the server in run mode from configuration mode 1 C1553M B 4 05 Save changes If you made changes to the server configuration select File gt Save to save your changes The serve
203. dule create the recipient group then edit the schedule to assign the recipient group Refer to Recipient Groups for information on creating recipient groups To send notification simultaneously to every operator configured on that server who is logged in select the predefined recipient group All Users Select none if you do not want anyone to be notified Send action to first f you want notification sent to the member at the top of the recipient groups Members list select Send action to first available user group When the scheduled action executes the server will scan down the list until it finds a member who is logged in and send notification to that member If the recipient is a user group notification is sent to all members of the group who are logged in If no response f you want the server to notify one recipient after another until someone responds to the scheduled action select If no response in _ seconds move to next available user group and type in the number of seconds you want to elapse before notifying the next recipient To use this option the scheduled action must call a prompt using the PROMPT command A recipient responds to the scheduled action by responding to the prompt When the scheduled action executes the prompt displays on the first recipient s workstation for the specified duration then is removed from the first recipients workstation and displayed on the second recipient s workstation for the specifie
204. e Date Month Date Year Delay Timer1 Value Door Timer Value LocalServer Server New Alarm or Event Main Entry Alarm Acknowledged Main Entry Alarm Value Pelco_Switcher CommStatus PTZ_1_CommLoss Acknowledged PTZ 1 CommLoss Value tag Value tag alarm Acknowledged False False 7 wednesday 14 False True False 15 January 2004 True True False False True Online False True False Figure 208 Current Status Window 2 Click Close The Current Status window closes NOTE The status given in the Current Status window is live If a variable changes value while the window is open the change will be reflected in the window EXPRESSIONS Expressions are used to detect a condition that triggers an action For example when the expression associated with a timer becomes true the timer starts Similarly when the expression associated with an alarm or event becomes true recipients are notified and the alarm event script Is executed Expressions are also used in IF statements Syntax A simple expression compares an object property to a value Complex expressions are made up of one or more simple expressions connected by logical operators and optionally containing parentheses The operators listed in Table AL are used to compare an object property to a value C1553M B 4 05 OPERATOR MEANING me Eu 3 gt The operators listed in Table AM are used to construct complex expression
205. e and then click Delete To select multiple points hold the Ctrl key down while clicking each point that you want to delete CONFIGURE PATTERN MATCHING FOR INCOMING ALARM STRINGS Edit Access Control Properties General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Access control data patterns Supports Reset Pattern Pattern To Match Reset Pattern To Match Define a custom pattern or select one from the predefined list C Custom Make Pre defined Pre defined Select Description Pelco ASCII Protocol Switch Pattern Pattern To Match 0 9 Ma ALNum a Insert paint number placeholder Figure 145 Pattern Matching Tab The Pattern Matching tab is used to configure the pattern s that incoming alarm strings must match as the first step in identifying alarms to be handled by VMX300 E If an incoming string matches one of the patterns VMX300 E attempts to match the point number in the string to the number of a point defined on the Access Control Points tab If a match is found VMX300 E sets the value of the point s read property If no match is found VMX300 E discards the string C1553M B 4 05 117 118 The Pattern Matching tab allows you to define the following patterns e Pattern To Match Use this section to configure the pattern that matches the string that will be sent when an alarm has been tripped Every access control device must have a Pattern To Match defined fo
206. e device icons in the client are the color specified here Alarm state When the cameras Alarm write property equals True the icon flashes alternately between Color 1 and Color 2 Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload To reduce the overall workload set Color 1 and Color 2 to the same color ADD A PELCO PTZ DEVICE The Pelco PTZ device driver currently supports the following camera models e Pelco Spectra II e Pelco Spectra III e Pelco Esprit The Spectra Ill model operating under D protocol has a feedback feature that communicates camera position to the device driver VMX300 E uses this information to rotate Spectra IIl device icons placed on maps so the icon represents the actual direction the camera is pointing Device icons for Spectra IIl P protocol Spectra Il and Esprit cameras never change direction regardless of actual camera position Before you can add a PTZ camera to the server configuration you must first start the PTZ device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to Device Drivers for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers Pelco PTZ Camera Devices 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New PTZ Camera dialog box appears You can also configure camera settings after you have added the camera to the server configuration Right click the camera and then selec
207. e CM9760 REL relay unit s Device Control dialog box in the client refer to the Client Operation Manual for instructions However you may want to allow an operator to change the state of a relay point without opening the Device Control dialog box VMX300 E provides the following methods e Global Script Write a global script that changes the state of the specific relay point Give the operator permission to run the global script and permission to control the relay unit This method is useful when you do not want to give the operator permission to access the relay units Device Control dialog box Refer to the G obal Scripts section for instructions on writing a global script Refer to the User Groups section for instructions on assigning operator permissions e Label or Hotlink Create a label or hotlink that sets the state of a specific relay point and give the operator permission to control the relay unit This allows the operator to quickly change the state of a frequently accessed relay point without having to open the Device Control dialog box Refer to the Hotlinks and Labels sections for instructions on creating labels and hotlinks Refer to the User Groups section for instructions on assigning operator permissions Defining Normally Open and Normally Closed Relay Outputs Relay outputs are commonly wired as normally open N O so that if the contact wires close the relay action is triggered When the relay is triggered the relay state corr
208. e Disconnect n H Expect echo Figure 101 Misc Section of KBD300 Communications Tab Enter the keyboard address The address must match the address specified by the keyboard DIP switch settings Optional Enter the number of seconds of inactivity you want to elapse before VMX300 E closes the COM port direct serial connection or the local port IP connection The port will open again automatically when a new connection is established with the relay unit Use the default value of 0 to indicate that the port should never be closed while the driver is running Note that the following fields should not be changed Poll Interval sec Connection Attempts Attempt Interval sec Comm Timeout msec Expect echo This field is reserved for future development This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 3 This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 30 This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 1000 This field is reserved for future development USING THE KBD300A LOGICAL MAPPING FEATURE When operating a KBD300A keyboard a user must use camera numbers and monitor numbers to control these cameras and monitors Since the VMX300 E system is based on device names you must use the Enable the device number field in the Edit Local Settings dialog box to assign a number for each device However no two device numbers i
209. e access control alarm or you can use one of the predefined categories Refer to the Alarm Event Categories section for instructions 3 Create the alarm Add an alarm with the following parameters Expression he expression must test whether Point 1 has the value of True Add New Alarm or Event H x Information Name Main Gate Script Tag aLM_Main_Gate Priority 7o v Use Category priority Display the label For this alarm or event Edit Associate Source with this Slarm Event zi Expression axceri Point 1 AxCtrl True Action Alarm Event Action Comment required on acknowledgement OK Cancel Figure 150 Add an Alarm for the Access Control Point C1553M B 4 05 Action Click Alarm Event Action to open the Alarm Event Action dialog box Create scripts to respond to the alarm One of the scripts must set the point back to False since the device does not send a reset string Edit Alarm Event Action SET Main Gate Lock True SET x Ctrl Point 1 False Figure 151 Associate Scripts with the Alarm Refer to Add a New Alarm or Event in the Alarms and Events section for instructions on creating alarms C1553M B 4 05 123 Connections Connections map out the analog connections between devices You must define a connection for every analog connection in the system This includes analog connections from IP devices MANAGING CONNECTI
210. e brackets For example the command BLACK HOT Carriage Return is represented in VMX300 E as BLACK HOT 013 Note that ASCII codes must be three digits in length Add leading zeroes if an ASCII code contains less that three digits If a command contains single or double quotation marks replace the quotation marks with their ASCII codes 039 for a single quotation mark and 034 for a double quotation mark Other useful ASCII codes for unprintable characters are 002 for the Start of Text STX character and 003 for the End of Text ETX character Delete a Custom Button Click the custom button name in the list of buttons and then click Delete The button is removed from the list To delete more than one custom button at a time select the buttons you want to delete and then click Delete To select buttons that appear consecutively in the list click the first button and then press the Shift key and click the last button To select buttons that are not consecutive press the Ctrl key while clicking the buttons LIMITATIONS OF CONTROLLING A SERIAL OUTPUT DEVICE Note that you cannot control a device under two different device drivers by configuring them with the same communications settings For example suppose you have a camera that runs under a particular PTZ driver and suppose the camera has certain features that are not supported by the PTZ driver A tempting workaround might be to configure the camera under both the PTZ
211. e is reserved for future development 2 Settings Complete the instructions provided below for the appropriate connection type specified in Step 1 Direct Serial Settings Add New Pelco KBD300 x General Communications Logical Mapping Connection Type Direct Serial C Internet Protocol C Modem Settings Misc COM Port com 1 Address Baud o600 E Poll Interval 3600 Parity Odd z Connection Attempts 3 Data Bits e d Attempt Interval 30 Stop Bits 1 M Comm Timeout 1000 Flow Control None m Idle Disconnect 0 Expect echo MEM ll Ji Cancel Figure 99 Communications Tab for KBD300 Serial Settings a Select the COM port that the keyboard is connected to from the drop down box b The remaining settings should specify 9600 baud odd parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no flow control c Refer to Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section C1553M B 4 05 87 Internet Protocol Settings Add New Pelco KBD300 x General Communications Logical Mapping Connection Type Direct Serial Internet Protocol C Modem Settings Misc Protocol PelcoNet Address Local IP 10 104 11 17 Poll Interval 3600 Local Port I H Connection Attempts Remote IP 255 295 295 295 Attempt Interval 30 NEN a Remote Port 1 EX Comm Timeout 1000 H Idle Disconnect 0 H Expect
212. e properties of the category as desired Refer to Add a New Alarm Event Category for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Category dialog box closes DELETE AN ALARM EVENT CATEGORY NOTES e Deleting an alarm event category deletes all the alarms and events that belong to the category and removes their icons from maps This introduces an error into scripts that refer to one of the deleted alarms or events e Deleting an alarm event category is irreversible If you delete an alarm event category and then change your mind you must re create it as described in Add a New Alarm Event Category and re create the alarms and events as described in Alarms Events and Normal Occurrences Add a New Alarm or Event 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Alarms and Events In either pane right click the category you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the alarm event category click Yes The selected category is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes NOTE You cannot delete the predefined alarm event categories 224 C1553M B 4 05 ALARMS EVENTS AND NORMAL OCCURRENCES ADD A NEW ALARM OR EVENT 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Alarms and Events alarm event category Double click Add New Alarm or Event in the right pane or right click the desired alarm event category in the left pane and select
213. e signal type appears in the Available Compatibilities list To select multiple signal types press the Ctrl key while clicking signal types To remove all signal types click Remove All To move a signal type from the Available Compatibilities list to the Selected Compatibilities list click the signal type and then click Add the signal type appears in the Selected Compatibilities list To move all signal types from the Available Compatibilities list to the Selected Compatibilities list click Add All Reorder the List of Selected Signal Types VMX300 E attempts to display signal types in the order they appear in the Selected Compatibilities list You can sort the list in the order you want VMX300 E to try signal types To move a signal type higher in the list click the signal type and then click Move Up To move a signal type lower in the list click the signal type and then click Move Down Refer to the Clients Custom Windows and Canvases section for additional information on adding a canvas Configure Image Quality of Captured Images 1 Click the Advanced tab on the PelcoNet Canvas Settings dialog box Pelconet Canvas Settings x Ed Ee JPEG picture quality 1 100 75 Low quality High quality Stretch picture Width Height Figure 27 Advanced PelcoNet Canvas Settings 2 Configure the image quality settings as desired C1553M B 4 05 ADD A NEW CANVAS DX8000 OR DX9000 DVR Any custom window that is use
214. e the Object Browser to project name Alarms and Events alarm event category name In the right pane click the alarm or event you want to place on the map and hold the mouse button down If you move the pointer slightly it changes to cross hairs 3 Dragthe pointer to the map position it where you want to place the alarm event icon and release the mouse button An icon representing an alarm appears on the map and the pointer changes back to an arrow If you selected Display the label for this alarm or event when you added the alarm or event the label appears below the icon 4 Scale Move the pointer away from the icon to make the icon larger Move the pointer towards the center of the icon to make the icon smaller Scaling the alarm event icon does not affect the size of the alarm event label Refer to Scale an Alarm Event Icon for instructions on scaling the icon NOTE To minimize the CPU workload icons should be as small as possible 5 When the icon is sized the way you want it press the left mouse button The icon freezes in place If the alarm event label is displayed it freezes in place below the icon Q TIP Hold the Shift key down while scaling to constrain the scaling to 5 unit increments MOVE AN ALARM EVENT ICON Any alarm event icon placed on a map can later be moved to another position on the same map When you move an alarm event icon only its position changes its size remains fixed For information on changing
215. ea lists all configured groups Select each user group you want the user to belong to The user will be granted the permissions associated with each group you select For more information refer to User Groups Group Permissions Priority Enter the priority with which the user s activities are to be treated by VMX300 E VMX300 E uses priorities to resolve situations in which two or more objects attempt to control a particular device at the same time The object with the higher priority number is given control of the device The highest priority you can assign to an object is 99 The lowest is 1 System events have priority 100 Users schedules and alarms and events all have a priority The scripts associated with these objects inherit the object s priority 153 154 10 Import The Import option is only available with VMX300 E Systems The Import option allows you to import user accounts from other servers If you have configured a server tie to share video with a remote server import the accounts of remote users who will be viewing your video Refer to Server Ties for more information Only the user name password full name and description are imported Membership in user groups and priority are left for you to fill in Q TIP You might want to define a new user group for imported users to belong to To import user accounts defined on other servers click Import The Browse Users dialog box opens Browse Users x Corway Facility
216. ecial characters they will be omitted from the tag Leading digits will be removed Spaces will be replaced with underscores Script tag If you do not want to use the script tag supplied by the server type in a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the named view in scripts 5 Click OK The named view is created and the Add New Named View dialog box closes The name and script tag of the new named view appear in the right pane of the Object Browser EDIT A NAMED VIEW NOTE f you change the script tag for a named view any script that refers to the named view will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the named views s new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information To change the view that is called up by a named view use the Update View option Refer to Update a Named View for more information To change the name or script tag of a named view 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Maps map Named Views In the right pane double click the named view you want to edit or right click the named view and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Named View Properties dialog box opens Edit Named View Properties r View Information
217. ecified global script or if no script is specified abort the current script CALL global script tag Run the specified global script in the current thread DIM variable identifier Declare a local Boolean variable The same as VAR DISPLAY device tag name gt DeviceControl Display the Device Control dialog box for the specified device on the client running the script a FTP window tag camera tag preset owitch the camera to the window Start timing the delay If a tag preset delay FTP site tag preset is specified go to the preset When the delay time has file name jpg elapsed capture the video in the window and upload the image to the FTP server saving it under the specified file name For more information refer to FTP Sites Write an FIP Script Gp Continue running the script at the specified label The same as JUMP GOTO label identifier Then IF expression IN lt duration gt If the expression is true within the specified number of seconds THEN lt statement s gt execute the statement s following THEN ELSE lt statement s gt ENDIF Otherwise execute the statement s following ELSE a Continue running the script at the specified label The same as GOTO JUMP lt label identifier gt stave LABEL label identifier Define a position within the script to GOTO or JUMP to The label identifier must begin with a letter Continued on next page C15
218. ected S 6 Active Connections my 10 Available Destinations A Figure 162 Connecting Video to DVR Through Switcher C1553M B 4 05 ASCII CONNECTIONS You must define connections that reflect how cameras and output devices are physically connected to the switcher In addition if a switcher has looping inputs you must define connections for the looping inputs Specifically you must The following example illustrates the connections for a switcher with four available outputs and eight available inputs that supports looping In the example logical numbering is not used If logical numbering were used the logical identifiers would appear in the dialog box In the example Camera is connected to Input1 on the switcher Camera2 is connected to Input2 and Camera3 is connected to Input3 The switchers other five available inputs do not have connections defined for them Even if cameras are physically connected to those other Connect camera output to switcher input Connect switcher output to output device input Connect looping input to output device input J Analog Video Connections oj xl File Edit Tools Sal tile Source Device _ Description Destination Cameral Output Pelco ASCII Switcher Input Camera2 Output Pelco ASCII Switcher Input2 Pelco ASCII Switcher Input4 Camera3 Output Pelco ASCII Switcher Input3 Pelco ASCII Switcher InputS Camera4 Output Pelco ASCII Switcher Input6 Camerab5 Output Pelco ASCII Switcher Input Camera
219. ected to COM 2 Other Select the desired transport protocol from the Protocol drop down box Then complete the following fields as described below Local IP The local IP is the IP address of the VMX300 E workstation that the Pelco KBD300 driver runs on Select the local IP from the drop down list Local Port The local port is the port the Pelco KBD300 driver uses to transmit commands If your system is secured behind a fire wall enter one of the ports made available by the firewall Otherwise enter 0 to have the driver randomly assign an available port Tip To find out what port was randomly assigned in a particular instance switch or control the device in the VMX300 E client then use the netstat command at the DOS prompt to view assigned ports Remote IP The remote device is the device the keyboard is physically connected to The remote IP is the IP address of the VMX300 E workstation the remote device s driver runs on Enter the remote IP in the Remote IP box Remote Port In the Remote Port box enter the port the remote device s driver uses to receive commands b Referto Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section 3 Misc Configure the following fields in the Misc section of the Communications tab C1553M B 4 05 Address Idle Disconnect sec Misc Address 1 E Poll Interval 3600 H Connection Attempts 3 E Attempt Interval 30 Comm Timeout 1000 EX Idl
220. ed from the map C1553M B 4 05 MOVE AN ALARM EVENT LABEL You can move an alarm event label independently of the icon itself 1 With the desired map loaded right click the label you want to move and select Move from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the label not the icon before right clicking 2 Move the pointer to the label s new location The label follows the pointer as you move it The icon does not move 3 When the label is located where you want it press the left mouse button The label freezes in place SCALE AN ALARM EVENT LABEL Changing the size of an alarm event label does not affect its position For information on changing a label s position refer to Move an Alarm Event Label 1 With the desired map loaded right click the alarm event label you want to resize and select Scale from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the label not the icon before right clicking z MX300 Enterprise Configuration 377 Licenses Remaining 41 Days Remaining m Bi x File view Zoom Tools Help Object Browser El Corway Facility E Alarms and Events Corway Facil ity I Alarms Administration i Door Alarms san Events Door Alarm See SENEE P3 ex Connections Device Drivers Remove FTP Sites EE Clients Sua IOs ooo Labels Lo UMW UU Maps LJ 3 E Admin Level 1 Ne DELI B CEJ p Admin Level 2 j i p
221. ed on the second recipient s workstation for the specified duration and so on until either an operator has responded or the list of recipients has been exhausted If the list has been exhausted the prompt is then simultaneously redisplayed on every recipient s workstation where it remains until someone has responded C1553M B 4 05 Send action to all f you want to send notification simultaneously to every member of the recipient group who is logged in when an alarm or event in this category is triggered select Send action to all available user groups In this case the order of the members in the recipient group s Members list is irrelevant Notify via E mail f you want recipients to be sent an e mail message notifying them when an alarm or event in this category is triggered click this field E mail notification is done in addition to the other methods of notification E mail notification is sent to every member of the recipient group who has an e mail address configured regardless of whether the member is logged in when the alarm or event occurs The e mail message is broadcast simultaneously to all recipients regardless of whether you have selected Send action to first available user group or Send action to all available user groups An alarm event e mail message includes the following information e The name of the server the alarm or event is defined on e healarm event category e healarm event type e he date and time t
222. ed or fixed focal length lenses Two years on Legacy CM6700 CM6800 CM9700 Series matrix and DF5 DF8 Series fixed dome products Two years on Spectra Esprit ExSite and PS20 scanners including when used in continuous motion applications Two years on Esprit and WW5700 Series window wiper excluding wiper blades Eighteen months on DX Series digital video recorders NVR300 Series network video recorders and Endura Series distributed network based video products One year except video heads on video cassette recorders VCRs Video heads will be covered for a period of six months Six months on all pan and tilts scanners or preset lenses used in continuous motion applications that is preset scan tour and auto scan modes Pelco will warrant all replacement parts and repairs for 90 days from the date of Pelco shipment All goods requiring warranty repair shall be sent freight prepaid to Pelco Clovis California Repairs made necessary by reason of misuse alteration normal wear or accident are not covered under this warranty Pelco assumes no risk and shall be subject to no liability for damages or loss resulting from the specific use or application made of the Products Pelcos liability for any claim whether based on breach of contract negligence infringement of any rights of any party or product liability relating to the Products shall not exceed the price paid by the Dealer to Pelco for such Products In no event
223. ed to in a script introduces an error into the script Refer to the Scripts and Expressions section for more information ADD A DX9000 DVR The DX9000 device driver controls Pelco DX9000 Series digital video recorders DVRs In this document the term DX9000 DVR is used to refer to any DVR in the DX9000 series that is supported by the DX9000 driver A DX9000 DVR is a specialized PC that runs the Windows operating system If your system has more than one DX9000 DVR each one must be configured PREPARING TO CONFIGURE THE DX9000 DVR Before you can configure the DX9000 DVR in VMX300 E you must complete the following tasks e Add users to the Windows group called Avusers on the DX9000 computer e Configure each computer user pair that will access or manage the DX9000 DVR Adding Users to the Avusers Group Before you can configure the computers that will be used to access or manage the DX9000 DVR you must add the users who will be accessing the DVR to the Windows group called Avusers on the DX9000 computer You must add each administrator who will launch or configure the DX9000 driver and each operator who will view video from the DX9000 DVR The Avusers group is predefined on the DX9000 computer To add a user to the Avusers group complete the following steps 1 Login to the DX9000 DVR 2 Right click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop and then select Manage from the pop up menu The Computer Management window appears
224. edoued soe rid AEREN qdpMidGarsS Ups 50 FIOBSRIeS Tao TUE FIZ diel das road eeu ten treu quida accent eos goin Ada Terd a eaters A ae abuse shereeacuracatens 50 Communications Tab for PTZ Serial Settings RR IRR RR hls 5 Communications Tab for PTZ Internet Settings sessi meme tr Re ban Uo ebeewawtaeddecbeuecoedaedee dwes 5 Miscellaneous Section of Communications Tab 2 1 RIRs yi buc rag Nro mE 53 CU IIOICHE 53 General Tab for PelcoNet Device 0 nee bene lll 54 BOW Se IRS DIGIOGOBO os ane ece RIP WPEEPEEe E USPTINERPCIUATUPTTIPRERSEPRINPEIRCSTHAIMPESORUTE RIVE NCETPEFEEUE 55 Properties Tab for PelcoNet Device 0 e RRRRRRRRRRRRRIRRRRRRRRRR RR RR en el 55 docentes bande BI 56 Encoding Tab Tor PelcoNet Devi6g iu eua dod xem 2etrtbbueiirex te ETEA E lee Res bad drm eeim luerieide Abedags 5 Sore Berl Message esc enestastiexasEvseda a Pelo EEA Ee CIEN hes pdb duet ade eae Rae OM Mes 58 Factory eraut MESSI Ss sdeconccucecatsceeeeeeedetatentnecuhecusianeases tod atestdetedelesadecabelensessengees 58 Encoding Decoding Tab for PelcoNet 4001A 2 ene nen eee tenet eens 60 Software Defaults Message 1 eee s 61 Factory Clam ISSUE TOS DETTO LITT TII DTE TEES 61 Communications Tab torPelcoNet DEVICE iss sedeo rem eR DER odd dese Sil decedwed YER Ede DDE du 62 oer New Address Dialog BOX eere heme
225. efault This allows you to refer to the device in scripts and expressions To prevent a device s properties from being used in scripts and expressions click this field to clear the checkmark Refer to Scripts and Expressions for information on scripts and expressions and the objects that use them Device script tag f you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type in a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the device in scripts and expressions For a list of device properties that can be scripted refer to the Scripts and Expressions section for the appropriate device driver NOTE f you change the script tag for a device any script that refers to the device will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the device s new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information Default interlock expression his feature is reserved for future use Device alarm mapping Specify how you want the VMX300 E server to handle signals sent out by the device To specify how you want device alarms handled select an alarm event category from the drop down list to the right of Map device Alarms to When the device sends an alarm to the VMX300 E server the server
226. em EE E E E E E E E EE EE 124 Selecting Destination qeacirs nz orb dor dod cate Redudeeaedetukassecdacadtdaudesed tapndeeedhiadad Sodusedectsseuds 124 oap ORBI e T cate tetas cot ed ee ee wes ene dosh EE taneous Ed NEN Ed CEDISS PEE E ERINSUM En one 125 Encoding Video Directly 0 RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RR HR ra 126 Encoding Video Through SVITC IBI ues ecu eee cath anc arb tiem aee ri PELA Ea EEEE Eq EH drame o aao etd B eee es ene 126 Encoding LOOGA VIO cai CE 127 Decoding Video Dirty 127 Decoding Video TOS WMC eaea a3 eer areae Side Reina trade a ERE a e seal bea pub REE E ar als 127 Connecting Video Directly tO DVR o seissssarsristipsuri 694 LAUR R4 ri rip ei iaka Eide i ganki Dar bowed ara REP ni 128 Connecting Video to DVR Through SWIECTIBE uus reser rr RR steina wedsewetanvee LEES rs Jee Dara wu nud ou 128 Connecting ASCII DBVICBS 1 ios cache es waded poeden i eniin io ii E RIP e AXI ERGEPIZRSUNI A dd eR SOEI d Ke Rad qus 129 Configure Archive Server Dialog BOX ota dra oon des side ey be tae eneud ube sd oe pa ok RESP ud ett as kaeudandevaes 130 Archive Server Options Dialog BOX os asc deocen steered Pac bi rberdess ke 4e ed ieerid isch dezedibx44 Asl EEEIEE 131 AICHE SERED WIO MM 131 Opening Project Properties Dialog BOX 0 RR 3 lll 133 Contouring Primary SENE NTQUIDCTOTE TTC TTC TET DOT LE QE 133 Connguring Backup Server
227. ent clients configure the window once then copy and paste it as needed The canvases defined for the window will be copied with the window C1553M B 4 05 TEST THE MINIMAL CONFIGURATION Testing the minimal configuration ensures that the devices in your system are connected and configured correctly and custom windows are configured correctly To test the minimal configuration 1 Start client Start the client on any workstation that you added as a client Select the VMX300 E client from the Windows Start menu or double click the VMX300 E client icon on the desktop it there is one 2 Configure server Click the Servers button at the bottom of the Client Login dialog box Click Discover All to autodiscover servers Select the server and Set as Home Server Refer to Configuring Servers in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual for more information 3 Log in Use the predefined user account user name user no password to log in to the client Refer to Logging In When the Client Is Not Already Running in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual for more information 4 Build workspace When asked whether you want the system to build a workspace for you click Yes 5 Test devices Drag a PTZ camera from the Device List to a custom window with the appropriate type of canvas to make sure you can view video from the camera Right click the camera in the Device List and then select Show Control Dialog to open the camera s Device Control
228. er 4 Output0002 Switcher Inputooo004 Switcher 4 Inputooo00s Switcher 4 Inputooo006 Switcher 4 InputOoo007 Switcher 4 Inputooo00s o 3 Sources S 2 Active Connections F 7 Available Destinations A Figure 264 Creating Connection for Server A d Add clients Add each client that will access Server As video from Server B Refer to Clients Custom Windows and Canvases Clients Add a New Client for instructions Do not add custom windows to the clients e Create user group If desired create a user group for the remote users to belong to Make sure the user group provides permission to the desired source devices Refer to User Groups Add a New User Group for instructions f Add user accounts Create a user account for each operator who will be viewing Server As video from Server B To enable an operator to log in to both servers simultaneously make the user name and password the same as on Server B VMX300 E provides an Import function that allows you to import a user account from another server As well as guarding the security of the user account this saves you from having to enter the user information manually Refer to Users Add a New User for instructions Browse Users x Corway Facility 192 168 1 144 32000 EMO 3 192 168 1 102 32000 administrator tie ORION 192 168 1 151 32000 Cancel Figure 265 Creating User Account g Save configuration Exit configuration mode and save Server As configuration Re
229. ered o to o Custom naming Add mm Remove Status Completed Success on Failure on pelcol x x Configure time zone Administrative a station E LE Figure 84 DX9000 Configuration Failure The most common cause of failure is that the user is not in the Avusers group If you have already successfully added the user to the Avusers group make sure you are logged in as the correct user Log out and log back in if necessary then repeat the steps in Configuring Computers and Users If the user has not yet been added to the Avusers group follow the instructions in Adding Users to the Avusers Group and then repeat the steps in Configuring Computers and Users C1553M B 4 05 71 ADD A DX9000 DVR TO THE SERVER CONFIGURATION Before you can add a device to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers DX9000 Driver Devices 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New DX9000 dialog box appears You can also configure DX9000 settings after you have added the DVR to the server configuration Right click the DX9000 and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears with the same tabs and fields as the Add New DX900
230. erns In the VMX300 E client create save rename and unassign patterns and set and clear the default pattern C1553M B 4 05 143 144 PELCONET DEVICE PERMISSIONS Edit Group Properties Name Operators Permissions 10 104 201 1 10 104 201 2 Can access device manager dialog Can access device control dialog Can view device icons on client Can modify MPEG 4 or Stream 1 settings Can modif MPEG 2 or Stream 2 settings PTZ Camera E Cancel Figure 179 PelcoNet Device Permissions Each PelcoNet device you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Table G PelcoNet Device Permissions PERMISSION ENAMESUSRTO OOOO Can modify MPEG 4 or Stream 1 For encoders modify the MPEG 4 settings on the Encoding tab settings For encoder decoders modify the MPEG 4 settings on the Encoding Decoding tab For decoders do not use this permission it is reserved for future use Can modify MPEG 2 or Stream 2 For encoders modify the MPEG 2 settings on the Encoding tab settings For encoder decoders modify the MPEG 2 settings on the Encoding Decoding tab For decoders do not use this permission it is reserved for future use EXTERNAL MONITOR PERMISSION Each external monitor device that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices Edit Group Properties Name Operators Permissions 9760ch 32 New External Monitor Can view device icons on client New Switc
231. ers dies Gaudin peu de enone eee eee trs 80 COMMGUFE the Communications TAD 555 assured des peste sddeheadddtes be ires cb Eres RPPZCILPATred4q peg e Dt olds 81 Wu li Ma O 83 L ontigure Wie Model Tab xosdruene casum vedas tender oats eee conte ee debied nosey eed eueeeeel be PM Ea PE REESE 84 POG INE EETI C NRI 04 L onngure ihe General TO asa roh esiti rere PUT DPe xe RR ERST Pu Re crS DP PCS ete EELEE E olds 85 Configure the Properties Tab 1isiss ete tec hr rr RES EUR pawh pt ented LIP exa p pedore EEN E S E a E aE E 85 Mons yu mca on 06 Aad aas DPA SOWIE zccscaieempetce Quis eot at vipde EENE E sopita stereo sq cries e patpdor s pata merid dod Gv poca p wipe ta 06 AUD USEPAPEOUNS coc vo oet neces EHE OPERE UIT DURER EIC e A cater see C Edde ES Db dude 06 Add a KBD300A Keyboard to the Server Configuration 0 cee nee aan 86 Lontgure the General Talis ute sierra ma e vecad nde see obe EEr ee ccebied EET EE EE a EE ed PME PE REESE 87 Configure the Communications Tab a cess rer terme ensi re EE XRA INIRE a Gong ee RR dees unge pr a ED 87 Using the KBD300A Logical Mapping Feature zr 0 RR II 89 Enable Camera and Monitor Device Numbers 0 00 0 0 0 RIRs 90 C1553M B 4 05 Configure the Logical Mapping Tab a cepere oscars E m Rt Ea Paai E PEE ORE tone FER A hem pale ERR a ati 91 Add a CM9760 ALM Alarm Interface Unit isse ovde dente coe eR pEPPIEUU dui ues rele x enne see P do
232. erver 192 168 1 154 MPEG Driver DXP Server 192 168 1 154 DMS Driver DXP Server 192 168 1 154 External Monitor Driver DXP Server 192 168 1 154 Figure 31 Browse Local Drivers Dialog Box The Browse Drivers dialog box lists all device drivers running on the server workstation Select the driver you want to add and click OK to close the Browse Drivers dialog box The driver name IP address and listening port appear in their respective boxes 42 C1553M B 4 05 b Browse all lo browse the network for running drivers click Browse All The Browse Drivers dialog box opens Browse Drivers x Driver Name Computer Name IP Address Fixed Camera Driver DXP Server 192 168 1 154 MPEG Driver DXP Server 192 168 1 154 Remote Server Driver DXP Server 192 168 1 154 Remote Server Driver EMO 3 192 168 1 132 DMS Driver EMO 3 192 168 1 132 External Monitor Driver VIDSONM 192 168 1 136 Remote Server Driver VIDSON 192 168 1 136 Figure 32 Browse All Drivers Dialog Box The Browse Drivers dialog box lists all device drivers running at network locations visible to the server you are configuring Select the driver you want to add and click OK to close the Browse Drivers dialog box The driver name IP address and listening port will appear in their respective boxes c Add driver manually f you know the IP address and port number of the driver you want to add you can add the driver by typing the address and port directly without browsing driver
233. es local settings To edit the local settings for a device 1 2 Display label f you want device icons labeled select Display the label for this device To edit the text and formatting of the device label click Edit Label The Edit Device Label Properties dialog box opens C1553M B 4 05 Edit Local Settings Ops Ctr Monitor E x Miscellaneous r Scripting Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Device Drivers gt device driver name gt Devices gt device name Double click Local settings in the right pane Alternatively right click the device in either pane and select Local Settings from the pop up menu The Edit Local settings dialog box opens v Display the label For this device Edit Label Enable the device number Na v Expose properties of this device so that they can be used in scripts and expressions i Device Script Tag Default Interlock Expression Device Alarm Mapping Map device Normal to Normal Edit Device Label Properties Map device Alarms to alarms Map device Events to Events caresi Figure 195 Edit Local Settings Dialog Box pans po HH Text Line 1 west Wing C Left Justify Center Justify Line 2 Camera C Right Justify Font r Text Properties Line 3 Background Transparent Opaque Select Color Single Line Figure 196 Edit
234. esponds to True in VMX300 E whereas False corresponds to the normal N O state of the output For example if the relay action is to turn on a VCR True equals On and False equals Off When a relay is wired as normally closed N C the relay state still corresponds to True in VMX300 E and False still corresponds to the normal state which is N C in this case When you define an expression in the server configuration using the relay outputs the expression tests whether the point is True regardless of whether the actual relay output is wired as N O or N C as shown in the following table Table AH Defining Normally Open and Normally Closed Relay Outputs State of Contact WO WC C1553M B 4 05 189 190 SERIAL OUTPUT DEVICE PROPERTY EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists the serial output device property that can be used in scripts and expressions NOTES ON USING SPECIAL ASCII CHARACTERS IN SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS If a command contains unprintable characters replace each unprintable character with its three digit ASCII code between angle brackets For example the command BLACK HOT lt Carriage Return is represented in VMX300 E as BLACK HOT lt 013 gt Note that ASCII codes must be three digits in length If an ASCII code contains less that three digits add leading zeroes When using ASCII characters in scripts and expressions VMX300 E transforms lower case ASCII le
235. essary and then click Set to close the dialog box The new IP address appear in the Unit IP Address box The address mask and gateway settings are downloaded to the PelcoNet device 62 C1553M B 4 05 Security The upload features only work on a password protected device if the password is entered here You only need to enter the password once in VMX300 E Once the password is entered the upload features can be used freely during the current and future sessions Note the following password parameters e _ If a Live or User password is configured in the PelcoNet device internal settings enter a password of your choice on the Communications tab e lfaService password is configured in the device settings enter the same password on the Communications tab as is defined in the device internal settings The following upload features are affected by password protection e Browse Located on the General tab and the Communications tab e Upload Settings Located on the Communications tab e Autodiscover Devices Located in the Object Browser in server configuration mode NOTE Since the PelcoNet MPEG driver operates under the Service level of security the username appears as service by default and cannot be changed CONFIGURE THE NVR300 RECORDING TAB This applies to encoders and encoder decoders only Add New PelcoNet 40014 General Properties Encoding Decodina Communications NVR300 Recording Enter in the
236. est Connection OK Cancel Figure 165 Archive Server Options Dialog Box a MICROSOFT ACCESS To store archived alarms and events in Microsoft Access files select Microsoft Access Select the folder where the archive files will be stored from the drop down list You can change the folder at any time without shutting down the archive server Refer to View Archive Server Status for instructions on selecting a folder once the archive server is running b SQLSERVER lo store archived alarms and events on a SOL Server select SOL Server 1 SERVER Type the IP address or computer name of the SQL server that will store the archives 2 USER NAME Type the SOL Server user name 3 PASSWORD Type the SOL Server password 4 TEST CONNECTION To make sure a connection can be made to the SQL server click Test Connection A window opens that tells you whether the connection was successfully established or not Click OK to close the window 6 Click OK The Configure Archive Server dialog box will close If you are running the archive server as a Service start the server through the Windows Control Panel Administrative Tools or restart the computer the archive server application is installed on An icon representing the archive server will appear in the Windows system tray indicating that the server is running VIEW ARCHIVE SERVER STATUS 1 Double click the archive server icon in the Windows system tray or right click the icon and
237. et eke TTE de eeuee seeders eee hee ce secede Seale edie pokes ote 167 AIMCO IEW oe ecco kee eopecactoe OTT 168 Adda New Named VIEW lt si ne neseard eth ees eeded een ed kenednbebednae nin peewee neaedeaeerids obadeiabebedasenaneses 168 Edita Named VIEW oce eet cee ease sede ee ens ocdewseeuent erg ar ensued ewe e dene UIDI eee REENE es 168 Her SE ACIDS VICW nc oc Gace ERECTO EET TC ead eee bons goose TT TTE daa aden a oon dedasewee E 169 Updale a Namea VIEW LS eost dace s repi se deen ETE EPSaPDURPbeOSVEN S IRI EE PARECEN EEICEDSNUEEEE EQUES quP PRU RES 169 Delete a Named VIEW us eode wicmqdctrien eset veis aR Ree WidercELSRAium ek ne bees 650406840 EE PE EEP TES 169 O Ss rte EN E ETT TREE ETT ROT eae Food eases aed eae oe bond eee boone aonseaoees 170 POU a NEW ROUNE cie ratre eNA UNA IC nbn bee Mon eGeus LoS quodn pubis RONA DOTEM ben EE eee 170 Edita ROUNE S FODOS essct rtr eyed sod vata REINSAN ENAERE ee and sie daed ean dade swentquderdasauradsdes 172 Modin a HOUInK s Snap ani IZ gaat naa ead Vine Rub e adis ey se ede yet eh ie ade aad sede a Ou oo Mac aC dedit earns 172 DOVE VOTO ore be op adinc TET ETT toes EE EEE Leeds cote tou abe bees Lebeens bth ecesiaeeaee 173 C1553M B 4 05 Add a Vertex NCC 173 A IET a eiere ar Er E a den E ENEE a AE R AE a aa a aTe 173 Belt d UIDI rasp ty uc Sn ep D C quon tI dE E Ebo pr pte pot Ge acat eae scares eet ae REPRE S ERI RED ES TOR Pade ee Smee 173 Lo SS eserves E
238. etBT service and NetBIOS name resolution gt Path to executable C WINDOWS System32 syvchost exe k LocalService Startup type Disabled Service status Y ou can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Start parameters Figure 8 TCP IP NetBIOS Helper Properties Dialog Box 3 Click the down arrow in the Startup type drop down box and then click Disabled 4 Click OK close all windows and then restart the VMX300 E workstation C1553M B 4 05 Starting and Stopping the Server The VMX300 E server can be launched in run mode or configuration mode Configuration mode has a user interface that allows you to configure any type of object including the following objects e Users e Maps e Devices e Scripts e X Alarms and events To launch the VMX300 E server in configuration mode a user must have permission to configure the software Refer to User Groups Group Permissions for more information Run mode has no user interface When the VMX300 E server is in run mode the server application is moved to the Windows system tray where It continues to run in the background The server must be in run mode for clients to connect to it Run mode has a pop up menu that is opened by right clicking the VMX300 E icon in the Windows system tray The menu has the options listed in able A Table A Options for Run Mode MENU OPTION SECTION OF MANUAL
239. event the primary server fails If devices are connected to the primary server only you will have to re cable the serial controlled devices to the backup server after a failure IP devices require no special connection to be accessible by the backup server Project Properties x Network switching Archiving Date Time E mail This Server Server Type Backup v Project Name Headquarters Facility Client Port s2000 Driver Port 2001 FTP Port s2002 Primary Server IP Address 10 104 11 17 Port s2000 Synchronize Mow Browse Cancel Figure 169 Configuring Backup Server To configure a backup server 1 Server type The Server Type option is only available under software licenses that support backup servers Select Backup from the drop down list Additional boxes appear at the bottom of the Network tab C1553M B 4 05 7 o Project name lype a descriptive name for the project The project name is at least one character and at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks By default the computer name is used as the project name The project name for the backup server can be the same as the project name for the primary server The project name appears at the top of the backup server s Object Browser Wherever instructions for navigating the Object Browser are give
240. evice label does not affect its position For information on changing a label s position refer to Move a Device Label To change the size of a device label 1 With the desired map loaded right click the device label you want to resize and select Scale from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the label not the icon before right clicking 8 vMX300 Enterprise Configuration 377 Licenses Remaining 41 Days Remaining B 5 x File View Zoom Tools Help Object Browser x ECorway Facility Hl Alarms and Events C Alarms and Events Corway Facility Clients J Clients Administration j Connections J Connections Device Drivers 4 Device Drivers Ns Skos C Global Scripts Global Scripts Cl Global Ta gs Edit Label Global Tags Oo Labels IR Labels Logs Logs H Maps Prompts cmm cog eese Recipient Groups I Recipient Groups LE LE i CIm Schedules LJ Schedules Server Ties server Ties f Timers ZJ Timers User Groups user Groups Users users D a p Figure 199 Changing Label Size 2 Move the pointer away from the label to make the label larger Move the pointer towards the center of the label to make the label smaller 3 When the device label is sized the way you want it press the left mouse button The label s size freezes 166 C1553M B 4 05 EDIT A DEVICE LABEL To change the text and formatting of an existing device label 1 Right click the la
241. evice you want to place on the map and hold the mouse button down If you move the pointer slightly it changes to cross hairs Drag the pointer to the map position it where you want to place the device and release the mouse button An icon representing the selected device appears on the map and the pointer changes back to an arrow If Display the label for this device is selected in the device s local settings the device s label appears below the icon Refer to Edit a Devices Local Settings for more information on displaying labels Scale and rotate Move the pointer away from the icon to make the icon larger Move the pointer towards the center of the icon to make the icon smaller Scaling the device icon does not affect the size of the device s label Refer to Scale a Device Label for instructions on scaling the device s label NOTE To minimize the CPU workload device icons should be as small as possible Move the pointer in a circle around the icon to change the orientation of the icon Note that you can only rotate icons that represent devices that are made to be oriented different ways such as cameras Icons representing devices that are not normally rotated such as monitors cannot be rotated 5 When the icon is sized and oriented the way you want it press the left mouse button The icon s size and orientation freezes If the device s label is displayed it freezes in place below the icon Q TIP Hold the Shift key down whi
242. ew Camera dialog box appears You can also configure DX8000 camera settings after you have added the cameras to the server configuration Right click the DX8000 camera and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New Camera dialog box 3 Configure the camera settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box 5 Configure the analog connections between the DVR cameras and output devices Refer to the DVR Connections section CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New Camera General Properties Auxiliaries Name New Camera Description v This camera supports PaniTilt Zoom functionality Figure 69 General Tab for DX8000 Camera 1 Use the General tab to name and describe the camera The device name can be a maximum of 50 characters You cannot use single or double quotation marks in a name but you can use any other letter digit or special character Device names are not case sensitive The optional description appears in the Object Browser beside the device name 2 Ifthe camera can be panned tilted zoomed focused or the iris adjusted click This camera supports Pan Tilt Zoom functionality If the camera is fixed leave this box unchecked C1553M B 4 05 69 10 CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Add New Camera General Properties Auxiliaries Icon Animation I Device in
243. ey can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the custom window in scripts For a list of window properties that can be scripted refer to Scripts and Expressions Properties of Objects 4 Click OK The Add New Window dialog box closes and the new window is added The name and script tag of the new window appear in the Object Browser When logged in to the client for which the window is defined an operator with permission to edit workspaces will see the window listed in the Edit Workspace dialog box EDIT A CUSTOM WINDOW NOTE f you change the script tag for a custom window any script that refers to the window will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the window s new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information To change the properties of an existing custom window 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Clients gt client name gt Windows In either pane right click the window you want to change and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Window Properties dialog box opens Edit Window Properties Window Information Mame window 1 Script Tag window 1 SN Figure 21 Edit Window Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the window as desired Refer to Add a New Custom Window for information on
244. f you specify 72 cameras then there will be 72 rows under the Keyboard and Device columns 3 Map each keyboard logical number to the desired device number by typing the appropriate device number in the Device column For example type 6 to map keyboard logical number to the camera that is assigned device number 6 VMX300 E provides a shortcut for entering consecutively numbered devices Refer to the Mapping Shortcut section for instructions View Logical Mapping Settings To view the current logical mapping scheme for either cameras or monitors click the appropriate device type in the Device Type box The logical mapping for the selected device type appears in the grid containing the Keyboard and Device columns C1553M B 4 05 91 Export Logical Mapping Settings If you want to assign the same logical mappings to more than one keyboard you can save the logical mapping settings to a file by completing the following steps I A Configure the logical mappings as described in the previous section Click Export The Save As dialog box appears Browse to the desired folder and type a file name for the logical mappings Click Save The Save As dialog box closes and the logical mappings are saved Click OK The Keyboard Properties dialog box closes Refer to the following section for instructions on copying the settings to another keyboard Import Logical Mapping Settings Once you have saved a file of logical mapping settin
245. f archiving is turned on the archive will show that the alarm or event was automatically acknowledged by the server e There is a limit of 500 completed events in Session View of the Session Manager When the limit is exceeded the 500 oldest events are deleted from Session View C1553M B 4 05 ACCESS ALARMS AND EVENTS DEFINED ON ANOTHER SERVER You can access alarms and events defined on another server using the remote server driver feature Remote server drivers appear as device drivers in the Object Browser and are added edited and deleted the same way device drivers are There is a remote server driver for every server that is running Refer to Device Drivers for instructions on adding a remote server driver Script tags for remote servers are made up of the remote server name that appears in the Object Browser appended with Server Script tags for remote devices are made up of the device name that appears in the Object Browser under Sources appended with RS for Remote server Script tags for remote alarms and events appear in the Object Browser as read properties The remote server driver for a particular server provides a list of alarms and events defined on that server Each alarm or event is presented as a read property of the remote server The read property has value True when the remote alarm event s expression is true The read property has value False when the remote alarm event s expression is false The remote server
246. fault Settings 1 loselect factory default settings click Return Encoder Parameters to Factory Defaults The Factory Defaults message appears Factory Defaults X This will return all encoding settings back ko Factory defaults Do you wish to proceed 9 9 Figure 57 Factory Defaults Message 2 Click Yes The MPEG 4 configuration on the PelcoNet device is changed to the factory default settings 3 If necessary you can change one or more individual settings in order to customize your system The factory default settings provide higher frame rate settings for connections with high bandwidth based on parameter preset 1 Refer to the appropriate PelcoNet manual for detailed information C1553M B 4 05 61 CONFIGURE THE COMMUNICATIONS TAB Add New PelcoNet 40014 General Properties Encoding Decoding Communications NVA300 Recording Unit Address Unit IP Address Change Upload Settings gt Security Username Password DK Cancel Figure 58 Communications Tab for PelcoNet Device Unit Address To add a PelcoNet device complete the following steps 1 You can either enter the IP address of the PelcoNet device you are configuring or click Browse The address in VMX300 E is synchronized with the address in the PelcoNet device Changing the address in VMX300 E also changes the address in the device If you click Browse to automatically locate PelcoNet devices that are visi
247. fer to Starting and Stopping the Server for instructions h Run Server A If it is not already running put Server A in run mode Refer to Starting and Stopping the Server for instructions 2 Server B a Log in Log in to configuration mode on Server B b Add remote server driver Add the remote server driver for Server A Remote server drivers provide a list of source devices on the remote server and a list of alarms and events on the remote server Alarms and events are presented as read properties of the remote server Refer to Server Ties for information on using remote server devices and alarms and events in scripts Remote server drivers appear as device drivers in the Object Browser and are added edited and deleted the same way device drivers are There is a remote server driver for each server that is running C1553M B 4 05 241 242 VMX300 E provides a Browse All function that allows you to select a remote server driver from a list of running drivers Refer to Device Drivers Add a New Device Driver for instructions on browsing drivers Select the desired remote server driver and click OK The remote server driver appears in the Object Browser Expand the list to view the remote server s devices and alarms and events Object Browser xi El Corway Facility Browse privers Es x Driver Name Computer Name IP Address Fixed Camera Driver UEM 168 1 102 Remote Server Driver ASCII Driver Switcher Driver Remote Server
248. for the device driver s Power User account described in the Add an Account to the Power User Group for the Device Driver section 4 Password Type the password that the device driver will use to access the recorder This must be the same as the password defined for the the device driver s Power User account described in the Add an Account to the Power User Group for the Device Driver section CONFIGURE THE MODEL TAB Add New DX8000 General Properties Communications Modei Specify a Device Model to ensure accurate feature support Peico DX 8008 Series Looping Inputs i Cancel Figure 68 Model Tab for DX8000 DVR C1553M B 4 05 1 Select the recorder model from the drop down box 2 Optional Click Looping Inputs to make the recorder s looping inputs appear as sources for connections ADD A DX8000 CAMERA If you will be controlling cameras through the DVR add each camera to the VMX300 E server configuration and configure the camera settings within VMX300 E as described in this section Before you can add a DX8000 camera to the server configuration you must first start the DX8000 device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers DX8000 Driver Cameras 2 Double click Add New Device The Add N
249. fy an item on a map Q TIP Device icons and alarm event icons have built in labels associated with them Built in labels are for information only you cannot associate a script with them Refer to Edit a Devices Local Settings for information on displaying a device s label Refer to Alarms and Events Alarms Events and Normal Occurrences for information on displaying an alarm or event s label Before you can place a label on a map you must create the label Once created you can place it as many times as you want on a single map or on different maps Each instance of a particular label has the same appearance and runs exactly the same script The only difference between one instance and another Is its location Any label placed on a map can later be moved to a different location on the map using the Move option ADD A NEW LABEL 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Labels Double click Add New Label in the right pane or right click Labels in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Label dialog box opens Add New Label x Label Information Name Script Tag New Label Details Script Execute script on Single Click C Double Click Figure 205 Add New Label Dialog Box 2 Name Type a unique descriptive name for the label you want to add Label names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and
250. gate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers Pelco ALM Driver Devices 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New Device dialog box appears You can also configure settings after you have added the device to the server configuration Right click the device and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New Device dialog box 3 Configure the device settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box C1553M B 4 05 93 CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New Device i General Properties Communications ALM Points Model Name New ALM Device Description NEN i Cancel Figure 108 General Tab for CM9760 ALM Use the General tab to name and describe the alarm unit The device name can be a maximum of 50 characters You cannot use single or double quotation marks in a name but you can use any other letter digit or special character Device names are not case sensitive The optional description appears in the Object Browser beside the device name CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Add New Device General Properties Communications ALM Points Model Icon Animation Device in unknown state Choose g Device in normal state Choose Device in alarm state Color 1 Choose Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose L Figure 109
251. ge Determining point numbers Some access control devices allow you to configure the number assigned to alarms Other access control devices have preset numbers for alarms If the access control device you are configuring uses preset numbers refer to the device s product documenta tion to determine the numbers of the alarms you want VMX300 E to manage If the access control device uses configurable numbers determine the numbers from the device s internal configuration Points in the client Each point you add to the server configuration appears in the Device Control dialog box in the VMX300 E client When a particular alarm is triggered the point for that alarm appears in bold print in the Device Control dialog box allowing operators to monitor the status of the access control points Add Access Control Points 1 Type the number of access control points that you want to add in the Point s box and then click Add The specified number of new points appears in the list New points are assigned sequential numbers and generic names and script tags C1553M B 4 05 Edit Access Control Properties General Properties Communications access Control Points Pattern Matching Number of Access Control Points 8 1 2 3 4 5 B 7 a B Points Figure 141 Adding Access Control Points For each point that you add one new read property and one new write property are added to the access control device when you exit the dial
252. gg BOK gesde tuum meesrrbveUE EP oes desea tunECUD E aT FPEM Ehe PEEJETPEUID SUPR ETRAS E HE 26 oBer Login Dialog BOX RETE 27 Run Mode Fop an MONU ssr eerset sc tia Saut y doe decertatio mca dee A Rather as doin E E det v RE woe Ag E E T 28 ual C 28 PAG ss agra ete Rowe ftw ap ee a ea ek eh wg te a ee ee a ee eg ee 29 abl ME AMG IG Ne We snes ee cease T 29 uUi r 30 Create or Restore Database Dialog BOX nnno qaia IPE IMP oSEDONdelue ue RIESITESRaRSRR S SdEXNeXRtAPQU PE Capa 31 comode Driver WIIG OKs RRRERCETTOTTT cena oo rrie Arere IS AREETA sade beds auaeecabehecebiaesahes 31 Add New Client Dialog DOR e ce ceat centre TE PEL TERT T UTMIM M 34 Edit Client Properties Dialog BOX 2 RIRs 34 Adda New Wy MOU Dialog BUY cc srekraceg aee ceres cede ue Pen Ere ETEen ene wees mance bce vey eran TAE ENE NEN 36 Edit Window Properties Dialog Box 2 e RRRRIRRRRRRRRRRRR RR RR a 36 Add New Canvas Dialog BOX cs vues tona bw pdn e tanina PEENE hs ont eee ne ees he oe bese Se RUM pee RE Pe RP betes ets ups 3 General Setting for Quad Video Display 5 o besiegt kur idora sc e Dio aca e dct ac e cce a d e ede 30 Advancod SoN o eos aor etude t pierre PROP uae un EUER DU Puit RN PUE S PR E SEU 30 POG Ge ETCOLIEL DOS eens concen rE REEE EPETREPII UITCEPIRDEEEPUQIFE cauestes ced 39 General PelcoNet Canvas Settings
253. gnals over the server tie illustrated in Figure 260 operators must be logged in to both servers typically with Server B as their home server Logging in to Server A gives the remote operator access to Server As maps and devices provided the operators Server A user account grants the necessary privileges To limit a remote user s access to maps and devices restrict the user s permissions in the Server A configuration exactly as you would any other user Operators load video from a remote server the same way they load video from their home server by dragging the camera from the Device List or from a map to the destination Signal types You must define a server tie for each type of signal you want to share Signals fall into two broad categories analog and IP The specific types of IP and analog signals depend on the equipment configured on your server Analog signal types can include Analog Video VGA Video and Audio IP signal types are specific to the models of IP encoders configured on your server For each analog server tie you configure you must add a connection on both servers to map out the physical connections between devices Number of simultaneous destinations A server tie allows a signal to be transmitted to one destination at a time If you want to transmit signals to more than one destination at one time you must define a server tie for each destination For example if you want to be able to display video from a remote server in all fo
254. gs you can copy the settings to another keyboard by completing the following steps Q TIP f you want to use similar but not identical logical mapping settings in another keyboard import the settings and then edit them 1 Add and configure another keyboard following the instructions provided in the previous sections Click the Logical Mapping Tab and then click Import The Open dialog box appears Navigate to the folder containing the logical mappings file and then click the file to select it Click Open The Open dialog box closes and the logical mapping settings for cameras and monitors are imported into the keyboard properties Repeat steps 1 4 for additional keyboards Mapping Shortcut VMX300 E provides a shortcut for entering consecutively numbered devices For example map device numbers 50 55 to keyboard numbers 20 25 as follows jn 2 3 92 Enter the first device number in this example 50 Using the mouse position the pointer over the square to the right of Device 50 The pointer changes into cross hairs Pelco KBD300 Keyboard Properties x General Communications Logical Mapping Device Count 72 Apply Device Type Keyboard Device Figure 105 Mapping Consecutive Logical Numbers Press the left mouse button and drag the square to the end of the consecutive range in this example Keyboard 25 The range is enclosed in a rectangle C1553M B 4 05 Pelco KBD300 Keybo
255. guration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers Pelco Relay Driver Devices 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New Device dialog box appears You can also configure settings after you have added the device to the server configuration Right click the device and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New Device dialog box 3 Configure the device settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New Device General Properties Communications Relay Points DIP Switches Model Name New Relay Device Description FO Figure 116 General Tab for CM9760 REL Use the General tab to name and describe the relay unit The device name can be a maximum of 50 characters You cannot use single or double quotation marks in a name but you can use any other letter digit or special character Device names are not case sensitive The optional description appears in the Object Browser beside the device name CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Add New Device General Properties Communications Relay Points DIP Switches Model Icon Animation Device in unknown state Choose Device in normal state Choose Device in alarm state
256. gure 80 Building Server List C1553M B 4 05 15 5 Click Build a list of local servers and then click Custom naming 6 Type the name of the DX9000 DVR in the Custom naming field If you do not know the name of the DVR you can find it out by right clicking the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop and selecting Properties from the pop up menu Click the Network Identification tab The DVR name is the first part of the full computer name For example if the full computer name is pelco1 admin1 corwayfacility then the DX9000 DVR name is pelco E DX 9000 Client Configuration Utility Site map creation C Import from server Y Configure time zone Export to server Build a list of local servers Configure C Standard naming Numbered m to D Custom naming pelco1 Add Close mE Remove Figure 81 Entering DX9000 Name Administrative a station Wee 7 Click Add The name of the DX9000 DVR will move to the box below the Custom naming field DX 9000 Client Configuration Utility Site map creation Import from server L Configure time zone Export to server Y Build a list of local servers Configure C Standard naming Numbered o to o Custom naming Administrative Li station AAA Figure 82 Adding DX9000 Name 8 Click Configure You will be asked whether you want to change the settings 9 Click Yes If the configurati
257. hange The Computer Name Changes dialog box appears System Properties g 2 x System Restore Automatic Updates Remote General Computer Name Hardware Advanced Windows uses the following information to identify your computer Computer description VMx300 1 You can change the name and the membership of this inr um computer Changes may affect access to network resources For example Kitchen Computer or Mary s Computer Full computer name YMxX300 1 Computer name Workgroup Mx300_GROUP vmx300 Server Full computer name To use the Network Identification Wizard to join a domain and create a local user account click Network Naert VMXS00 Server ID To rename this computer or join a domain click Change Member of C Domain D3000 GROUP OK Cancel Apply Figure 5 Identify the VMX300 E Workstation on the Network 3 Inthe Computer name field type the new name 4 Optional Assign the VMX300 E to be a member of a workgroup or a domain To assign the VMX300 E to a workgroup enter the workgroup name in the Workgroup field To assign the VMX300 E to a domain click Domain and then enter the domain name Click OK and then enter the user name and password in the Domain Username and Password dialog box 5 Click OK The Computer Name Changes message appears indicating that the VMX300 E has been assigned to the specified workgroup or domain 6 Click OK The restart message appears
258. hanges into cross hairs with hot link in the lower right corner 3 Define hotlink area With the pointer positioned at one corner of the area you want the hotlink click the left mouse button Position the pointer at an adjacent corner and click the left mouse button Continue positioning the pointer and clicking until all the corners have been defined A hotlink must have at least three corners With the pointer positioned anywhere on the map right click The outline freezes in place and the Add New Hotlink dialog box opens NOTE To minimize the CPU workload hotlinks should be as small as possible For example a hotlink that covers half of a map could cause CPU performance problems Add New Hotlink Information Preview Single Line C Single Line Color a Script Execute script on Single Click Double Click r Figure 203 Add New Hotlink Dialog Box 170 C1553M B 4 05 C1553M B 4 05 Name Type a unique descriptive name for the hotlink you want to add Hotlink names are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Hotlink names are not case sensitive A tag resembling the hotlink name appears in the Script Tag box If the hotlink name contains special characters they are omitted from the tag Leading digits are removed Spaces are replaced with underscores Script tag If you do not want to use the scrip
259. haracters they are omitted from the tag Leading digits are removed Spaces are replaced with underscores Script tag If you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the map in scripts Filename Click Browse to locate the map file you want to add Select the desired image file and click Open If you select a file on a network drive the server s access to the file could be interrupted by network problems You can avoid this by having the map file reside on a fixed drive on the server The file name appears in the Filename area Grid f you want a grid of dots to display on the map select Apply Grid Any objects you place on the map like devices labels and hotlinks will snap to the grid Make sure the grid is fine grained enough to allow you to place objects where you want them If you want change the grid size by selecting a number from the Grid Size drop down list or by typing a number directly into the Grid Size box The grid displays on the VMX300 E server only It does not display on the client Client map loading Select the default view you want operators to see when they load the map in the VMX300 E client This default is used only if the ope
260. hat is run from a schedule The sequence starts with an ON ERROR RESUME NEXT command to ensure that in the event that an FTP command fails the next statement will execute Every time the global script is run by the schedule VMX300 E executes every statement including any statement that failed the last time it was run Image captures in this sequence are taken between 5 AM and 7 AM only The schedule that runs the global script controls how frequently the sequence is run The schedules script is RUN FIP Sequence Edit Global Script Properties Global Script Information Name FTP Sequence Script Tag FTP Sequence Global Script Events OK Cancel Figure 274 FTP sequence Q TIPS e l fyouare going to take regular scheduled FIP image captures it is recommended that you employ a dedicated FTP computer that is isolated from routine daily operations This ensures that an operator will not shut down the client by mistake which would cause FTP captures to fail e To control FTP captures define objects that are dedicated to FIP Create a dedicated user account that is always logged in If the FTP commands are in a schedule make the dedicated user the recipient of the schedule Add a window to the dedicated client that is only used for FTP image capture These steps ensure that you know exactly where the image capture is taking place as well as preventing operators from being interrupted in their routine duties DELETE AN FTP SITE
261. he alarm or event occurred In addition to selecting Notify via e mail for the alarm event category you must complete the following additional steps e Configure the e mail server on the E mail tab of the Project Properties dialog box Refer to Project Properties E mail Tab for Instructions e Configure an e mail address for each recipient If a user belongs to a recipient group for an alarm event category that uses e mail notification but the user does not have an e mail address configured the user will not receive email notification Refer to Users for instructions on configuring user accounts 5 Attributes d Priority Assign a priority to the category if you want some or all of the alarms and events in the category to inherit their priority from the category The category priority overrides the priority for a particular alarm or event only if Use category priority is selected for that alarm or event VMX300 E uses priorities to resolve situations in which two or more objects attempt to control a particular device at the same time The object with the higher priority number is given control of the device The highest priority you can assign to an object is 99 The lowest is 1 System events have priority 100 Users schedules and alarms and events all have a priority The scripts associated with these objects inherit the object s priority Color Select a color to signify that the alarm or event has been triggered Alarm event
262. he remote device s driver runs on Enter the remote IP in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box enter the port the remote device s driver uses to receive commands d Referto Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section 3 Miscellaneous Configure the following fields in the Miscellaneous section of the Communications tab Miscellaneous Device Address f Re arm Interval msec pao Connection Attempts B Attempt Interval sec 3 ES Comm Timeout msech ooo Idle Disconnect sec p Expect echo f ES Figure 112 Miscellaneous Section of Communications Tab Device Address Enter the device address The device address must match the Group Address configured through the alarm unit s DIP switches Refer to the CM9760 ALM Installation Operation manual for instructions Re arm Interval Optional Enter the re arm interval The re arm interval determines how soon after an event a state change can be detected Any change in state is ignored for the duration of the re arm interval Idle Disconnect sec Optional Enter the number of seconds of inactivity you want to elapse before VMX300 E closes the COM port direct serial connection or the local port IP connection The port will open again automatically when a new connection is established with the alarm unit Use the default value of 0 to indicate that the port should never be closed while the driver is running Note that the f
263. he scheduled action to execute every few minutes click By Minutes In the Every area type in the number of minutes you want to elapse before the action next executes up to a maximum of 59 minutes Fractional amounts will automatically be rounded 215 216 g By seconds If you want the scheduled action to execute every few seconds click By Seconds In the Every area type in the number of seconds you want to elapse before the action next executes up to a maximum of 59 seconds Fractional amounts will automatically be rounded h Once If you want the scheduled action to execute once only on a predetermined day at a predetermined time click Once Type the date in directly or select it from the drop down calendar Use the left and right arrows to select the month in the drop down calendar then select a date by clicking it Today s date is circled in red opecify the time of day for the action to execute To set the time select the hour minutes or seconds and click the up and down arrows A schedule that is set to execute once is automatically deleted from the server configuration once it has executed To save a copy of the schedule make a copy of it before it executes using Copy and Paste Refer to Pop Up Menus in the Appendix for information on making copies of objects 5 Holidays f you want prevent the scheduled action from executing on certain days of the year click Don t run schedule on holidays Click oet holidays to specif
264. he title bar The Connections dialog box closes Q TIP Double click the Connections title bar to maximize the dialog box Double click again to restore it PELCONET CONNECTIONS You must define connections that reflect how each PelcoNet is physically connected within the system Encode video directly from source device The PelcoNet device encodes video directly from a source device such as a camera The PelcoNet device s input is connected to the source device s output TUNIS Pie Bun NET4001A CAMERA Analog Video Connections pu o o Bl x File Edit Tools Slee trie Camera Output Encoder Input Ng 1 Sources n 1 Active Connections Nj 0 Available Destinations Figure 156 Encoding Video Directly Encode video through switcher The PelcoNet device encodes video that is switched from a source device such as a camera The PelcoNet device s input is connected to the switcher s output NET 350 MATRIX SWITCHER CAMERA NETWORK J Analog Video Connections ui mi x File Edit Tools a ee tiie Source Device Description Destination Description Camera Output Matrix Switcher Inputi Matrix Switcher Input2 Codec Output Matrix Switcher Input3 Matrix Switcher Output1 Codec Input Matrix Switcher Input4 Matrix Switcher Output2 Destination Device Ng 4 Sources n 2 Active Connections F 3 Available Destinations Figure 157 Encoding Video
265. her New Camera DX8000 Camera 1 Fixed Camera Figure 180 External Monitor Permission Table H External Monitor Permission Can view device icons on client Make External Monitor device icons visible in the client and list the device in the Device List C1553M B 4 05 DX8000 PERMISSIONS Each DX8000 device that you configure appears in the Group Permissions list under Devices DX8000 Recorder Permissions Table I DX8000 Recorder Permissions Can access on screen display Do not use this permission it is reserved for future use DX8000 Camera Permissions Add New Group x Name New Group Permissions BED S5000A CHO1 C Can access device control dialog C Can lock device C Can control device Bl C Can access on screen display C Can view device icons on client C Can edit presets 1 8 C Can edit presets 9 and above C Can edit patterns C Dx8000A CH02 cae Figure 181 DX8000 Camera Permissions Table J DX8000 Camera Permissions PERMISSION ENABLES USERTO Can access device control dialog Access the camera s Device Control dialog box in the VMX300 E client Can lock device Lock the camera in the client preventing users and scripts with lower priority from controlling the camera Can control device In the VMX300 E client pan tilt zoom and focus the camera adjust the iris go to presets and run patterns Can access on screen
266. his license by typing in the Activation Code provided by your Software Vendor Activation Code Lime m Figure 13 License ID 2 Enter your license ID in the Add License dialog box The base license ID and any additional license IDs each ID is a four part number are provided on the VMX300 E Licenses sheet The hardware ID is entered by Pelco at the factory o IMPORTANT Once you have entered your License ID you must obtain your activation code step 3 and then enter it step 4 within 45 days 3 Obtain your activation code 4 Pelco MX Series Activation Microsoft Internet Explorer B File Edit view Favorites Tools Help a Open your Internet browser and go to the lt Back gt Q 3 A Qsearch Ggrevortes Gristory By S wi E VMX Series Activation page at Pelco com http www pelco com 2 7 4 LG vmxactivation Global Leaders in Video Security Systems Home Company Products Software Support Shippin International Contacts pany PF pp ing b Enter your hardware ID and license ID PRODUCTS and then complete the remaining fields Products Home VMX Series Activation Camera Site C Click Activate A confirmation screen Certes 4 Type in your Installation ID appears containing your activation code editis hardware D end your sofware icones Ds dicated onthe back af youl CD ce Pelco MPS Hardware ID OR 123456 Call Pelco Technical Support VMX200 License ID VMX300 License ID 1 800 289 91 00 or OR
267. iacr dade sed 203 Edit Global Script Properties Dialog BOX ais da goeamctx rex deb pte dde t ea ERE qa RU dee d ERE deme pde ib Re idees 204 Ada New Global Tag Dialng BOX tree ance cds eee anenes deRPISAEPeEIOU adi Se ESOS EP HERMES Pese IC IC ELITS 205 Edit Global Tag Dialog BOX 2 uaa sp ceeesdedes reperire rer rre der ra cher psp ENS PIdGed Eder aur ond eon 205 Ada New Prompt Didog BOK qE 207 Example ola PIOmMDU srerrriscranernn iaruinn E E A TE T E E eters ies EA TEA 208 Feo cnor CN DOK os see a a E ao E ER E geen RE E RIPE es E E E RE peace RRR 208 FRUI DISIDO BOX 268 gitee catieesea ee e ERr EE E E E E AE E s ER 209 Edit Prompt Preperges Dialog DUX ics cna acute awh eR eO re qe RE Rr o CN CIRCE RR RC REC N 4 CRDI Pd iac S Ke DR PEAR ERS 209 no vM NN tuj CP tego 2127 Edit Timer Properties Dialog BOX sss 25ei2 se edeLIARERRO Krub3be Fea iria beleRcbvi psa ud pcbsibicriatib ies 219 Add Dow Schede Dialog BOX ea uet ptt T teense ere E pEr Sr Or RI eee on eee en eect PIA QUERPL Qr FEE DOSITP ROS 214 Daily Schedule Dialog BOX oecam uS pas SOS cans dadudaseeriokrbentes sene eS AA NENEA pscihdxadudelderbrsdbes 215 Bunnse SUNSELBIGIDU DOK cec caes tatis xasE vC Oa n PCR DIM EP N IRE ade eee Rae M ree 215 Zopdaat cibo P 216 Edit ocheduled Action Dial g BOX cc i Sew os otra a eae sons trn caretes eode E eda nro eant Nc nod ee eed E
268. iaries Tab for DX8000 Camera Auxiliary names appear in the VMX300 E client where auxiliaries are controlled and also appear in scripts where they are used to refer to the auxiliary When you rename an auxiliary the write property for that auxiliary is changed to the name you have specified Example You might rename an auxiliary that controls a camera s wiper to Wiper and then use it in a script as follows SET Camera1 Wiper On FOR 3 To rename an auxiliary click the box next to the auxiliary you want to rename and then type the new name No two auxiliary names can be the same for a particular camera but the same auxiliary name can be used for different cameras Auxiliary names can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Auxiliary names are not case sensitive C1553M B 4 05 Note that the VMX300 E supports up to eight auxiliaries The actual number of auxiliaries available to you depends on the number of auxiliaries the camera supports If the camera has fewer than eight auxiliaries for example six auxiliaries then only the first six auxiliaries on the Auxiliaries tab will work If the camera supports more than eight auxiliaries then you can only access the first eight auxiliaries through the Auxiliaries tab Refer to the appropriate camera installation operation manual for information on connecting auxiliaries NOTE Changing the name of an auxiliary that is referr
269. ic conditions occur within the system As system administrator you define the condition that triggers an alarm or event You also define the scripts that run under the following conditions e When the alarm is triggered e When an operator replays the alarm or event e When the alarm or event is acknowledged Categories Alarms and events are organized into categories that have certain settings in common including the following e he operators notified e The sound they make e Whether they require acknowledgement e Whether they are archived These settings apply to all the alarms or events in the category without exception Predefined categories For convenience the VMX300 E server has three predefined categories e Alarms e Events e Normal Alarms are intended for exceptional occurrences By default alarms require acknowledgement and appear in the Session Manager in red The Events and Normal categories are intended for routine occurrences By default these categories appear in the Session Manager in blue and do not require acknowledgement You do not need to use the predefined categories You can create your own categories as needed or adapt the predefined ones by changing the settings The name and type of predefined categories cannot be changed but all other options can Property Alarms and events have one Boolean property that you can use in scripts and expressions Value Value is false when the alarm event s expressio
270. ice based on the order the canvases are listed in the Object Browser Refer to Re Order a Window s Canvases for more information Q TIP To provide maximum flexibility for a client add as many canvases as you can one for each analog video card in the client and one for each video encoder configured on the server ADD A NEW CANVAS GENERAL To add a new canvas to a custom window 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Clients gt client name gt Windows gt window name gt Canvases Double click lt Add New Canvas gt in the right pane or right click Canvases in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Canvas dialog box opens x Select Canvas Settings aaa Cancel Figure 22 Add New Canvas Dialog Box 2 Select the canvas you want to add from the drop down list 3 Settings f the Settings button is available click Settings to configure the canvas settings Some canvases do not have settings If there are no settings go to step 6 4 General tab For Video for Windows and Quad Video Display canvases the settings available on the General tab assign hardware to the canvas and are hardware dependent Instructions for configuring Video for Windows and Quad Video Display settings follow a Card number Use the default card number setting C1553M B 4 05 37 b Video input number Quad Video Display cards only Select the video input number for the canvas you are c
271. ices in the path or paths that affect the lowest priority users If you want the server to automatically use the optimal path from the list click Have the system automatically use the optimal path If you want the server to present the list to the user to select from click Allow the user to select a path When presented to the user the list is sorted with the minimal path at the top of the list Server to Server In a situation in which three or more servers have three way server ties it is possible for two of the servers to monopolize the other server s ties Clearing Forward remote server routing information prevents other servers from monopolizing your servers available paths To allow other servers to route signals through your server select Forward remote server routing information Refer to Prevent Other Servers from Monopolizing Your Ties in the Server Ties section for more information on the types of situation in which other servers might be able to monopolize your ties C1553M B 4 05 ARCHIVING TAB Project Properties x Network Switching Archiving Date Time E mail Archive Servers demoxp 192 168 1 136 32003 Discover i Cancel Figure 171 Archiving Tab The Archiving tab allows you to define archive servers for recording alarms and events Note that archive servers are available only with VMX300 E systems Only alarms and events that belong to an alarm event category that has archiving tur
272. ick Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each serial output device Unknown state If the Serial Output Driver cannot open the port on the serial output device the device icon is the color specified here Normal state As long as the Serial Output Driver has not failed to open the port on the serial output device the icon is the color specified here Alarm state This function is reserved for future use CONFIGURE THE COMMUNICATIONS TAB 1 Connection Type Specify the type of connection between the device driver and the serial output device e DIRECT SERIAL The device is connected using an RS 232 to RS 422 converter or using an RS 422 PC serial port e INTERNET PROTOCOL The device is connected to the serial port on a networked device 2 Settings Complete the instructions provided below for the appropriate connection type specified in Step 1 The settings must match the settings specified within the serial output device Refer to the serial output device documentation for information on configuring the device s internal settings Direct Serial Settings Add New Serial Output Device General Properties Communications Custom Buttons Connection Type Direct Serial C Internet Protocol Modem Settings COM Port COM 1 Baud 9600 X Parity Mone v Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 v Flow
273. igger an alarm or event Example You might define the alarm event expression as follows Keyboard1 HoldKey 1 Then you can define an On Event script that runs when the expression becomes true C1553M B 4 05 187 188 CM9760 ALM PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists M9760 ALM alarm unit properties that can be used in scripts and expressions Table AE CM9760 ALM Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Read Status CommLoss The device driver cannot communicate with the device eum The device is in its normal state a The communications status between the device driver and the device cannot be determined True The alarm unit is currently in an alarm state False The alarm unit is not in an alarm state Point The relay output numbered is True The relay output numbered is False Note that iii equals the alarm input number which can range from 001 to the maximum number available on the alarm units the maximum number for one relay unit is 64 with two daisy chained alarm units the maximum number is 128 and so on to a maximum of 256 Write Alarm True Set Alarm to True to indicate the CM9760 ALM is in an alarm state CM9760 ALM icons flash in the alarm colors when Alarm is set to True False Set Alarm to False to indicate the CM9760 ALM is not in an alarm state Sample VMX300 E Alarm Expression To take advantage of the alarm
274. iguration window the Object Browser window and some dialog boxes You cannot resize a window when it is maximized that is when it fills the entire screen If you want to resize a window that is maximized first reduce it by clicking the Restore Down button in the right corner of the title bar or double click the title bar In order to resize the Object Browser you must undock it first Resize windows as follows e Change the width Point to the left or right window border When the pointer changes into a horizontal double headed arrow drag the border to the right or left e Change the height Point to the top or bottom window border When the pointer changes into a vertical double headed arrow drag the border up or down e Change the width and height simultaneously Point to a corner of the window border When the pointer changes into a diagonal double headed arrow drag the border in any direction NOTE If the pointer does not change when it s positioned over a window border then that window cannot be resized REPOSITION WINDOWS You can reposition the Configuration window when it is restored down the Object Browser when it is undocked or any dialog box as follows 1 Position the pointer over the windowss title bar 2 Click the left mouse button and hold it down 3 Dragthe window to the desired location 4 Release the mouse button POP UP MENUS 254 In many contexts right clicking an item opens a pop up menu of acti
275. igure Ie Propenmles TaD iaa curn exa uat Rc poe LPS REIR kE OnT ERI a dS rdzaweiecsekitirekhrisudei elegi 55 CONGUE the Encoding TA usce as esee careacn erdiari einen Oi antete EE ao ce Ae He ew S Coie eb RU eee bee ea tuus Fi How to Choose the Video Stream Settings for Your Configuration iisiiissssssssesss RR 59 Configure the Encoding Decoding Tab PelcoNet 4001A only issssssssssssss RR 60 L ontigur the COMMUNICATIONS TAD uae eos cde Ease Rer re es hed oaawase Seb RrEEe EU reb iisteUR iE DURER ded 62 Configure the NVA300 Recording Tab iuuenis cepe rer RR pe RRRER RERERE RI HERR Gautepeew ERR ER rep dates 63 Adadan Extemal Montor DEVIDO a9 x accru re UE RESI EP Side scdladededbes odddes deta cides S52 be EPddqe db e dp tur didus 65 Configure the General Tab one aas 65 Lontigureae Properes TaD isa cuu exa tnit soe obe oleae coat ERI EEEE EE EERE EEE EE dM Ead PE RES dd 65 PGI GOOG TET m 66 Preparing Lo Gontigure the DXOUDU DE seas cedes dta bere p D EXe En DET soddieccideeeosduer ste bla eedduregetues oles 66 Add a DX8000 DVR to the Server Configuration lsssssssssessssss RR 66 Lontigure the General TaD o 2n22ccececedatuac dente oocdneewebeetenths idbudDwemrssepiebmrekiresebispste iP vUde de 67 CONMOUPE THE Properties TAD sc corr eet cer scr reet FE TRE RE DER ETUDES side S Gade epee Ds pee Selec eee taces 67 COMMGUFE ihe Communications TAD 55s usui reddes ES DE Rr bi Radisbr sce EEr TENE Eerie
276. ily To have the scheduled action execute certain days of the week click Daily Click Which Days to specify which days of the week you want the action to execute The Daily Schedule dialog box opens Daily Schedule Select the days that the scheduled action will occur Iv Monday Saturday Tuesday Sunday v Wednesday Thursday v Friday zi Clear weekday weekend cresi Figure 238 Daily Schedule Dialog Box Select days individually or use the buttons to select and deselect multiple days at once All selects all seven days of the week Clear clears all seven days of the week Weekday selects Monday through Friday only Weekend selects Saturday and Sunday only Once you have selected the days click OK to close the Daily Schedule dialog box In the Start At area specify the time of day for the action to execute To set the time select the hour minutes or seconds and click the up and down arrows Sunrise or sunset To have the scheduled action execute once a day at sunrise or sunset click Sun Rise Set Click Setup to specify geographic location and other information the server needs to calculate when to execute the action The Sunrise Sunset Setup dialog box opens Sunrise Sunset Setup Time Plus Minus Dont IN Latitude Longitude Morth C South East C West Decimal Decimal 49 87028 120 0539 Deg Min Sec Deg Min Sec 49 s2 13 120 3 14 med Figure 239 Su
277. image files in a directory called captures then enter captures in the Directory box Connection type Select the FTP connection type from the drop down list Typically FTP connections are passive 3 Firewall tab Configure the settings on the Firewall tab if the FIP server is behind one of the following types of firewall e Socks 4 e Socks 5 e Proxy USER command e Proxy SITE command e Proxy OPEN command e Simple Pipe x General Firewall Type of Firewall PT None Firewall Hast Information Host name or IP address Port Username Password Figure 272 New FTP Site Properties Firewall Tab a Type of firewall Select the type of firewall from the drop down list b Firewall host information The Firewall Host Information area is used to enter information about the firewall the FTP server is behind If you are missing any of the information in the Firewall Host Information area contact the system administrator of the FTP Server 1 2 3 4 Address n the Host name or IP address box type the address of the firewall host You can type the firewall hosts Web address such as www fwallhost com or IP address Port Type the firewall host s listening port User name If the firewall host requires a user name type the user name in the User Name box If no user name is defined on the firewall host then leave the User Name box empty Password f the firewall host
278. in the Miscellaneous section of the Communications tab Miscellaneous Camera Address EE Poll Interval sec a Connection Attempts B f Attempt Interval sec b Comm Timeout msec 1000 Idle Disconnect sec p Expect echo Figure 45 Miscellaneous Section of Communications Tab Camera Address Enter the camera address The address must match the address specified by the camera DIP switch settings Poll Interval sec Applies to the Spectra III D Protocol only The poll interval specifies how often the device driver attempts to query the camera for feedback on its position This determines how often the positions of device icons in the client are updated Feedback queries are suspended when the camera is being controlled The optimal value of 1 is recommended Idle Disconnect sec Optional Enter the number of seconds of inactivity you want to elapse before VMX300 E closes the COM port direct serial connection or the local port IP connection The port will open again automatically when a new command is sent to the camera Use the default value of 0 to indicate that the port should never be closed while the driver is running Note that the following fields should not be changed Connection Attempts This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 3 Attempt Interval sec This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 5 Comm Timeout
279. ing the server configuration before attempting to run the script DELETE A GLOBAL SCRIPT Deleting a global script is irreversible If you delete a global script and then change your mind you must add a new global script Also note that if you delete a global script any local script that runs the global script will contain an error 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Global Scripts In the right pane right click the global script you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the global script click Yes The selected global script is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted global script disappears from the Object Browser 204 C1553M B 4 05 Global Tags A global tag is a Boolean variable that can be used in any script or expression including both local scripts such as those defined in hotlinks labels schedules and alarms and events as well as global scripts Global tags are used in the same way other Boolean variables are They can be assigned a value using the SET statement and compared to a value in an IF statement Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information Q TIP Use global tags to implement script return values For example if you have a prompt with three buttons set global tags to reflect which button the operator clicked to pass back to the script that called the prompt ADD A NEW GLOBAL TAG 1 Na
280. ing you with valid options for each part of the expression as needed To use the expression wizard complete the following steps 1 Click the wizard button This button is located next to the Expression field in either the Add New Timer dialog box or the Add New Alarm or Event dialog box and it is also available from the Expression Editor dialog box Press Ctrl Space for object list Figure 217 Opening the Expression Wizard from the Expression Editor Dialog Box The Expression Wizard appears Expression Wizard Define the conditions s that make up the expression Conditions Current Expression Door Timer Value True Left Operand C Use numeric value 1 Use property Right Operand C Use numeric value 1 Use property True False Main Entry Alarm Value Main Entry Alarm amp cknow PTZ 1 CommLoss Value PTZ 1 CommLoss Ackno tag alarm Value tag_alarm Acknowledged Back Door Opened Value v is equal ta is not equal to Delay Timerl Value tag Value C Add another condition that must also be true Add another condition that could alternatively be true The expression is complete Cancel Figure 218 Expression Wizard 2 Select the left operand operator and right operand of the condition you are defining The expression appears in the Current Expression box 3 Optional If you want to add another condition connected by the AND o
281. ion Wizard This wizard steps you through the creation of an expression Refer to The Expression Wizard for more information script Wizard This wizard steps you through the creation of a statement Refer to The Script Wizard for more information oyntax Error Checking Hover help containing error messages and information on command syntax is available as you enter each line of a script When you save the server configuration syntax errors are identified and tools are provided to edit the objects containing errors Refer to Syntax Error Checking for more information When you edit a script you must make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration Q TIP Use global tags to implement script return values For example if you have a prompt with three buttons set global tags to reflect which button the operator clicked to pass back to the script that called the prompt Refer to Global Tags for more information C1553M B 4 05 VARIABLES AND VALUES ocripts and expressions are made up of variables and values which are defined as follows Variables Object properties act as variables They are written as follows object tag name property name where object tag name is an object s script tag and property name is a property of that particular type of object For example the following are all valid variables Door Alarm Value DVR2 CommStatus Alarm_Timer NO Values Property values act as values that vari
282. ipt that refers to the hotlink will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the hotlink s new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information To change the properties of an existing hotlink 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Maps map Hotlinks In the right pane of the Object Browser double click the hotlink you want to edit or right click the hotlink and select Edit from the pop up menu Alternatively load the map the hotlink is on and either double click the hotlink or right click the hotlink and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Hotlink Properties dialog box opens Edit Hotlink Properties ink to Physical Plant Script Tag Link to Physical Plant Mouse Hover Preview Single Line Single Line Color B Color an Script Execute script on Single Click Double Click LOAD Physical Plant Figure 204 Edit Hotlink Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the hotlink as desired Refer to Add a New Hotlink for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Hotlink Properties dialog box closes NOTE When you edit a hotlink s script make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration before attempting to run the script MODIFY A HOTLINK S SHAPE AND SIZE You can modify the area defined by an existing hotlink by changing the number and location of its vertices Specifically you ca
283. ish adding the new category create the recipient group then edit the category to assign the recipient group Refer to Recipient Groups for information on creating recipient groups To send notification simultaneously to every operator configured on that server who is logged in select the predefined recipient group All Users Select none if you do not want anyone to be notified Send action to first f you want notification sent to the member at the top of the recipient groups Members list select Send action to first available user group When an alarm or event in this category is triggered the server will scan down the list until it finds a member who is logged in and send notification to that member If the recipient is a user group notification is sent to all members of the group who are logged in If no response If you want the server to notify one recipient after another until someone responds to the alarm or event select If no response in _ seconds move to next available user group and type the number of seconds you want to elapse before notifying the next recipient A recipient responds to the alarm or event either by acknowledging it if it requires acknowledgment or by responding to a prompt that the script displays using the PROMPT command If you define a prompt for the response the prompt displays on the first recipients workstation for the specified duration then is removed from the first recipient s workstation and display
284. it Access Control Properties l General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Icon Animation Device in unknown state Choose o Device in normal state Choose Device in alarm state Color 1 Choose B Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose i Cancel Figure 136 Properties Tab for an Access Control Device Figure 137 Access Control Device Icon Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of the devices icon viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each access control device Unknown state When the device driver cannot open the port the icon is the color specified here Normal state When the device driver is communicating normally with the device and the devices read properties all equal False the icon is the color specified here Alarm state When one or more of the devices read properties equal True the icon flashes alternately between Color 1 and Color 2 Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload To reduce the overall workload set Color 1 and Color 2 to the same color 112 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE COMMUNICATIONS TAB 1 Connection Type Specify the type of connection between the device driver and the access control device e Direct Serial The device is connected using an RS 232
285. itcher Figure 87 General Tab for an ASCII Switcher 1 Enter a location name and an optional description The location name is used to identify the device The location name can be a maximum of 50 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Location names are not case sensitive 2 Optional To synchronize the switcher s internal clock to the clock in the workstation the Pelco ASCII device driver is installed on click the Enable network time synchronization every 5 minutes box CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Figure 88 Properties Tab for an ASCII Switcher Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of ASCII switcher icons viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each switcher Unknown state When the switchers CommStatus property equals Offline device icons in the client are the color specified here Normal state When the switchers CommStatus property equals Online device icons in the client are the color specified here Alarm state When the switchers Alarm write property equals True the icon flashes alternately between Color 1 and Color 2 Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload To reduce the overall workload set Color 1 and Color 2 to the same color C1553M B
286. ith each other by instructing Cameleon not to forward the remote server s routing information For example server B can prevent servers A and C from sharing video over paths AB1 BC1 and AB2 BC2 This reserves the paths between servers B and A for video sharing between servers B and A and reserves the paths between servers B and C for video sharing between servers B and C To prevent other servers from using your ties to share signals with each other click the Forward remote server routing information field on the Project Properties Switching tab Refer to Project Properties for instructions CONFIGURE A SERVER TIE Assuming the set up shown in Figure 260 in which you want to share signals from Server A with Server B configure the servers as follows 1 Server A a Log in Log in to configuration mode on Server A b Add server tie Create a server tie to Server B Refer to Add a New Server Tie for instructions 240 C1553M B 4 05 C Create connection If you are sharing analog signals create a connection from the signal source s output to the server tie Refer to Connections for instructions Analog Video Connections l B x File Edit Tools a e tala Destination Device Description SourceDevice Description Destination _ Description Cami Output Switcher 4 Input00000i Switcher A Inputoodod2 Switcher A Outputooo1 LocalServer Server Tie from A to B Switcher A Inputooo003 Switch
287. ke a copy of the existing group and then edit the copy Refer to Pop Up Menus in the Appendix for information on using Copy and Paste or Paste Many to make copies of objects To create a new user group from scratch 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name User Groups Double click Add New User Group in the right pane or right click User Groups in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Group dialog box opens Add New Group E m Group Information r Group Permissions J Corway Facility C Administrative C Client Workspaces C Window Content Maps C Client Global Scripts C Devices Figure 187 Add New Group Dialog Box 2 Name lype in a unique descriptive name for the group you want to add User group names are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks User group names are not case sensitive 3 Permissions Select the permissions you want members of the new group to have If necessary click any plus signs to expand the list To select all the permissions in a category select the head category Selecting project name at the top of the Group Permissions list selects all the permissions in the list 4 Click OK The Add New Group dialog box closes and the new group is created The name of the new group appears in the right pane of the
288. ke it active ake a screen capture of the active window by holding the Alt key down and pressing Print Screen In any software package that allows you to save bitmaps such as the Paint program available through Windows Accessories open a new file and press Ctrl V to paste the screen capture save the file as one of the supported bitmap formats bmp or jpg If desired open the new file in a graphics package and crop the map C1553M B 4 05 ADD A NEW MAP 1 C1553M B 4 05 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Maps Double click Add New Map in the right pane or right click Maps in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Map dialog box opens x Map Information Name Script Tag New Map Filename Path C Program Files CS_ProgramFiles Siter Browse Apply grd Grid size pixels Client Map Loading Load map at actual scale centered on viewport Load map to fit in viewport Load map to a named view Yo named views j caresi Figure 192 Add New Map Dialog Box Name lype a unique descriptive name for the map you want to add Map names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Map names are not case sensitive A tag resembling the map name appears in the Script Tag box If the map name contains special c
289. lation Quick Start Guide and the VMX300 E Installation Manual C1553M B 4 05 17 Configuring a New System When configuring a new VMX300 E system it is recommended that you start with a minimal configuration that allows you to test core system functionality such as viewing video and controlling devices Once this is working build on the minimal configuration by adding users and user groups workspaces maps archive servers automation and whatever other customization you want SET UP THE MINIMAL CONFIGURATION This section outlines how to configure a single server with a minimal configuration If your system has more than one server repeat these steps for each server Each server must have its own base license Perform the following steps in the given order 1 A B 4 Q Log on and configure network settings Start server Run the server from the Windows Start menu or double click the VMX300 E icon on the Windows desktop if there is one Enter base license When asked whether you want to enter a base license click Yes Follow the instructions in License Manager Create database When prompted to create or restore the server database click Create Log in to configuration mode Use the predefined administrator account user name administrator password 2899100 to log in to configuration mode Refer to Starting and Stopping the Server Launch the Server for instructions Add clients Add each computer that will log in
290. ld the VMX300 E video window will not display those types of signals A VMX300 E video window can display the following types of signals e MPEG PelcoNet encoders and encoder decoders support this signal type For information on configuring PelcoNet 4001A encoder decoders for this signal type refer to Devices For PelcoNet 3xx encoders the MPEG 4 signal type corresponds to Stream 1 configured as described in the Devices section e MPEG 2 PelcoNet 4001A encoder decoders support this signal type Refer to Devices for information on configuring the encoder for MPEG 2 streaming e Internal Storage This is the video signal from a PelcoNet devices built in recorder This signal type applies to any PelcoNet NET350 encoder that has integral recording capability selected Refer to Devices for instructions on configuring integral recording capability e MPEG Secondary PelcoNet 3xx encoders support this signal type The MPEG 4 Secondary signal type corresponds to Stream 2 configured as described in the Devices section e NVR300 The video signal from an NVR300 This signal type applies to PelcoNet encoders and encoder decoders that have been configured to have their streams recorded by an NVR300 Refer to Devices for more information C1553M B 4 05 39 40 Change the List of Selected Signal Types To change the list of selected signal types you can do any of the following operations Click the signal type and then click remove th
291. le scaling and rotating to constrain the scaling to 5 unit increments and the rotation to 15 increments MOVE A DEVICE ICON Any device icon placed on a map can later be moved to another position on the same map When you move an icon only its position changes Its size and orientation remain fixed For information on changing an icons size and orientation refer to Scale and Rotate a Device Icon 164 To move a device icon to a different position on the map 1 With the desired map loaded right click the device icon you want to move and select Move from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the icon not the label before right clicking Move the pointer to the icon s new location The icon follows the pointer as you move It If the device s label is displayed it moves with the icon When the icon is located where you want it press the left mouse button The icon freezes in place If the map has a grid the icon snaps to the grid C1553M B 4 05 SCALE AND ROTATE A DEVICE ICON NOTE To minimize the CPU workload device icons should be as small as possible Changing the size and orientation of a device icon does not affect its position For information on changing an icons position refer to Move a Device Icon To change the size or orientation of a device icon 1 With the desired map loaded right click the device icon you want to resize or reorient and select Scale and Rotate from the pop up menu Make s
292. lect the connections you want to remove To select consecutive connections select the first connection press and hold the Shift key down then select the last connection To select non consecutive connections hold the Ctrl key down while selecting b Select Tools Disconnect or click the Disconnect button S or right click one of the selected connections and select Disconnect from the pop up menu The destination devices move to the right pane Remove all connections a Click the left pane to make it active Select Edit gt Select All or press Ctrl A or right click a connection and select Select All from the pop up menu All the connections are selected b Select Tools Disconnect or click the Disconnect button S or right click one of the selected connections and select Disconnect from the pop up menu The destination devices move to the right pane Modify a connection You can change which source device a destination device is connected to by moving the destination device up or down in the left pane a Move up lo move a destination device up in the list of connections select the connection and select Tools gt Move Up or click the Move Up button f Alternatively right click the connection and select Move Up from the pop up menu The destination device moves up to connect to the next available source device above it in the list leaving the source device it was originally connected to unconnected If all the source devices
293. ledgement and Archive events of this category are selected for the alarm event category The Comment required on acknowledgement option is not available when Auto acknowledge in _ seconds is selected for that alarm event category Click OK The Add New Alarm or Event dialog box closes and the new alarm or event is created The name script tag and expression of the new alarm or event appear in the Object Browser NOTE When you edit the script associated with an alarm or event make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration C1553M B 4 05 before attempting to run the script 229 EDIT AN ALARM OR EVENT NOTE f you change the script tag for an alarm or event any script that refers to the alarm or event will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the alarm or event s new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Alarms and Events gt alarm event category name In either pane right click the alarm or event you want to edit and select Edit from the pop up menu Alternatively load a map that has an icon for the alarm or event you want to edit on it and either double click the icon or right click the icon and select Edit from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the icon not the label before clicking The Edit Alarm or Event Properties dialog box opens Edit Alarm o
294. lick SET Cameral Wiper On Figure 207 Edit Label Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the label as desired Refer to Add a New Label for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Label Properties dialog box closes NOTE When you edit a label s script make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration before attempting to run the script MOVE A LABEL NOTE You cannot move a label directly from one map to another You must remove the label from the first map and place it on the other map To move a label to a different location on a particular map 1 With the desired map loaded right click the label you want to move and select Move from the pop up menu 2 Move Drag the label to its new location 3 When the label is located where you want it press the left mouse button If the map has a grid the label will snap to the nearest grid point The label freezes in place 176 C1553M B 4 05 SCALE A LABEL To change the size of a label 1 With the desired map loaded right click the label you want to scale and select Scale from the pop up menu 2 Scale Move the pointer closer to the label to make is smaller Move the pointer away from the label to make it larger 3 When the label is scaled the way you want it press the left mouse button The label s size freezes REMOVE A LABEL FROM A MAP Removing a label from a map does not affect any other instances of the label that have
295. lolx Action View Sx gg ES Eb Computer Management Local la system Tools ili System Tools i Storage gal Event Viewer Ba Services and Applications S System Information A Performance Logs and Alerts Shared Folders a Device Manager Local Users and Groups E Sj Storage Disk Management Disk Defragmenter E Logical Drives cs Removable Storage RS Services and Applications Figure 72 Computer Management Window C1553M B 4 05 71 72 3 Navigate to Local Users and Groups gt Users omputer Management C Action View e Slm B EP Tree Computer Management Local E i System Tools Ij akenn akenn I s amarch Al March C Disk Management lj Disk Defragmenter g Logical Drives amp Removable Storage RS Services and Applications Figure 73 Users Folder 4 Click Action New User The New User dialog box appears Al x User name peso 0000 Full name Sam Opel Description FO Password Confirm password 71 F User must change password at next logon v User cannot change password v Password never expires Account is disabled Figure 74 New User Dialog Box 5 Click the User must change password at next logon field to clear the checkmark 6 Click the User cannot change password and Password never expires fields t
296. lp you write error free scripts VMX300 E provides context sensitive help in the form of pop up lists Select an item in the pop up list and press Enter to enter the item into the current line Use pop up lists as follows e At the beginning of a new line press Ctrl Space Bar to open a pop up list of commands Enc ee conc SET Recipient bject Window 1 Figure 210 Opening a List of Commands e After a command press the space bar once to open a pop up list of items that can occur as an argument Operations 1 Operations 2 Physical Plant RecipientOb ject Figure 211 Opening a List of Arguments e nacommand argument that includes an object property press after the object to open a pop up list of valid properties for that object Bel o oo o ere ce ne SET Entry C anera m Figure 212 Opening a List of Properties NOTE In order for a device s properties to be presented in a context sensitive pop up list the object s properties must be exposed By default device properties are exposed Refer to Edit a Devices Local Settings for information on exposing properties 195 CONTEXT SENSITIVE HELP FOR EXPRESSIONS To help you write error free expressions VMX300 E provides context sensitive help in the form of pop up lists To use pop up lists complete the following steps 1 Click the expression editor button next to the Expression field in either the Add New Timer dialog box or the Add New Alarm or Event
297. lt To prevent a device s properties from being used in scripts and expressions edit the device s local settings and clear Expose properties of this device so that they can be used in scripts and expressions Refer to Edit a Devices Local Settings for more information To view a device s write properties 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Device Drivers device driver name Devices device name Write Properties The list of write properties appears 2 To view the values a specific property can take click the desired property in the left pane or double click the property folder in the right pane The list of values appears in the right pane of the Object Browser Object Browser x Corway Facility E Alarms and Events Clients Connections Device Drivers External Monitor Driver 192 168 1 144 2003 El Fixed Camera Driver 192 168 1 144 2002 Devices West Wing Camera Fixed Camera 1 Read Properties Write Properties Alarm FTP Sites Global Scripts Global Tags Labels Logs Maps Prompts Recipient Groups Schedules Server Ties Timers User Groups Users Figure 197 Viewing Properties Values To view a device s read properties 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Device Drivers gt device driver name gt Devices gt device name gt Read Properties The list of rea
298. m Event Action The Edit Alarm Event Action dialog box opens Edit Alarm Event Action xj On Event 1 Actions On Operator Replay 0 Actions On Acknowledge 0 Actions SET Windowl LiveSource Camera 42 0utput Figure 252 Edit Alarm Event Action Dialog Box You can define an On Event script that runs when the alarm or event is triggered an On Operator Replay script that runs when a recipient replays the alarm or event and or an On Acknowledge script that runs when a recipient acknowledges the alarm or event Type the script actions directly into the Action column or use the script wizard to help you write the script For more information on writing scripts refer to Scripts and Expressions An alarm s scripts run on the client of any operator specified in the alarm event category s recipient group provided the client is running and the operator is logged in when the script executes If the client is not running or the operator is not logged in or if no recipients are specified in the category VMX300 E runs as much of the script as possible namely statements that do not require a recipient such as a statement that sets the value of a device property Comment required f you want a recipient to type in a comment when acknowledging an alarm event click Comment required on acknowledgement The comment will be archived If you are going to require comments for a particular type of alarm or event make sure Requires acknow
299. m or Event for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Label Properties dialog box closes REMOVE AN ALARM EVENT LABEL Removing an alarm event label from one icon removes the label from all icons representing that alarm or event whether the icons are on the same map or different maps If you change your mind after removing an alarm event label you can add it back as described in Add a New Alarm or Event With the desired map loaded right click the alarm event label you want to remove and select Remove from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the label not the icon before right clicking The alarm event label disappears from the map and Display the label for this alarm or event is cleared in the alarm event properties The icon is unaffected C1553M B 4 05 Recipient Groups Recipient groups define which operators are notified of scheduled actions and alarms and events Recipients are notified through the Session Manager In addition if you have associated scripts with the scheduled action or alarm or event the scripts will be run on the recipient s work station To receive notification an operator who is listed as a recipient must be logged in when the scheduled action or alarm or event occurs For information on the Session Manager refer to the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual Refer to Alarms and Events Alarm Event Categories Add a New Alarm Event Category for instructions on selecting
300. m the drop down box b Select the appropriate baud rate and parity settings to match the settings specified in the camera c The remaining settings should specify 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no flow control d Referto Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section Internet Protocol Settings Edit Camera Properties E General Properties Communications Camera Model Auxiliaries Connection Type C Direct Serial Internet Protocol C Modem Settings Local IP 101041089 v Local Port bp oz Protocol PelcoNet Remote Remote Port koo 2 Miscellaneous Camera Address Poll Interval sec Connection Attempts B Attempt Interval sec 3 Comm Timeout msec 1000 Idle Disconnect sec p p Expect echo owes Figure 44 Communications Tab for PTZ Internet Settings a Local IP The local IP is the IP address of the computer that the Pelco PTZ device driver runs on Select the local IP from the drop down box C1553M B 4 05 51 b Local Port The local port is the port the Pelco PTZ device driver uses to transmit commands If your system is secured behind a firewall enter one of the ports made available by the firewall Otherwise enter 0 to have the driver randomly assign an available port Tip To find out what port the driver assigned switch or control the device in the VMX300 E client and then use the netstat command at the DOS prompt
301. me Similarly if you autodiscover servers when logging in to the client the servers are listed by project name The Session Manager also refers to servers using the project name 3 Client port Type the listening port the server will use to receive commands from clients The default client port is 32000 4 Driver port Type the listening port the server will use to receive commands from drivers The default driver port is 32001 5 FTP port lype the listening port the server will use to receive FIP commands The default FTP port is 32002 All resource files such as map files and server supplied workspace files are transferred from server to client using FTP CONFIGURE A BACKUP SERVER NOTE Backup servers are available only with VMX300 E systems Backup servers ensure that operations can continue in the event the primary server fails If a backup server is running when the primary server fails the backup server automatically steps in to take the place of the primary server Operators logged in to the primary server experience a brief interruption as they are switched to the backup server Operators have access to the same devices maps and workspaces as they did before the interruption provided backups of the server and driver databases are up to date Q TIP Connect serial controlled devices in such a way that they can be controlled through both the primary server and the backup server This ensures operators can control the devices in the
302. me of any computer visible over the network as computer names are reserved for client accounts Enter the user name on the Communi cations tab when you configure the DX8000 recorder as described in the Configure the Communications Tab section e PASSWORD The password for the device driver account must be the same as the password for the client workstations accounts The password must be 6 11 characters in length The password is case sensitive Enter the password on the Communications tab when you configure the DX8000 driver as described in the Configure the Communications Tab section ADD A DX8000 DVR TO THE SERVER CONFIGURATION Before you can add a device to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions NOTE When starting the DX8000 driver click Start the driver as an executable The option to run the DX8000 driver as a service is reserved for future use C1553M B 4 05 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers Pelco DX8000 Driver Recorders 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New DX8000 dialog box appears You can also configure DX8000 settings after you have added the DVR to the server configuration Right click the DX8000 recorder and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears
303. mera to reach the preset The delay is in seconds A delay of zero seconds is valid Use a zero second delay when no preset is specified C1553M B 4 05 247 248 The camera is locked during the delay An operator who is viewing the camera s gadget or Device Control dialog box when the FTP delay occurs Will see the Lock button change to yellow indicating that the camera is locked by a script For information on the Lock button refer to the appropriate camera Driver Notes in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual File name FIP image files are JPG files The file name should end with jpg If a file of that name already exists on the FTP server the old file Is overwritten when the new one is uploaded In detail VMX300 E executes an FTP statement as follows 1 If the specified custom window is closed open the window Set the window content type to LiveVideo 2 Switch the specified camera to the window If the switch was unsuccessful the FTP command fails 3 Ifthe switch was successful lock the camera and start timing the delay A delay of zero seconds causes the capture to be taken immediately 4 fapresetis specified send the camera to the preset 5 When the delay has elapsed unlock the camera If the camera was sent to a preset check that it is still positioned at the preset The camera might have been moved from the preset by a user or script with higher priority than the FTP script If the camera is not at the preset
304. move lo remove a time server from the list select the server and click Remove 5 Frequency Use the Synchronize every _ minutes box to specify how often you want the VMX300 E server to synchronize its time to a time server 6 Network time server f you want to use the VMX300 E server as a time server for devices and other servers to synchronize to select Allow this server to act as a Network Time Server on port and enter the port number Q TIP In a multi server system VMX300 E only you might want to synchronize one VMX300 E server with an Internet time server then synchronize all the other VMX300 E servers on your network to the first saving them from having to access the Internet to synchronize 138 C1553M B 4 05 E MAIL TAB Server Type o C Microsoft Mail Profile Name p Standard SMTP Host e aa Reply Address Firewall User Name Password Figure 175 E mail Tab The E mail tab allows you to specify an e mail server so that alarm event recipients can be notified of alarms and events by email In order to notify recipients via e mail the following criteria must be met Recipients must have an e mail address configured in their user settings Refer to the Users section for information on configuring user accounts The Notify via E mail option must be selected for each alarm event category for which e mail notification will be used Refer to the Al
305. mple Administrator and ADMINIS TRATOR are equivalent to administrator Passwords are case sensitive For example Password and PASSWORD are not equivalent to password Click OK The Configuration window opens after several seconds Note that VMX300 synchronizes the device drivers each time you launch the server configuration You can skip this process by clicking Skip in the Synchronizing Drivers dialog box Q TIP For security reasons it is recommended that you change the password for the built in user administrator account the first time you log in 26 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE SERVER WHILE IT IS RUNNING You can log in and out of configuration mode while the server is running This allows you to perform administrative tasks without preventing operators from working in the VMX300 E client When the server is in run mode perform the following steps 1 Double click the VMX300 E icon in the Windows system tray or right click the icon and select Configure from the pop up menu The server Login dialog box opens MX300 Enterprise Server Login x User Information User Name administrator Password TN Figure 10 Server Login Dialog Box User name Type your user name User names are not case sensitive For example Bob and BOB are equivalent to bob Password Type your password Passwords are case sensitive For example Admin1 and ADMIN1 are not equivalent to admin1 Click OK After several secon
306. mum number available in the camera Renaming the auxiliary renames this property Refer to the Add a Pelco PTZ Device section for Instructions on renaming auxiliaries Off Turn off the camera s Auxiliary feature PELCONET DEVICE PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists PelcoNet device properties that can be used in scripts and expressions Table W PelcoNet Device Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Head otatus The device driver cannot communicate with the device The driver is initializing and has not yet attempted to communicate with the device The device is in its normal state Common At least one of the following is true Alarm e he Digitallnput read property has value On e The Motion read property has value True e he Video read property has value Loss Alarminput True 1 There is digital input into the device False 0 There is no digital input into the device RelayOutput True 1 The devices relay is closed False 0 The device s relay is open Motion The devices built in motion detector detects motion The devices built in motion detector does not detect motion Video There is video on the devices video input There is no video on the device s video input Continued on next page 182 C1553M B 4 05 Table W PelcoNet Device Properties and Values Continued TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Write RelayOutput True 1 Cl
307. n creating multiple entries into the Session Manager this acknowledges every instance e If the alarm or event does not require a comment click the Acknowledge All button on the Session Manager tool bar which acknowledges all alarms and events that do not require a comment When an alarm or event is acknowledged the following occurs e The entry in the Session Manager and the alarm event icon change back to the category s Default Color e If an On Acknowledge script is associated with the alarm or event it runs Once an alarm or event has been acknowledged and its scripts have finished executing the status of the entry in the Session Manger is set to Complete Any entry that does not have status Complete is considered to be active When an alarm or event becomes complete the following occurs e fthealarm or event did not require acknowledgement the entry in the Session Manager and the alarm event icon change back to the category s Default Color e The entry for the complete alarm or event is moved from the Active list to the Complete list e he entry for the complete alarm or event is no longer highlighted e The highest active entry in the Session Manager becomes highlighted Which entry this is depends on how the Session Manager is sorted NOTES e There isa limit of 500 unacknowledged alarms and events per server When the limit is exceeded the server automatically acknowledges the oldest alarm or event making it complete I
308. n be run more frequently on weekdays Using a global script also allows an operator to run the script on demand from the client provided the operator has the necessary permissions Make sure you limit permissions to just those users you want to be able to run the global script A schedule runs on the client of any operator specified in the schedule s recipient group provided the operator is logged in when the script executes If no recipients are specified in the schedule VMX300 E runs the script on any running client that has the necessary window In some cases VMX300 E will execute different lines of the script on different clients For example suppose a particular schedule has no recipients The schedules script has two FTP commands FTP Window1 Cam1 NoPreset 0 Corway Web Site image jpg FTP Window2 Cam1 NoPreset 0 Corway Web Site image jpg The only difference between the two commands is the window specified When the first FIP command executes VMX300 E looks for a running client that has Window defined on it Suppose Client is running and has Window defined on it The first FIP command executes on Client When the second FTP command executes VMX300 E looks for a running client that has Window2 defined on it Suppose Client2 is running and has Window defined on it The second FIP command executes on Client2 C1553M B 4 05 Example he following example illustrates an FTP sequence defined in a global script t
309. n click Add The specified number of new buttons will appear in the list of custom buttons 2 loadda string to the custom button complete the instructions provided below in Edit Custom Buttons Edit a Custom Button 1 Double click the button in the Name column The Edit Button dialog box appears Edit Button Button 5 Mouse Down String EE Mouse Up String NEN i Cancel Figure 130 Edit Button Dialog Box 2 Optional Type a new name The name appears on the custom button in the VMX300 E client The name can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Custom button names are not case sensitive 3 Type a Mouse Down string This is the command that is sent to the serial output device when an operator presses the custom button C1553M B 4 05 107 108 Edit Button Properties Name Black Hot mm Mouse Down String bL ACK HOT 013 Mouse Up String NE E Cancel Figure 131 Sample Mouse Down String 4 Optional Type a Mouse Up string This is the command that is sent to the serial output device when an operator releases the custom button Leave this field blank if you do not want a command sent when the button is released 5 Click OK The Edit Button dialog box closes ASCII COMMAND SPECIAL CHARACTERS If a command contains unprintable characters replace each unprintable character with its three digit ASCII code between angl
310. n click OK Note that the Browse function will not locate NVRs running on the same computer as any VMX300 E software server client or device drivers 3 Click Add The Add NVR dialog box closes and the selected NVR s IP address is added to the list The NVR300 is now available in the VMX300 E client as an archive source To view archived PelcoNet video from this NVR you must configure the NVR to record this specific PelcoNet device Refer to step 6 4 Optional Add another NVR To add another NVR300 to the list repeat step 3 If you add more than one NVR300 device to this list and if each NVR has been configured to record video from this specific PelcoNet device they will simultaneously record the PelcoNet streams from this device resulting in duplicate recordings This could create band width issues depending on your system settings 5 Optional Remove an NVR Click the NVR and then click Remove The selected NVR will disappear from the list and the recorded video from that NVR will no longer be available through the VMX300 E client To change the recording status for this PelcoNet device you must change the NVR configuration Refer to step 6 6 Optional Access the NVR configuration application Click Configure to configure the NVR3005 internal settings through the embedded web server Refer to the PelcoNet NVR300 documentation for more information on the NVR s internal settings Device Control http 192 168 1 134
311. n for an overview of the maximum number of streams recommended for specific digital settings C1553M B 4 05 35 ADD A NEW CUSTOM WINDOW NOTE If the same custom window will be viewed by more than one client it must have the same name and script tag for every client To add a new custom window to a particular client 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Clients gt client name gt Windows Double click Add New Window in the right pane or right click Windows in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Window dialog box opens Add New Window Window Information Mame New Window Script Tag New Window amd Figure 20 Add New Window Dialog Box 2 Name lype in a descriptive name for the custom window you want to add A particular client cannot have two windows with the same name However different clients can have windows with the same name Window names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Window names are not case sensitive A tag resembling the window name appears in the Script Tag box If the window name contains special characters they are omitted from the tag Spaces are replaced with underscores Leading digits are removed 3 Script tag f you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type in a tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long Th
312. n in this manual the top of the Object Browser is referred to as project name As well the project name is used as the backup server name in server configuration mode and in the client TIP Use a name that indicates that this is a backup For example if the primary server s project name is Corway Facility name the backup server project Corway Facility Backup Client port Type the listening port the backup server will use to receive commands from clients in the event the primary server fails The default client port is 32000 Driver port lype the listening port the backup server will use to receive commands from drivers in the event the primary server fails The default driver port is 32001 FTP port Type the listening port the backup server will use to receive FIP commands in the event the primary server fails The default FIP port is 32002 All resource files such as map files and server supplied workspace files are transferred from server to client using FTP IP address lype the IP address of the primary server the backup server will be backing up or click Browse to select a server from the drop down list Port Type the listening port configured as the Client Port on the primary server Synchronize now For future development Once you have configured the backup server settings on the Network tab it is recommended that you perform the following steps 1 C1553M B 4 05 Back up server database Copy the server databa
313. n is false and true when the expression Is true HOW ALARMS AND EVENTS WORK WHEN AN ALARM OR EVENT IS TRIGGERED Whenever something happens that could affect the value of an alarm event expression the expression is evaluated If the expression becomes true as a result of what happened the first of the alarm event s scripts runs and recipients are notified Specifically the following events occur e On the workstation of an alarm event recipient the alarm event icon becomes animated the bell hammer strikes the bell and changes color to the alarm event category s Color The animation continues as long as the expression remains true the color changes back to the default when the alarm or event is acknowledged or becomes complete e The alarm or event s On Event script runs e On the workstation of all alarm event recipients an entry recording the alarm or event appears in the Session Manager The entry displays in the alarm event category s Color e If there is no active entry highlighted in the Session Manager of a particular recipient when the alarm or event is triggered the entry for the new alarm or event is automatically highlighted and the On Operator Replay script runs If acknowledgement is required Acknowledge or Acknowledge with Comment becomes available on the Session Manager tool bar and in the alarm icon pop up menu The entry for the new alarm or event will not be highlighted if the recipient already has a highlighted entry in
314. n perform the following functions e Move a vertex e Adda vertex e Delete a vertex Q TIP Move the position of a hotlink on a map by moving each of its vertices in turn 172 C1553M B 4 05 MOVE A VERTEX Q TIP To make a hotlink perfectly rectangular apply a grid to the map then move the vertices to grid points A vertex will snap to the closest grid point If you want turn the grid off after you ve finished To move a hotlink s vertex 1 Load the map the hotlink is on and click the hotlink A small circle appears at each of the hotlink s vertices 2 Position the pointer over the vertex you want to move A four headed arrow appears beside the pointer 3 Click and hold the mouse key down 4 Drag the vertex to its new position 5 Release the mouse button The vertex freezes in place giving the hotlink its new shape ADD A VERTEX To add a vertex to an existing hotlink 1 Load the map the hotlink is on and click the hotlink A small circle appears at each of the hotlink s vertices 2 Click the vertex next to where you want the new vertex created A green square appears at the vertex you clicked and a small blue square appears at the adjacent vertex The new vertex is inserted between these two vertices 3 Right click the vertex with the green square and select Insert vertex from the pop up menu A new vertex is inserted midway between the two vertices marked by squares DELETE A VERTEX To delete a vertex from an exi
315. n settings of the status monitor icon viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each status monitor Unknown state The unknown state occurs between the time the IP Monitor driver is launched and the device is first pinged In this state the status monitors Status property has a value of Unknown and the icon is the color specified here Normal state As long as the IP device responds when pinged the status monitor s Status property has a value of Normal and the icon is the color specified here Alarm state f the device fails to respond when pinged the status monitor s icon flashes alternately between Color 1 and Color 2 Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload To reduce the overall workload set Color 1 and Color 2 to the same color 110 C1553M B 4 05 ADD AN ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE The access control driver can be used to receive ASCII commands from an external serial RS 232 device For example you could receive ASCII strings from a building access control system an external alarm system or an elevator control system Any device controlled by the Access Control driver is referred to in this document as an access control device Use the access control driver to provide a video response from the VMX300 E system to a specified event in the external system Example You ha
316. n the VMX300 E system You can then define an alarm that prompts an operator to ask a technician to troubleshoot the encoder decoder if it remains inaccessible for more than a minute Before you can add a IP device status monitor to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers IP Monitor Driver Devices 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New Device dialog box appears You can also configure settings after you have added the device to the server configuration Right click the device and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New Device dialog box 3 Configure the device settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New Device General Properties Icon Animation Device Name New Device Description OK Cancel Figure 132 General Tab for an IP Device Status Monitor Use the General tab to name and describe the IP device status monitor The status monitor name can be a maximum of 31 characters You cannot use single or double quotation marks in a name but you can use any other letter
317. n the VMX300 E system can be the same for example you cannot use device num ber 1 for both a monitor and a camera To provide system operators with a simple numbering scheme such as one that would allow the operator to observe Camera 1 on Monitor 1 use the KBD300A logical mapping feature The KBD300A logical mapping feature allows an operator to control devices using numbers mapped to a specific keyboard For example if an operator could switch Camera 1 to Monitor 1 Camera 2 to Monitor 2 and so on C1553M B 4 05 89 90 Pelco KBD300 Keyboard Properties i x Edit Local Settings Camera 1 l x Miscellaneous General Communications Logical Mapping Device Count Display the label for this device Edit Label 2 Appl v Enable the device number s Scripting Device Type Keyboard Device Iz Expose properties of this device so that they can be used in scripts and expressions Device Script Tag EastEndCam1 Default Interlock Expression ua a Device Alarm Mapping Map device Alarms to alarms Map device Events to Events Map device Normal to Normal Figure 102 Sample Logical Mapping To use the KBD300A logical mapping feature you must complete the following tasks e Enable a unique device number for each VMX300 E device that you want to map to the keyboard This task is done in the Edit Local Set tings dialog box fo
318. nd Expressions Verification tools to make corrections ocripts and expressions are also verified when you launch the server If there are any errors you do not have the option to launch the server in run mode You are automatically presented with the login dialog box for configuration mode NOTE The server will not save changes to the configuration if there are any errors If you do not correct the errors before exiting all the changes you made to the configuration will be lost except for changes to device drivers and devices C1553M B 4 05 25 LAUNCH THE SERVER My NOTES If this is the first time you have launched the server or if your base license has expired you must enter a base license before proceed ing with the configuration Click Yes when asked whether you want to enter a base license The License Manager will open Follow the instructions in L cense Manager Add a License If the server configuration has more devices or clients than your licensing allows possibly because an upgrade license has expired VMX300 E will warn you and present you with the login dialog box for configuration mode If desired log in to configuration mode and delete devices and clients until you are within the allowable limit or contact Pelco to obtain additional licenses To start the server 1 Run the VMX300 E application from the Windows Start menu or double click the VMX300 E icon on the Windows desktop if there is One If thi
319. ned on are recorded Refer to Alarms and Events Alarm Event Categories Add a New Alarm Event Category for instructions on turning archiving on To record alarms and events an archive server must be running when the alarm or event occurs Refer to Archive Servers Start an Archive Server for instructions on starting an archive server 1 Discover Click Discover to automatically locate all archive servers that are running 2 Add f you know the IP address and port number of a server that was not located automatically click Add to add it manually The Add Archive Server dialog box opens Add Archive Server x IP Address Port l 192 168 1 101 32003 p ames Figure 172 Add Archive Server Dialog Box Type the archive server s IP address and port number and then click OK 3 Select archive servers Alarms and events are recorded on every archive server that is selected on the Archiving tab when the alarm or event occurs provided the archive server is running Use the check box to the left of the archive server name to select the server Clear the check box to the left of any archive server you do not want to archive data To keep a duplicate copy of your archives select two archive servers 4 Remove lo remove an archive server from the list select the server and click Remove C1553M B 4 05 137 DATE TIME TAB Project Properties x Network Switching Archiving Date Time E mail Network Time Serve
320. ng settings should specify 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no flow control d Referto Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section Internet Protocol Settings General Properties Communications uo Connection Type C Direct Serial Internet Protocol C Modem Settings Local IP f 27 0 0 1 v Local Port p Miscellaneous Poll Interval sec f A Connection Attempts B Attempt Interval sec 5 Protocol PelcoNet es Comm Timeout msec f ooo Remote IP 192168153 Idle Disconnect sec p Remote Port f Expect echo omen Figure 90 Communications Tab for Switcher Internet Settings C1553M B 4 05 81 a Local IP The local IP is the IP address of the computer that the Pelco ASCII device driver runs on Select the local IP from the drop down box b Local Port The local port is the port the Pelco ASCII driver uses to transmit commands If your system is secured behind a firewall enter one of the ports made available by the firewall Otherwise enter 0 to have the driver randomly assign an available port Tip To find out what port the driver assigned switch or control the device in the VMX300 E client and then use the netstat command at the DOS prompt to view assigned ports c Remote IP Remote Port Protocol The remote device is the device the Pelco ASCII switcher is physically connected to If the switcher is connected to a Pel
321. nges to a device s properties come into effect immediately You cannot discard your changes by exiting configuration mode without saving To edit the properties of an existing device navigate the Object Browser to project name Device Drivers device driver name In either pane right click the device you want to edit and select Edit from the pop up menu Alternatively load a map that has a device icon for the device you want to edit on it and either double click the icon or right click the icon and select Edit from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the icon not the label before clicking The Edit Device Properties dialog box opens Edit Properties Ops Ctr Monitor x General Properties Location Ops Ctr Monitor Description Monitor 1 Figure 194 Edit Device Properties Dialog Box C1553M B 4 05 EDIT A DEVICES LOCAL SETTINGS A device has certain properties in virtue of being a device of a particular type These properties are inherited from the device driver and configured when you add the device You can also change them after the device has been added as described in Edit a Device s Properties In addition to the inherited properties a device has properties that have to do with how the device is represented within VMX300 E This includes whether the device will be used in scripts and expressions and how the device s alarms will be mapped These properties are set through the devic
322. ngs through VMX300 E complete the following steps 1 Click the Mode field and then select the type of stream you want the encoder to multicast from the drop down box 2 Enter the IP multicast group address 3 Ifthe encoder is configured to multicast one or more MPEG 4 streams enter the IP multicast group MPEG 4 port s in the Stream Port fields 4 Ifthe encoder is configured to multicast one or more MPEG 4 streams enter the IP multicast group audio port C1553M B 4 05 57 If the encoder is connected when you configure the settings in VMX300 E the settings are updated in the encoder immediately Otherwise updating occurs once the encoder is connected To configure multicast settings through the encoder complete the following steps 1 Configure the encoders internal multicast settings refer to the appropriate PelcoNet manual for instructions 2 In VMX300 E click Upload Settings on the Communications tab Refer to the Configure the Communications Tab section Encoder Parameters VMX300 E provides the option to quickly configure the internal MPEG 4 settings of the PelcoNet device for either lower frame rate settings which have been designed to work well with VMX300 E or the factory default settings NOTE f the video stream is being recorded by either an NVR or the PelcoNet integral recording feature these encoder parameter changes Will not take effect Wait until the video stream recording is complete and then click the
323. nput 05 Input 06 Input 07 Input 08 wg 12 Sources Ss 1 Active Connections Figure 161 Connecting Video Directly to DVR my 8 Available Destinations Z If a camera is connected to a recorder that loops video to a switcher define the following connections e from the cameras output to the appropriate input on the recorder e from the recorder s looping input to the appropriate input on the switcher In the following example Camera 1 is physically connected to Input 1 on the switcher and the switcher s Looping Input 1 is physically connected to the DVR s Input 0 Analog Video Connections Ioj x File Edit Tools Sa Stile Source Device Description Destination Description Output Matrix Switcher Inputi Dx8000 DYR Input 3 Output Matrix Switcher Input2 Dx9000 DYR Input 4 Output Matrix Switcher Input3 Dx9000 DYR Input 5 Matrix Switcher Output 1 Dx9000 DYR Input 6 Matrix Switcher Output2 Dx9000 DYR Input 7 Matrix Switcher Output3 Matrix Switcher Input4 Matrix Switcher Output4 Matrix Switcher Input5 Matrix Switcher LoopingInput1 Dx9000 DYR Input 0 Matrix Switcher Input Matrix Switcher LoopingInput2 Dx9000 DYR Input 1 Matrix Switcher Input Matrix Switcher LoopingInput3 Dx9000 DYR Input 2 Matrix Switcher Input Matrix Switcher LoopingInput4 Matrix Switcher LoopingInput5 Matrix Switcher LoopingInput6 Matrix Switcher LoopingInput Matrix Switcher LoopingInputs o 15 Sources 1 Sel
324. nrise Sunset Dialog Box In the Time area click Rise if you want the action to execute at sunrise or Set if you want it to execute at sunset If you want to execute an action at both sunrise and sunset you must create two different schedules In the Plus Minus area type in the number of minutes before or after sunrise sunset that you want the action to execute For example If you want the action to execute a half hour before sunrise select Rise in the Time area and type in 30 in the Plus Minus area In the Latitude area select North or South and type in the latitude of the relevant location For example if the scheduled action is to control a camera every day at dusk use the latitude of the camera not of the server You can either enter the latitude in decimal notation in the Decimal box or in degrees minutes and seconds in the Deg Min and Sec boxes As you type in the latitude the server will automatically convert it to the other notation In the Longitude area select East or West and type in the longitude of the relevant location Like the latitude you can enter longitude either in decimal notation or in degrees seconds and minutes Click OK to close the Sunrise Sunset Setup dialog box Hourly To have the scheduled action execute once an hour click Hourly In the Start At area type in the number of minutes after the hour you want the action to execute Fractional amounts will automatically be rounded By minutes f you want t
325. o change the properties of an existing map 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Maps In either pane right click the map whose properties you want to change and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Map Properties dialog box opens Admin Level 1 Properties r Map Information Admin Level 1 Name Script Tag Admin_Level_1 Filename Administration Level 1 jpg Path c Maps Browse rT Apply grid Grid size 38 x pixels Client Map Loading Load map at actual scale centered on viewport Load map to fit in viewport C Load map to a named view Mo named views Figure 193 Edit Map Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the map as desired Refer to Add a New Map for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Map Properties dialog box closes LOAD A MAP Before you can place objects like devices on a map you must load the map so it displays in the map viewport Only one map can be loaded at a time To load a map 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Maps In either pane click the map you want to load and hold the mouse button down If you move the pointer slightly it changes to a representation of the Earth g 2 Drag the pointer to the map viewport and release the mouse button The selected map appears complete with any objects that were previously placed on the map The map is fitted to the viewport Q TIP You can also
326. o from Channel_01 of the DX8000 with script tag DX8000_1 in the custom window with script tag Window_01 use the following script SET Window_01 ArchivedSource DX8000_1 Channel_01 Note that ii equals the channel number which can range from 01 to the maximum number available on the DVR 8 channels on the DX8008 16 channels on the DX8016 C1553M B 4 05 Table AA DX8000 Camera Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE mwas C IA Read Preset camera s current view is not the result of a preset preset The cameras current view results from going to this user defined preset This value is created when you create the preset Note that f equals the preset number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Pattern NoPattern The camera is not currently running a pattern pattern The camera is currently running this user defined pattern This value is created when you create the pattern Note that 7 equals the pattern number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Write Preset DontCare When a SET statement with a FOR clause causes a camera to go to a preset the camera is locked in the preset view for the duration specified in the FOR clause The lock is automatically released once the specified duration has elapsed Setting the Preset write property to DontCare releases the lock prior to the specified time allowing
327. o select these options 7 Inthe User name box type the Windows user name of the user you want add 8 Optional Type the users full name and a description if desired 9 In the Password and Confirm password fields type the Windows password of the user you want to add 10 Click Create and then click Close The New User dialog box closes Wf administrator Built in account For administerir Event Viewer System Information GGavadmin Avadmin Avadmin amp Performance Logs and Alerts Ij avuser Avuser Avuser Shared Folders bcain B Cain Device Manager Midday dday Local Users and Groups Ij adavis D Davis Mf Guest Built in account For guest L Groups Ij soLAgentCm 4 SQLAgentCmdExec SQL Server Agent CmdExec S ET 3torage svben svben 11 In the Computer Management window navigate to Local Users and Groups Groups and then click the Avusers group in the right pane C1553M B 4 05 oOo omputer Management Action view m X ES Eg Tree L5 Administrators Administrators have complete and u c6 Backup Operators Backup Operators can override secu 5 Guests Guests have the same access as me 5 Power Users Power Users possess most administr 5 Replicator Supports file replication in a domain Users are prevented From making ac Computer Management Local i i System Tools fm Event Viewer System Information amp Performance Log
328. o shut it down through the Windows Control Panel Administrative Tools 32 C1553M B 4 05 Clients Custom Windows and Canvases VMX300 E provides tools to define custom windows that are viewable through the client Custom windows are used for the following functions e Viewing live and archived video e Displaying maps e Displaying an Internet browser e Connecting to a remote computer In order for an operator to be able to connect to a server and use a custom window in the client you must do the following e Add the operators workstation to the server configuration as described in Add a New Client e Create a custom window for the new client as described in Add a New Custom Window e fthe operator is going to view video in the window add one or more canvases to the window as described in Add a New Canvas General and for analog canvases specify the connections between devices Canvases are only required if the window will be used to view video Canvases define the video display technology available to that client and can include both analog and digital IP based technologies Refer to Canvases for more information Connections map out how video equipment is physically connected Refer to Connections for more information Q TIP If you are configuring a newly installed server and find you have many clients to create with a similar configuration you can do it very quickly as follows Add one client with the desired windows and can
329. of a label Labels are always oriented horizontally PLACE A LABEL ON A MAP C1553M B 4 05 Load the map you want to place the label on The map appears in the map viewport Navigate the Object Browser to project name Labels In the right pane click the label you want to place on the map and hold the mouse button down If you move the pointer slightly it changes to cross hairs Place Drag the pointer to the map position it where you want to place the label and release the mouse button The label appears on the map and the pointer changes back to a pointer 175 EDIT A LABEL B NOTES e A label s properties apply to all instances of the label When you edit one instance of a label it changes all other instances of the label e fyou change the script tag for a label any script that refers to the label will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the label s new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information To change the properties of an existing label 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Labels In the right pane double click the label you want to edit or right click the label and select Edit from the pop up menu Alternatively load the map the label is on right click the label and select Edit Label from the pop up menu The Edit Label Properties dialog box opens Script Tag Cameral Wipe On Details Execute script on Single Click Double C
330. of the networked device in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box enter the port on the networked device that serial output device is connected to 106 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE CUSTOM BUTTONS TAB Edit Properties Serial Output Device f General Properties Communications Custom Buttons Number of Buttons 4 Name Mouse Down String Mouse Up String Focus In c1 013 7 lt 01 3 Focus Out 2 lt 013 0 013 Black Hot BLACK HOT lt 01 3 White Hot VWWHITE HOT 013 2 ft Buttons add Dete ox _ cance Figure 129 Custom Buttons Tab for Serial Output Device Each custom button that you define for a serial output device appears in the device s Device Control dialog box in the VMX300 E client The operator can then click the button to send the command s associated with the button to the serial output device Each custom button can have up to two strings associated with it The mouse down string defines the command that is sent when the custom button is pressed The mouse up string defines the command that is sent when the custom button is released Add a Custom Button 1 To add a new custom button click Add The button appears in the list of custom buttons in the Name column with a generic name and with no strings listed in the Mouse Down and Mouse Up columns To add more than one custom button at once enter the number of buttons you want to add in the Button s box and the
331. og box Object Browser xi E Device Driver a Location Description Access Control Driver 192 168 1 114 20 ta lt Up gt Devices Access Control System Ei Read Properties Point 1 H Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Write Properties Point_1 Point 2 Point 3 Point 4 Point 5 Point 6 Point 7 Point 8 Add New Device i Access Control System Ll Card Access System Figure 142 Access Control Device Read and Write Properties 2 To customize the number name or script tag of a specific point double click the point to open the Edit Point dialog box Refer to Edit an Access Control Point for instructions C1553M B 4 05 Edit an Access Control Point Edit each access control point so that the point s number is the same as the point number sent out in the string for that type of alarm You can also change a point s name and script tag or use the generic name and tag assigned by VMX300 E 1 Double click the desired access control point The Edit Point dialog box opens ES eue Edit Access Control Properties i General Properties Communications ace ss Control Points Pattern Matching Number of amp ccess Control Points 8 ScriptTag Edit Point Point Properties Number ko a Name Point 1 Script Tag Point 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 ri 8 Figure 143 Edit Point Dialog Box 2 Ty
332. ogout rdarcy similarly if a particular user will access the DVR from more than one computer you will have to configure the user on each computer For example suppose user mcole will access the DVR from two different computers You will need to complete the following process to configure the computer for each user e log mcole in to one of the computers e Configure e logout mcole e log mcole in to the other computer e Configure e logout mcole To configure a computer to allow a user to access or manage a DX9000 DVR complete the following steps 1 Have the user who will be accessing the DVR log in to Windows using his regular Windows user name and password 2 Navigate to c Program Files DX 9000 APNTools 3 Run AVClientConfig exe The DX9000 Client Configuration Utility login dialog box appears X Login User name admin Password eem Login Cancel Figure 79 DX9000 Login Dialog Box 4 Enter the user name admin and password admin and then click Login The DX9000 Client Configuration Utility dialog box appears DX 9000 Client Configuration Utility Site map creation C Import from server Configure time zone Export to server v Configure m C Standard naming NEED Numbered fo to fo Custom naming Add Close mE Remove a tu a o o e tv 2 T lt e x Administrative station Fi
333. ol Panel Administrative Tools For archives to be created or retrieved from an archive server the archive server must be running To start an archive server 1 Runthe archive server application from the Windows Start menu or double click the archive server icon on the Windows desktop if there is one The Configure Archive Server dialog box opens Configure Archive Server X Select the port to use for incoming connections Run as an Executable Install as a Service C Remove Service Options ae Cancel Figure 164 Configure Archive Server Dialog Box 2 Ifthe archive server is currently installed to run as a service and you want to run it as an executable click Remove Service then click OK Repeat step 1 to re open the Configure Archive Server dialog box 3 Port Enter the port you want used by servers connecting to the archive server or select the port from the drop down list 4 Mode a Executable Jo run the archive server as an executable click Run as an executable b Service To run the archive server as a service click Install as a service 5 Options Click Options to select the type of database you want to use for storing the archives The Options dialog box appears C1553M B 4 05 3i Microsoft Access Choose the folder to store the daily event databases Se Y eC iX Countersoft XCS Compiled XCS ArchiveServer Server User Name Password T
334. ollowing fields should not be changed Connection Attempts This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 3 Attempt Interval sec This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 5 Comm Timeout msec This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 1000 Expect echo This field is reserved for future development 96 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE ALM POINTS TAB The ALM Points tab lists each alarm point in the device and the name and script tag used within VMX300 E to refer to the point The device Add New Device General Properties Communications Am Points Model Diet 140 Number Name Scripta 0 A Point 001 Point O01 Point 002 Point 002 Point 003 Point 003 Point 004 Point 004 Point 005 Point O05 Point 006 Point O06 Point 007 Point 007 Point 008 Point 008 Point 009 Point 008 Point 010 Point 010 Point 011 Point 011 Point 012 Point 012 Point 013 Point 013 Point 014 Point 014 Point 015 Point 015 Die NAC xi i Cancel Figure 113 ALM Points Tab for CM9760 ALM address entered on the Communications tab determines how the points are numbered If the device address is set to 1 the points are numbered 1 64 If the address is set to 2 the points are numbered 65 128 and so on The ALM Points tab allows you to rename points to give them meaningful names Rename an Alarm Point
335. ollowing operating system settings instructions for the first three tasks are provided in the subsequent sections If you are using a DX8000 Series DVR refer to the DX8000 Installation manual for instructions on disabling the IPSec security services e Assign the VMX300 E IP address to the workstation e identify the VMX300 E workstation on the network e If you are not using a DX9000 Series DVR disable the NetBIOS service in the Windows operating system e f you are using a DX8000 Series DVR disable the IPSec security services in all DX8000 Series DVR units including any remote DX8000 Client units A NOTE ON WINDOWS XPSP2 SETTINGS The VMX300 E workstation is configured with Windows XP and the XP Service Pack 2 XPSP2 Note however that the XPSP2 firewall protection and automatic update features are turned off by default in the VMX300 E workstation To enable these features for your VMX300 E system refer to the Windows XP Service Pack 2 instructions available on the Microsoft web site www microsoft com ASSIGN AN IP ADDRESS TO THE VMX300 E WORKSTATION A N CAUTION Each device driver and device added to the VMX300 E system is identified with the VMX300 E server IP address Therefore it is essential to assign the VMX300 E IP address before continuing with the VMX300 E configuration 1 Click Start Settings Network Connections The Network Connections window appears 2 Right click Local Area Connection an
336. olor 1 Choose E Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose H i Cancel Figure 66 Properties Tab for DX8000 DVR C1553M B 4 05 67 68 Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of DX8000 icons viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each recorder Unknown state When the recorders CommStatus property equals Offline device icons in the client are the color specified here Normal state When the recorders CommStatus property equals Online device icons in the client are the color specified here Alarm state When the recorder s Alarm write property equals True the icon changes to the color specified here If you change either Color 1 or Color 2 then the icon flashes alternately between the two colors when the recorder is in the alarm state Note however that flashing icons can increase the CPU workload CONFIGURE THE COMMUNICATIONS TAB Add New DX8000 General Properties Communications Model IP Address 1492 168 1 111 Base Port 9002 UserName Po Password EE Cance Figure 67 Communications Tab for DX8000 DVR 1 IP Address Type the recorder s IP address 2 Base Port Type the recorders listening port 3 UserName Type the user name that the device driver will use to access the recorder This must be the same as the user name defined
337. om the list and then click Add 15 Click OK The Select Users or Groups dialog box closes and the new user appears in the Avusers group Avusers Properties 2 xj General L Avusers Description nm cz NN Members 5 1 5 21 1957334488 448539723 725345543 515 s Administrator E s akenn I s amarch Avadmin Cancel Apply Figure 78 New User Added to Avusers Group N WARNING Do not proceed with configuring the users computer if the user does not appear in the Avusers group 16 Click OK The Avusers Properties dialog box closes 17 Click the X in the upper right corner of the Computer Management window to close it C1553M B 4 05 Configuring Computers and Users Once you have added the users who will be accessing the DVR to the Avusers group you must configure the computers from which users will access or manage the DVR including the VMX300 E server the computer the DX9000 driver is installed on and every VMX300 E client You must configure each computer for each user who will access the DVR from that computer For example suppose two operators bsmith and rdarcy will access a DX9000 DVR from the same computer You will need to complete the following process to configure the computer for each user e Login as bsmith using bsmith s regular Windows user name and password e Configure e logout bsmith e Login as rdarcy using rdarcy s regular Windows user name and password e Configure e l
338. on to the immediate right of the color sample select a color and click OK To adjust the transparency of the fill drag the Transparency slider or click the slider bar to move in 596 increments At 100 transparency the hotlink will not be visible when the pointer is positioned over it At 096 it will be fully opaque opecify whether you want the hotlink to have a border around it when the pointer is positioned over it by selecting None or Single Line To set the border s color click the button to the immediate right of the color sample select a color and click OK Run script f you want to associate a script with the hotlink type the script in the Run Script area If you want the script to run with a single click of the hotlink select Single Click If you want the script to run when the hotlink is double clicked select Double Click Type the script actions directly into the Action column or use the script wizard to help you write the script For more information on writing scripts refer to Scripts and Expressions To test the script save the server configuration log in to the client load the map the hotlink is on and click the hotlink Click OK The hotlink is created and the Add New Hotlink dialog box closes The name and script tag of the new hotlink appear in the right pane of the Object Browser and the hotlink appears on the map 171 EDIT A HOTLINK S PROPERTIES NOTE If you change the script tag for a hotlink any scr
339. on was successful the name of the DVR will appear in the Success on field A message saying the operation was completed will appear Click OK to acknowledge the message If the DVR name appears in the Failure on field refer to the What if Adding the DVR Failed section C1553M B 4 05 amp DX 9000 Client Configuration Utility Site map creation C Import from server C Export to server Build a list of local servers C Standard naming Custom naming Numbered Add m Remove to o Status Completed Success on pelcol Failure on X Configure time zone Administrative station Figure 83 Success or Failure Indication 10 Repeat steps 6 8 for each DX9000 DVR you want to be accessible to this user from this computer If you are configuring the VMX300 E server computer make sure you add each DX9000 in the system In a multipleserver system add each DVR to exactly one server Never add a DVR to more than one server 11 Click Close The DX9000 Client Configuration Utility dialog box closes What if Adding the DVR Failed If the DX9000 Client Configuration Utility fails to add the DVR the name of the DVR will appear in the Failure on field E Dx 9000 Client Configuration Utility Site map creation C Import from server C Export to server Build a list of local servers C Standard naming Numb
340. onfiguring from the drop down list Click OK to close the dialog box Quad ideo Display Properties x General Advanced m Card number 1 b d Video input number 1 Red Cancel Figure 23 General Setting for Quad Video Display 5 Advanced tab For all types of canvas the canvas settings Advanced tab allows you to configure the image quality for image capture files including both automatic FTP image capture and image capture initiated by an operator using the Capture button You only need to configure the settings on the Advanced tab if the canvas is going to be used to capture images a Picture quality Use the slider to set the quality of the images you want captured from this canvas Lower the quality to reduce the file size of captured images b Stretch picture Select Stretch picture if you want to change the dimensions of captured images The dimensions are given in pixels It is recommended that you only reduce the size not increase it since increasing the picture dimensions will make the picture look grainy To prevent distortion reduce the width and height by the same proportion Reduce the dimensions to 80 x 60 for thumbnails Ef JPEG picture quality 1 100 75 Low quality High quality Stretch picture Width Height Figure 24 Advanced Settings 6 Click OK The Add New Canvas dialog box closes and the new canvas is added The name of the canvas appears in the Object Browser
341. ons flash in the alarm colors when Alarm is True False 0 oet Alarm to False to indicate the device is not in an alarm state Device icons display in the Screen and Border colors when Alarm is False Signal Input n a Use in SET statements to assign the destination for live video destination Example SET external monitor1 input camera output DX9000 READ PROPERTY EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists the DX9000 DVR property that can be used in scripts and expressions NOTE You can set up a DX9000 DVR to start or stop recording automatically in response to motion or time through the DX9000 unit itself You cannot script a DX9000 DVR to start or stop recording automatically using the scripting language provided in VMX300 E Table Y DX9000 Read Property and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Read otatus The device driver is successfully communicating with the DVR Offline The device driver cannot communicate with the DVR This could be a result of the network cable being removed or the DVR s power being turned off C1553M B 4 05 183 DX8000 PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following tables list DX8000 properties that can be used in scripts and expressions For instructions on creating user defined presets and patterns for DX8000 cameras refer to Scripts in the Client Operation Manual To see newly created presets and patterns in the DX8000 camera s read an
342. ons you can apply to the item Table AQ lists the contexts in which pop up menus are available and the commands they contain Table AQ Pop up Menu Commands mE IATONOFREM commans 7 Object Browser docking commands C1553M B 4 05 USE COPY AND PASTE TO CREATE A NEW OBJECT The Copy and Paste options are useful for creating an object that has similar attributes to an existing object For example if you want to create a prompt that has the same button set up as an existing prompt you can save yourself from having to re create the buttons by using Copy and Paste to copy the prompt then editing the prompt information and text NOTE Copy and Paste cannot be used for maps hotlinks named views device drivers and certain devices 1 Navigate the Object Browser to display the object you want to copy in the right pane of the Object Browser 2 Right click the object and select Copy from the pop up menu 3 Right click anywhere in the right pane of the Object Browser and select Paste from the pop up menu A copy of the selected object is created and its name appears in the Object Browser The new object is named Copy of name of original object 4 Editthe new object as desired USE COPY AND PASTE MANY TO CREATE MULTIPLE NEW OBJECTS To create more than one new object based on an existing object use the Copy and Paste Many options Paste Many simultaneously creates as many copies of an object as you want The new objects are
343. op up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New External Monitor dialog box 3 Configure the monitor settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New External Monitor l x General Properties Location New External Monitor Description pe oO Cancel Figure 63 General Tab for External Monitor Use the General tab to enter a location name and an optional description The location name is used to identify the device The location name can be a maximum of 50 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Location names are not case sensitive CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Add New External Monitor x General Properties v Has looping output Icon Animation Screen color Choose m Border color Choose Device in alarm state Color 1 Choose I Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose 1 Cancel Figure 64 Properties Tab for External Monitor C1553M B 4 05 65 Looping output on an external monitor device allows the device to function as a source device Refer to Devices Switching a Device in the VMX300 E Client Manual for information on source and destination devices To enable looping output complete the following steps 1 Click Looping
344. operties are set to Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically 4 Click Use the following IP address and then complete the following steps a Enterthe IP address of the VMX300 E workstation b Enter the subnet mask address c lf applicable enter the default gateway address and the preferred and alternate DNS server addresses otherwise skip this step and proceed to step 5 NOTE You must assign a unique IP address to each VMX300 E workstation in your system 5 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box and then click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box 6 Close the Network Connections window by clicking the X in the upper right hand corner of the window C1553M B 4 05 21 22 IDENTIFY THE VMX300 E WORKSTATION ON THE NETWORK This procedure includes assigning a unique computer name to the VMX300 E workstation and then assigning the VMX300 E workstation to a workgroup or a domain If these steps are not applicable in your system skip this procedure Note that if you are using a DX9000 Series DVR in your system you must assign the VMX300 E to the appropriate DX9000 workgroup To identify the VMX300 E on the network complete the following steps 1 Onthe Windows XP desktop right click the My Computer icon and then click Properties The System Properties dialog box appears 2 Click the Computer Name tab and then click C
345. operty Refer to the Add a DX8000 Camera section for instructions on renaming auxiliaries Off Tum off the camera s Auxiliary feature C1553M B 4 05 185 186 ASCII DEVICE PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following tables list Pelco ASCII device properties that can be used in scripts and expressions For instructions on creating user defined presets and patterns for ASCII cameras refer to Scripts in the Client Operation Manual To see newly created presets and patterns in the ASCII camera s read and write properties in the Object Browser you must force the server to update its read write property lists for that device To do this open the Edit Driver Properties dialog box for that driver and then click Synchronize Table AB ASCII Switcher Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Read Commstatus The device driver is successfully communicating with the switcher Offline The device driver cannot communicate with the switcher This could be a result of the serial cable being removed or the switcher s power being turned off Write Alarm True Set Alarm to True to indicate the device is in an alarm state Device icons flash in the alarm colors when Alarm is set to True Set Alarm to False to indicate the device is not in an alarm state Table AC ASCII Camera Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Read Preset The camera s current view is not the
346. or event is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted alarm or event disappears from the Object Browser 230 C1553M B 4 05 ALARM EVENT ICONS VMX300 E allows you to customize your maps by placing icons on them that represent the alarms and events configured on your server Icons are an effective way to alert a recipient visually that an alarm or event has been triggered and then acknowledged e When the alarm or event is triggered the icon changes to the alarm color e When the alarm or event is acknowledged the icon changes back to the default color e While the alarm event expression is true the bell hammer strikes the bell You do not need to place an alarm event icon on a map for the alarm or event to function Notification sounds scripts and archiving all function independently of the icon The icons role is to provide operators with a visual alert Before you can place an alarm event icon on a map you must add the alarm or event itself as described in Add a New Alarm or Event Once you have added the alarm or event you can place as many icons representing the alarm or event as you want PLACE AN ALARM EVENT ICON ON A MAP NOTE You do not need to place an alarm event icon on a map for the alarm or event to function Notification sounds scripts and archiving all function independently of the icon 1 Load the map you want to place an alarm event icon on The map appears in the map viewport 2 Navigat
347. orkspaces C Can load workspaces C Can edit workspaces C Can save workspaces Window Content Maps Client Global Scripts Devices BEI El Figure 188 Edit Group Properties Dialog Box 2 Change the properties of the user group as desired Refer to Add a New User Group for more information 3 Click OK The Edit Group Properties dialog box closes DELETE A USER GROUP NOTE Deleting a user group is irreversible If you delete a user group and then change your mind you must re create it using the Add New User Group option and edit each user you want to make a member of the group You can delete a user group regardless of whether it has members If you delete a user group that has members they will lose the permissions the deleted group granted unless they belong to another group that offers those same permissions To delete a user group 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name User Groups In the right pane right click the user group you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the user group click Yes The selected user group is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The name of the deleted group disappears from the Object Browser NOTE You cannot delete the group you are currently logged in under if it is the only group you belong to C1553M B 4 05 151 Users The parts of the VMX300 E software a particul
348. ort protocol from the Protocol drop down box The remote IP is the IP address of the computer the remote device s driver runs on Enter the remote IP in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box enter the port the remote device s driver uses to receive commands d Referto Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section 3 Miscellaneous Optional Configure the following optional field in the Miscellaneous section of the Communications tab Miscellaneous Re arm Interval sec EE Connection Attempts B Attempt Interval sec 3 Comm Timeout msec 000 Idle Disconnect sec p Expect echo Figure 120 Miscellaneous Section of Communications Tab Idle Disconnect sec Enter the number of seconds of inactivity you want to elapse before VMX300 E closes the COM port direct serial connection or the local port IP connection The port will open again automatically when a new connection is established with the relay unit Use the default value of 0 to indicate that the port should never be closed while the driver is running Note that the following fields should not be changed Re arm Interval sec This field is reserved for future development Connection Attempts This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 3 Attempt Interval sec This field is used for troubleshooting and should specify the default value of 5 Comm Timeout msec
349. ose the device s relay False 0 Open the device s relay Signal PelcoNet_HDD n a Applies to PelcoNet 350 encoders only source Use in SET statements to assign the source for archived video Example SET window1 ArchivedSource encoder1 PelcoNet_HDD Note that this property is available only when This unit has integral recording capability has been selected on the PelcoNet device s Properties tab Refer to the Add a PelcoNet MPEG Device section for information on the Properties tab NVR300_IP lt ID gt n a Applies to encoders and encoder decoders only ID is the rightmost number in the NVR300 s IP address For example if the NVR300 s IP address is 192 168 1 53 the write property for that NVR is NVR_IP53 Use this property in SET statements to assign the source for archived video Example SET window2 ArchivedSource encoder decoder2 NVR300_ P53 Note that this property is available only when the NVR300 with the specified ID has been added to the PelcoNet device s NVR300 Recording tab Refer to the Add a PelcoNet MPEG Device section for information on the NVR Recording tab EXTERNAL MONITOR PROPERTIES EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists External Monitor device properties that can be used in scripts and expressions Table X External Monitor Properties and Values TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Write Alarm True 1 set Alarm to True to indicate the device is in an alarm state Device ic
350. ou are sure you want to proceed click Yes The server adds the drivers it finds to the server configuration The drivers appear in the Object Browser EDIT A DEVICE DRIVER S PROPERTIES You can change the IP address and port number of a device driver but not the driver s name NOTE Changes to device drivers such as autodiscovering drivers come into effect immediately You cannot discard your changes by exiting configuration mode without saving To change the properties of an existing device driver 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Device Drivers Right click the driver you want to edit and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Driver Properties dialog box opens Edit Driver Properties l x Driver Information Name External Monitor Driver IP Address n 92 168 1 144 Check Now Listening Port 2003 Browse Local Browse All Cancel Figure 34 Edit Driver Properties Dialog Box 2 Edit the properties as desired Refer to Add a New Device Driver for more information 3 Click Synchronize The Edit Driver Properties dialog box closes DELETE A DEVICE DRIVER NOTES e Changes to device drivers such as deleting a driver from the server configuration come into effect immediately You cannot discard your changes by exiting configuration mode without saving e Deleting a device driver deletes all the devices of that type and removes their icons from maps This introduces an erro
351. ou want to fix or select the error and click Fix Errors appear in red The Edit Properties dialog box for the object containing the error opens 2 Correct the error Use syntax error checking hover help to help you identify the error Click OK The Edit Properties dialog box closes 3 Continue correcting errors until there are no more Click Previous to select the previous error in the list Click Next to select the next error in the list 4 Click OK The Script and Expression Verification dialog box closes and the configuration is saved 200 C1553M B 4 05 EXAMPLE SCRIPTS EXAMPLE 1 INITIALIZATION SCRIPT The following script loads a map into the map viewport and sets the video source for each of three custom windows since this is a global script any operator with permission to run the script can run it from the client The script affects only the client it is run on Add New Global Script Global Script Information Name T TN Script Tag Initialize 00000000000000 i Global Script Events LOAD Admin Level 1l SET Windowl LiveSource Camera_1 Output Camera z utput Camera 3 0utput OK Cancel Figure 223 Initialization Script EXAMPLE 2 CAMERA SEQUENCE The following script implements a sequence that sends cameras to presets The sequence repeats until the global tag ContinueSequence becomes false Edit Global Script Properties m Global Script Information Name Camera Sequence 1
352. owser window and select Undock from the pop up menu Q TIP When the Object Browser is undocked and the Configuration window Is restored down you can move the Object Browser outside the Configuration window to the desktop Dock the Object Browser to the Left You can re dock the Object Browser in its default position to the left of the map viewport as follows 1 Click the Object Browser title bar and hold the mouse key down 2 Drag the pointer to the extreme left of the Configuration window A gray rectangle the full height of the map viewport snaps to the left edge of the Configuration window 3 Release the mouse button The Object Browser moves to the space defined by the gray rectangle Alternatively right click anywhere in the Object Browser window and select Dock Left from the pop up menu Dock the Object Browser to the Right You can dock the Object Browser to the right of the map viewport as follows 1 Click the Object Browser title bar and hold the mouse key down 2 Drag the pointer to the extreme right of the Configuration window A gray rectangle the full height of the map viewport snaps to the right edge of the Configuration window 3 Release the mouse button The Object Browser moves to the space defined by the gray rectangle Alternatively right click anywhere in the Object Browser window and select Dock Right from the pop up menu C1553M B 4 05 253 RESIZE WINDOWS Many windows can be resized including the Conf
353. p that allows you to work with workspaces and you must be connected to your home server Refer to Configuring Servers in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual for information on selecting a home Server Once logged in you can change the appearance of the display either by using standard Windows techniques for resizing and repositioning windows or by editing the workspace When the display is adjusted as you want it save the workspace Refer to Workspaces in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual for information on editing and saving a workspace To use the workspace as the default workspace for a client log in to the server in configuration mode and edit the client as described in Edit a Client s Properties C1553M B 4 05 33 ADD A NEW CLIENT 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Clients Double click Add New Client in the right pane or right click Clients in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Client dialog box opens Add New Client Information Computer Name New_Computer Browse Epe d P e MM Browse Figure 18 Add New Client Dialog Box 2 Computer name Type in the name of the computer you want to add as a client of the VMX300 E server or click Browse to select from a list of computers visible on the network The computer name you enter here must be identical to the computer name listed in Windows Control Panel System on the computer you want to add
354. pe anew point number Set this number to match the point number sent out by the access control device when that type of alarm occurs VMX300 E manages an alarm only if the point number in the string matches a point number on the Access Control Points tab VMX300 E discards any incoming alarm that does not match the number of a point defined on the Access Control Points tab 3 Optional Type a new point name The name appears in the Device Control dialog box in the VMX300 E client The name must be unique and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks The name is not case sensitive For example NW door card reader is equivalent to NW DOOR CARD READER 4 Optional Type a new script tag for the point Use the script tag to refer to the point in scripts and expressions For more information refer to Access Control Device Properties Exposed for Scripts and Expressions script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Script tags are not case sensitive For example Door 1 is equivalent to DOOR 1 The script tag must be unique 5 Click OK The Edit Point dialog box closes The new numbers names and script tags appear on the Access Control Points tab and in the Device Control dialog box in the VMX300 E client The device s read and write p
355. pens 3 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the device click Yes The selected device is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted device disappears from the Object Browser and its device icons are removed from maps Note that deleting a device that is referred to in a script introduces an error into the script Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information Q TIP You can delete multiple devices of a particular type at once Navigate the Object Browser to display the devices you want to delete in the right pane To select nonconsecutive devices hold the Ctrl key down while selecting with the mouse To select consecutive devices select the first device hold the Shift key down and select the last device Once you have selected the devices you want to delete right click and then select Delete from the pop up menu ADD A FIXED CAMERA DEVICE The fixed camera driver supports any noncontrollable video source such as a noncontrollable camera Before you can add a device to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers Fixed Camera Devices 2 Double click Add New Device The Add New Fixed Camera dialog box appears You can also configure settings after you have added
356. perator select Add another condition that must also be true If you want to add another condition connected by the OR operator select Add another condition that could alternatively be true Then click Next and repeat step 2 4 When you have added all the conditions that make up the expression click Finish The Expression Wizard dialog box closes and the expression you created appears in the Expression box C1553M B 4 05 THE SCRIPT WIZARD The script wizard helps you write a script statement by stepping you through its creation providing you with valid options for each part of the statement as needed Since the script wizard creates a single statement you must re invoke the wizard for every statement you want help with To write a statement using the script wizard 1 Addor edit the object whose script you want to write 2 Click the line where you want the new statement to be placed If you do not want to overwrite existing code make sure the line you select is blank If necessary insert a blank line by positioning the cursor on the line before the position you want the new line and press Enter The Script Wizard button appears in the Event column of the selected line 1 SET RecipientObject Window 1 l Figure 219 Opening the Script Wizard 3 Click the Script Wizard button The Script Wizard dialog box opens Script Wizard Script Commands Please choose from the following scripting options b a C
357. ppear in the right pane of the Object Browser NOTE When you edit a global script make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration before attempting to run the script Q TIP A global script that is run from another script can access local variables declared in the calling script The calling script must CALL not RUN the global script C1553M B 4 05 203 EDIT A GLOBAL SCRIPT NOTE f you change the script tag for a global script all the scripts that run the global script will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the global scripts new script tag 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Global Scripts In the right pane double click the global script you want to change or right click the global script and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Global Script Properties dialog box opens Edit Global Script Properties Global Script Information Name Camera Sequence 1 Script Tag Camera_Sequence_1 Global Script Events Fire Exit Camera 0utput Shipping Door Camera 0utput OK Cancel Figure 227 Edit Global Script Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the global script as desired Refer to Add a New Global Script for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Global Script Properties dialog box closes NOTE If you edit a global scripts actions make the global script available in its updated form by sav
358. prise Configuration 204 Licenses Rema File View Zoom Tools Help Save xi VMX3O00 1 LJ Alarms and Events J Clients Exit and Run Figure 12 File Menu 2 Ifthe server configuration has not changed the server shuts down immediately If you made any changes to the configuration the Save Changes prompt appears Click Yes to save changes If any scripts or expressions contain errors the Script and Expression Verification window appears Use this window to correct the errors refer to Syntax Error Checking in the Scripts and Expressions section for instructions and then click OK The Script and Expression Verification window closes and the server shuts down 28 C1553M B 4 05 License Manager License Manager provides a convenient means of managing your software licenses Each server in your system must have a valid base license to run VMX300 E If no valid base license is registered you will not be able to launch the server without first adding a license ADD A LICENSE 1 If the server has prompted you to enter a license click Yes Otherwise open the License Manager by clicking Tools gt License Manager Then click Add in the License Manager dialog box The Add License dialog box opens Add License ES Installation ID Complete the Installation ID by typing in the License number provided by your Software Vendor Hardware ID License Number Eum Ig Jj Activation Code Activate t
359. property becomes true The expression for the alarm is EMO 3 Server Door Alarm EMO 3 Server True The alarm s On Event action is SET Window1 LiveSource Camera1 RS Output Q TIP Use context sensitive help or the script wizard to write scripts involving remote servers VMX300 E will provide you with a pop up list of script tags referring to remote servers and their alarms and events in context Refer to Scripts and Expressions Mechanics of Editing Scripts and Expressions for more information C1553M B 4 05 221 ALARM EVENT CATEGORIES 222 ADD A NEW ALARM EVENT CATEGORY 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Alarms and Events Double click lt Add New Category gt in the right pane or right click Alarms and Events in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Category dialog box opens Add New Category x General Attributes Name New Category Priority 50 Color E Default Golor Type Sound Sound File 4 This appears in the Client Session Manager Play sound continuously Recipients r Behavior aues o Requires acknowledgement C Send action to first available user araup Suppress subsequent events If rio response in na seconds move to Zuto acknowledgein 10 seconds next available user qroup Send action to all available users groups r Archiving Notify via E mail Archive events of this category
360. r the VMX300 E client does not treat permissions cumulatively When the user logs in the client prompts the user to specify which group he wants to log in under For the duration of that session the user s permissions are limited to those granted by the group he logged in under To exercise the permissions of another different group he belongs to the user must log out and log in again this time logging in under the other group GROUP PERMISSIONS Table D lists the group permissions available on an unconfigured server and the privileges each permission grants The core permissions fall into three categories Administrative Client Workspaces and Window Content Other categories are added to the list as needed For example when you first add a map to the server configuration a Maps category is added to the Group Permissions Table D Core Group Permissions Can configure software Edit alarms and events clients connections device drivers labels maps global scripts global tags prompts recipient groups schedules server ties timers user groups users View logs Show All Devices in device list The following permissions are added to the group permissions as they become relevant e Maps Selecting the permission for a particular map allows a user with that permission to view the map e Global scripts Selecting the permission for a particular global script allows an operator with that permission to run the global script
361. r Devices Edit Group Properties Name Operators Permissions 10 104 201 2 PTZ Camera Can access device control dialog Can lock camera Can control camera Can access on screen display Can view device icons on client Can edit presets 1 8 Can edit presets 8 and above Can edit patterns Lobby Camera Cancel Figure 178 PTZ Permissions Table F PTZ Camera Permissions ENABLES USER TO Can access device control dialog Access the camera s Device Control dialog box in the VMX300 E client This permission includes the ability to control the camera s auxiliaries Can lock device Lock the camera in the client preventing users and scripts with lower priority from controlling the camera Can control camera In the VMX300 E client pan tilt zoom and focus the camera adjust the iris go to presets and run patterns Can access on screen display Access the On Screen Display tab of the camera s Device Control dialog box in the client Can calibrate the camera Do not use this permission it is reserved for future use Can view device icons on client Make Pelco PIZ camera icons visible in the client and list the camera in the Device List Can edit presets 1 8 In the VMX300 E client create save rename and unassign presets numbered 1 to 8 Can edit presets 9 and above In the VMX300 E client create save rename and unassign presets numbered 9 and higher and set and clear the home preset Can edit patt
362. r Event Properties x Information Name west Fire Exit Breached Script Tag west Fire Exit Breached Priority o w Use Category priority v Display the label For this alarm or event Edit w Associate Source with this Alarm Event Camera 42 Expression poor Alarm 12 Value True m Action Alarm Event Action J Comment required on acknowledgement OK Cancel Figure 253 Edit Alarm or Event Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the alarm or event as desired Refer to Add a New Alarm or Event for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Alarm or Event Properties dialog box closes NOTE If you edit a script associated with an alarm or event make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration before attempting to run the script DELETE AN ALARM OR EVENT Deleting an alarm or event is irreversible If you delete an alarm or event and then change your mind you must add a new an alarm or event Also note that if you delete an alarm or event any script that refers to the alarm or event will contain an error 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Alarms and Events gt alarm event category name In the right pane right click the alarm or event you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the alarm or event click Yes The selected alarm
363. r into scripts that refer to one of the deleted devices e Deleting a device driver is irreversible If you delete a device driver and then change your mind you must add it back as described in Add a New Device Driver or Autodiscover Device Drivers Any devices that were configured before you deleted the driver will auto matically be added to the server configuration when you add the driver back 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Device Drivers In either pane right click the driver you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the device driver click Yes The selected driver is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes All the driver s devices are deleted and their icons removed from maps 44 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE A PELCONET MPEG TIME SERVER The PelcoNet MPEG driver allows you to configure a time server for the driver to periodically synchronize its clock to To ensure that synchroniza tion works properly set the time zone on the PelcoNet device to the time zone where the device is installed Refer to the appropriate PelcoNet manual for instructions on setting the device s time zone NOTE Be sure that the time zone settings are synchronized appropriately on all devices in the VMX300 E configuration Time servers are configured when you start the driver Configure Time Servers 1 Start the PelcoNet MPEG driver The Configure Driver
364. r is opened First create a recipient group and make the operators members of the group Now create an alarm event category that simultaneously sends notification to each member of that recipient group Finally define an alarm belonging to that category with an On Event script that loads live video of the exit area into a particular window that is defined on each operator s client When the alarm is triggered the script will automatically load the video in the window of each recipient operator who is logged in at the time Q TIP You can copy a custom window from one client to another using Copy and Paste Refer to Pop Up Menus in the Appendix for detailed instructions on using Copy and Paste HOW MANY CUSTOM WINDOWS TO CONFIGURE The number of custom windows that you need to configure will vary based on your specific system parameters In general configure as many custom windows as you want the operator using this client to view at any one time For example a total of nine custom windows are required for an operator to view the following types of content at one time A map operators can view maps in custom windows as well as in the viewport A web page Three analog video streams Four digital video streams Note however that your specific system parameters will limit the number of digital video streams that an operator can view at any one time Refer to Table B in the How to Choose the Video Stream Settings for Your Configuration sectio
365. r it When an incoming string matches the Pattern To Match and the point number in the string matches a point number on the Access Control Points tab VMX300 E sets the read property for that point to True e Reset Pattern To Match Optional Use this section to configure the pattern that matches the reset string which is the string sent when an alarm condition is no longer in place When an incoming string matches the Reset Pattern To Match and the point number in the string matches a point number on the Access Control Points tab VMX300 E resets the read property for that point to False If the access control device does not send a reset string you do not need to define this pattern You can use either a predefined pattern or a custom pattern You can also define a custom pattern and then save it to the list of predefined patterns for later use Refer to Create a Custom Pattern as the Pattern to Match and Create a Custom Pattern as the Reset Pattern to Match for instruction on saving custom patterns Select a Predefined Pattern as the Pattern to Match 1 Click the Pattern To Match tab 2 Click Pre defined and then click Select The Pre defined Patterns list opens Edit Access Control Properties i General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Pre defined Patterns Pattern String Description 0 9 Ma ALNum Sta Pelco ASCII Protocol Switch Pattern Se A LNum96Ea Pelco ASCII Protocol Alarm Pattern
366. r the specific device Instructions are provided in the Enable Camera and Monitor Device Numbers section e Map the device numbers to a keyboard number for the specific keyboard This task is completed on the Logical Mapping tab of the Add New Pelco KBD300 dialog box or you can configure these settings after you have added the keyboard to the server configuration in the Edit Properties dialog box Instructions are provided in the Configure the Logical Mapping Tab section ENABLE CAMERA AND MONITOR DEVICE NUMBERS 1 Right click the camera or monitor in the Object Browser and then select Local Settings from the pop up menu The Edit Local dialog box opens Edit Local Settings Camera 1 j x Miscellaneous Display the label For this device Edit Label v Enable the device number s Scripting Iz Expose properties of this device so that they can be used in scripts and expressions Device Script Tag EastEndCam1 Default Interlock Expression Device Alarm Mapping Map device Alarms to alarms Map device Events to Events Map device Normal to Normal Figure 103 Edit Local Settings Dialog Box oettings C1553M B 4 05 2 Click Enable the device number and then type the desired device number Each device must have a unique device number in its local settings no matter what type of device it is For example you cannot have a monitor with device number 20 and a camera
367. r verifies your changes If one or more scripts or expressions contain errors the server displays an error message and gives you the opportunity to make corrections Refer to Scripts and Expressions Syntax Error Checking for instructions on using the Scripts and Expressions Verification tools to make corrections Exit configuration mode Click File Exit and Run If you made changes to the configuration that have not been saved the server asks whether you want to save your changes Click Yes to save your changes The server verifies your changes Make corrections as needed Once there are no errors the Configuration window closes and the server launches When the server is running the VMX300 E icon appears in the Windows system tray 21 SHUT DOWN THE SERVER SHUTTING DOWN WHILE IN RUN MODE 1 Right click the VMX300 icon in the Windows system tray and then select Exit from the pop up menu Configure Current Status Figure 11 Run Mode Pop up Menu 2 he shutdown prompt appears 3 Click Yes The server shuts down SHUTTING DOWN WHILE IN CONFIGURATION MODE ONLY NOTE f the server is in both Run mode and Configuration mode you must shut it down through Run mode You cannot shut down the server from Configuration mode when the server is running Closing the configuration when the server is in Run mode leaves the server running 1 If the server is in Configuration mode only click File gt Exit i MX300 Enter
368. ration mode without saving Before you can add a device to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions To add a device complete the following steps 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers device driver name Devices Note that some device drivers such as the PelcoNet MPEG driver or the ASCII driver do not list the generic Devices label under the driver name These drivers list either a specific type of device such as Switchers or Cameras or they list the device model such as PelcoNet 300 Encoders The specific navigation path is included in the instructions provided for the specific device in the following pages 2 Inthe right pane two functions are provided for adding devices Add New Device and Autodiscover All Devices Use either option ADD A NEW DEVICE You can enter a device manually by completing the following steps 1 Double click Add New Device The Add New Device dialog box appears Q TIP As an alternative you can use the Copy and Paste Many options to add up to 100 devices at once based on an existing device Refer to Pop Up Menus in the Appendix for instructions If you are adding cameras with addressing remember to edit each camera in turn to correct the camera address 2 Configu
369. rator has not loaded a client workspace The options for how the map loads by default are a Load map at actual scale centered on viewport Display the map at its actual size centered in the map viewport If the map viewport is not large enough to display the entire map at its actual size a portion of the map will display b Load map to fit in viewport Display the map as large as possible to fit within the map viewport c Load map to a named view Display the map as prescribed by the selected named view This option is only available if you have defined at least one named view For more information refer to Named Views Click OK The Add New Map dialog box closes and the new map is added The name and script tag of the new map appear in the Object Browser 157 NOTE To have a named view as the client map loading default 1 Add the map 2 Create the named view 3 Edit the map and change the Client Map Loading setting to Load map to a named view TIP f you want to use the name of the map file as the map name browse for the map file before typing in the name The server will automatically fill in the name box with the file name and generate a tag based on the name EDIT A MAP S PROPERTIES 2 NOTE f you change the script tag for a map any script that refers to the map will contain an error To correct the error update the scripts so they use the maps new script tag Refer to Scripts and Expressions for more information T
370. re REI POE bres 93 Configure the General Lab 22 eo scestr erre oberg PE HE aoE TRE RIATPRINUER TIEFEN Candie soos ed en AIEE Seer eds taps 94 Conngure the Properes 8D srs cettes chatter ccdees cbs DU ratee es eddd ors oed rb deesse PESLPAE E Pd debug s Det les 94 Configure the Communications Tab 0 0 RR RR e e as 95 Connigure the ALM ci T E 97 CGontigure the Model Tab 2 eas esce tek rne cennar DEDE ENEE Giey E EEEE R ged E adeeb E a ands Pu AP E cates 98 Adda CM9760 REL Relay Interfabe UNE ia cuu ue te cette ka ace a Sce D Ri Rt dre etr DEB Eaa E DEE ac dre ble oe 98 Donraure the General Tall us scere re RP eine kee ERR ERES TR ened gk passe Lap ER E Ea a E bode eg ERN ER aa ewen 99 Conngure the Properes laD ci u dau aeeere os cdewke ered sweeeeaonires edetiee ad eee hed de cae ta dt E ES 99 CONTIGUIE the CONMIMUNICENONS BD seinen aus a aetna ETE eae HR PP ERES RE PEG Canthe pepe ee PR gnc pev eee ted 100 Comigure the Relay Poms TaD isaibereruPiress ere ti ide ralddecdddors dbus deh decewher see ede reddasessiues ote 102 Configure the DIP Switches Tab emm ert reser Pees awe e aed kay ren oe baa Shee eeu 103 Connigure THE Model Tab Lu 103 Adda serial Output DEVICE srs rirrasscsidstistint tana a a wines atts E E E TEE EAE E E EE E EE TE a a 104 Connigure The General TaD 104 Config re the Properties Tab 5 sesese eI RR ER
371. re information 78 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE ALARMS AND EVENTS TAB This feature is reserved for future development DVR TROUBLESHOOTING IF YOU CHANGE THE VMX300 E OPERATING SYSTEM PASSWORD If you change the VMX300 E operating system password user name AvUser password 1234 system operators must complete the following steps to connect to the DVR server 1 Click the Windows Start button and then select Run 2 Type lt serverHostName gt media where serverHostName is the name of the server for example if Pelco is the name of the server type Pelco1 media The Connect to serverHostName window appears 3 Type the following user name and password Username Avuser Password 1234 4 Click Remember my Password 5 Click OK The server connection is allowed and the DVR folder appears 6 If you have more than one server for example Pelco1 Pelco2 and Pelco3 complete steps 1 5 for each server ADD A PELCO ASCII SWITCHER The Pelco ASCII device driver controls cameras routed through a Pelco matrix switcher using the Pelco ASCII protocol Each instance of the Pelco ASCII device driver can support a single switcher and multiple cameras If you have more than one switcher to configure add the device driver to the server configuration once for each switcher Refer to the Device Drivers section for information on adding device drivers The Pelco ASCII device driver supports the following Pelco switchers
372. re the device settings as described in the instructions provided for the specific device in the following pages 3 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box AUTODISCOVER DEVICES The Autodiscover All Devices function locates all IP devices of the selected type that are running on the local area network LAN To add a device that is running on a wide area network WAN use the Add New Device option Note that you can only locate IP devices automatically You cannot automatically locate devices that are connected serially 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers device driver name Devices 2 Double click Autodiscover All Devices 3 Wait several seconds for the process to complete When the process is complete the new devices appear in the Object Browser In order for the VMX300 E system to locate a device automatically the driver must be running at a network location that is visible to the VMX300 E server If you know the IP address and port number of a device that was not located use the Add New Device option 4 To change any specific device settings right click the device and then select Edit from the pop up menu C1553M B 4 05 4 DELETE A DEVICE 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Device Drivers device driver name Devices 2 In either pane right click the device you want to delete and then select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box o
373. reate a LABEL to be used in goto statements uam Define a local variable VAR DISPLAY a device s control dialog in the client window Display a PROMPT in the client window GOTO a previously defined label LOAD a map or named view in the client window PAUSE the execution of this script Perform action s when condition s are met IF THEN ELSE ENDIF RUN a user defined script in another thread Run a user defined script in this thread CALL Send an image to an FTP site SET an object s property value Set the action the script will execute when an ERROR occurs Stop the execution of a script ABORT Stop the execution of this script ABORT Figure 220 Opening the Script Wizard 4 Select the statement you want to write and press Next 5 Continue to select options as the script wizard presents them to you until you have built the statement you want then press Finish The Script Wizard dialog box closes and the statement you created appears in the Action column of the selected line C1553M B 4 05 199 SYNTAX ERROR CHECKING VMX300 E checks the syntax of each line of a script as you enter it If an error is detected in a line the text for the line is displayed in red For help in identifying the error position the pointer over the line with the error This opens hover help containing an error message and information on command syntax LOAD Baxter Building The LOAD statement must adhere to the Following syntax
374. result of a preset preset The cameras current view results from going to this user defined preset This value is created when you create the preset Note that equals the preset number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera NoPattern The camera is not currently running a pattern pattern The camera is currently running this user defined pattern This value is created when you create the pattern Note that f equals the pattern number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Write Preset DontCare When a SET statement with a FOR clause causes a camera to go to a preset the camera is locked in the preset view for the duration specified in the FOR clause The lock is automatically released once the specified duration has elapsed Setting the Preset write property to DontCare releases the lock prior to the specified time allowing the camera view to be changed immediately For information on locking ASCII cameras refer to Devices in the Client Operation Manual preset Go to this user defined preset This value is created when you create the preset Note that i equals the preset number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera camera Alarm True 1 set Alarm to True to indicate the camera is in an alarm state Camera icons flash in the alarm colors when Alarm is True False 0 Set Alarm to False to indicate the
375. river Local network adapter 192 168 1 145 Listening port 201 0 hd Options Start the driver as an executable C nstall the driver as a service C Remove the driver as a service Figure 17 Configure Driver Dialog Box If the driver is currently installed to run as a service and you want to run it as an executable click Remove the driver as a service then click OK Repeat step 1 to re open the Configure Driver dialog box Local network adapter Select the IP address of the computer the driver is installed on from the drop down list Listening port The listening port is the port the device driver uses to receive commands from the server If you have not yet added the device driver to the server configuration use the default port number provided or type in a port number between 2 000 and 10 000 that has not been assigned to another driver Use this port number as the Listening Port when you add the device driver to the server configuration If the device driver has previously been added to the server configuration select the driver s listening port from the drop down list The lis tening port is the port that was specified when the driver was added to the server configuration To find out the listening port log in to con figuration mode The port is displayed beside the driver in the Object Browser 31 5 Mode a Executable To run the device driver as an executable click Start the driver as an exec
376. roperties are renamed based on the new script tags C1553M B 4 05 Edit Properties Card Access System 1 Door 1 Entrance Mvv Door 1 Entrance MV 2 Door 2 Entrance SE Door 2 Entrance SE 3 Door 3 Entrance Svv Door 3 Entrance SVw 4 Door 4 Fire Exit NE Door 4 Fire Exit NE 5 Door 5 Fire Exit Sv Door 5 Fire Exit SV B Door 6 Fire Exit Nvv Door B Fire Exit MVV 7 nadin Dock 1 nading Dock 1 8 Object Browser E Device Drivers Card Access System Access Control Driver 192 168 1 114 20 lt Up gt El Devices WB Local Settings Card Access System 3 Read Properties Read Properties S write Properties Door 1 Entrance MW r Door 2 Entrance SE X 1 EE Door 3 Entrance SW Door 4 Fire Exit NE Point Status Port Buffer Door 5 Fire Exit SW Door amp Fire Exit NW Loading Dock 1 1 Door 1 Entrance Nvv Door 1 Entrance Nvv Front Gate 2 Door 2 Entrance SE Door 2 Entrance SE E Write Properties 3 Door 3 Entrance Svv Door 3 Entrance SWVw Door 1 Entrance NW 4 Door 4 Fire Exit NE Door 4 Fire Exit NE aor 2 Entrance SE 5 Door 5 Fire Exit SW Door 5 Fire Exit Sw Door 3 Entrance SW B Door 8 Fire Exit Nvv Door 6 Fire Exit NW Do or 4 Fire Exit NE 7 Loading Dock 1 Loading_Dock_1 8 Front Gate Front Gate Door 5 Fire Exit Sw Door 6 Fire Exit Mw Loading Dock 1 Front Gate 4o m Figure 144 Edited Access Control Points Delete an Access Control Point Click the point that you want to delet
377. ropriate filename and then navigate to a new folder location Name the file with a recognizable filename and save the file in a unique folder location that is separate from the backup files that are automatically generated by VMX300 E If you have to restore a database it will be very important to select the correct backup file 3 Click Save 250 C1553M B 4 05 RESTORE A DATABASE DOO NOTE If you have to restore a database it is very important to select the correct backup file VMX300 E creates an automatic database backup file every time you launch the server in run mode but you should be using the Backup utility to make backup files on a regular basis rather than relying on these backup files To restore a database from a backup 1 Click Tools Database Utilities Restore The Restore Database dialog box opens Choose a database to restore from the list below or click Browse Look in C VMX300 backups e C E3 Name Date Created Last Modified Server 5 2 2 2005 8 32 52 AM 2 2 2005 8 32 52 4M 1699840 bytes Fe Server 4 1 31 2005 10 46 07 AM 1 31 2005 10 46 07 AM 1703936 bytes Server 3 1 31 2005 10 21 35 AM 1 31 2005 10 21 35 AM 1703936 bytes Server 2 1 27 2005 3 31 25 PM 1 27 2005 3 31 25 PM 1703936 bytes Server 1 1 27 2005 2 30 44 PM 1 27 2005 2 30 44 PM 1675264 bytes Size ServerDB backup 2FEB mdb My Recent Documents E Desktop OK Cancel My Documents My Computer
378. rowse OK Cancel Figure 48 General Tab for PelcoNet Device You can either enter a device name or click Browse to browse for existing PelcoNet devices The name can be a maximum of 50 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Device names are not case sensitive If you click Browse the Browse Units dialog box appears Click a device in the list of units and then click OK The device name and descrip tion are uploaded from the PelcoNet device along with the unit IP address and multicast settings overwriting any current settings The Unit IP Address is set on the Communications tab Multicast settings are on the Encoding or Encoding Decoding tab C1553M B 4 05 MAC Address iP Addess OK Cancel Figure 49 Browse Units Dialog Box 2 Optional Type a description of the device CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Add New PelcoNet 3xx Encoder General Properties Encoding Communications NVR 300 Recording Icon amp nimation Device in unknown state Choose B Device in normal state Choose Device in alarm state Color 1 Choose Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose Recording This unit has an integral recording capability Miscellaneous Configure other parameters via embedded web server Go OK Cancel Figure 50 Properties Tab for PelcoNet Device Icon Animation Use this portion
379. rs a Hostname IP Address Port ticktock synch net 37 synchronize times 37 clocktime tsrvr net 37 Add Remove Synchronize every 60 H minutes Server Headquarters Facility ele Fel v Allow this server to act as a Network Time Server on port 7 a i Cancel Figure 173 Date Time Tab The Date Time tab allows you to configure a time server for the VMX300 E server to synchronize to 1 Add To add a time server click Add The Add Time Server dialog box opens Add Time Server x Hostname or IP Address Port ticktock synch net 37 a NI Figure 174 Add Time Server Dialog Box Type the time server s host name or IP address and port number Click OK 2 Select time servers The VMX300 E server will not attempt to synchronize to any time server whose check box is not checked Select each time server you want the VMX300 E server to attempt to synchronize to Clear the check box of any time server you do not want the VMX300 E server to attempt to synchronize to 3 Order list The VMX300 E server attempts to synchronize to the topmost selected server in the list and if that fails the next selected server in the list and so on until there are no more selected servers in the list o move a time server up in the list select the server and click the up arrow to the right of the list To move a server down in the list select the server and click the down arrow 4 Re
380. rt the remote device s driver uses to receive ASCII strings The remote port cannot be the same as the listening port used by any device driver CONFIGURE ACCESS CONTROL POINTS Edit Access Control Properties General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Number of Access Control Points 0 Number Name ScriptTeg n fi Poeno ada Delete ok ce Figure 140 Access Control Points Tab The Access Control Points tab is used to specify the access control alarms that you want VMX300 E to manage For each alarm you want to be managed in VMX300 E add a point to the Access Control Points tab and assign it a number that identifies that alarm How VMX300 E Uses Access Control Points Point number VMX300 E uses the point number specified on the Access Control Points tab to identify which alarms to manage If the point number in an incoming alarm string matches the number for a point defined on the Access Control Points tab VMX300 E sets the read property for that point If the point number does not match the number of a point defined on the Access Control Points tab VMX300 E discards the alarm Choosing alarms When VMX300 E is integrated with an existing access control installation it is typical to configure VMX300 E to manage the same set of alarms as were being managed in the existing system For a new installation you will have to select the alarms you want VMX300 E to mana
381. rties dialog box appears refer to Figure 4 4 Click Advanced The Advanced TCP IP Settings dialog box appears Advanced TCP IP Settings l xj IPSetings DNS WINS Options CWINS addresses in order of use If LMHOSTS lookup is enabled it applies to all connections for which TCP IP is enabled v Enable LMHOSTS lookup Import LMHOSTS NetBIOS setting C Default Use NetBIOS setting from the DHCP server If static IP address is used or the DHCP server does not provide NetBIOS setting enable NetBIOS over TCP IP C Enable NetBIOS over TCP IP Disable NetBIOS over TCP IP Figure 6 Advanced TCP IP Settings Dialog Box WINS Page 5 Click the WINS tab and then click Disable NetBIOS over TCP IP 6 Click OK 7 Click No in any messages regarding bindings you do not need any bindings 8 Click Yes in any additional messages that appear and then click OK to close the remaining open dialog boxes 9 Continue with the steps described in the next section to disable the NetBIOS Helper service C1553M B 4 05 23 24 Disable the NetBIOS Helper Service 1 Click the Windows Start button and then select Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services The Services window appears Ma z Services File Action View Help 5s 2 Eb i S ai Services Local xa Services Local TCP IP NetBIOS Helper Mame Description Sta
382. rver tries the canvas at the top of the list first then if it is not available the second canvas in the list and so on You can re order the canvases for a custom window using the Move Up and Move Down options To change the order of a window s canvases navigate the Object Browser to project name Clients client name Windows window name Canvases In the right pane right click the canvas you want to move and select Move Up or Move Down from the pop up menu The canvas moves up or down one position DELETE A CANVAS Deleting a canvas is irreversible If you delete a canvas and then change your mind you must add a new canvas 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Clients gt client name gt Windows gt window name gt Canvases In the right pane right click the canvas you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the canvas click Yes The selected canvas is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted canvas disappears from the Object Browser The window is no longer able to display video of the type supported by the deleted canvas C1553M B 4 05 41 Device Drivers VMX300 E uses device drivers to control and manage devices Each device driver controls a particular type of equipment such as surveillance camera video recorder or any other type of device There are several steps involved in configuring
383. rver uses overridable paths only when there are no free paths If there is only one overridable path available the server uses it automatically When there are two or more overridable paths available the server finds as many overridable paths as you have specified sorts them according to your specification then either automatically uses the optimal path or presents the list to the user to select from NOTE In most cases automatic path selection is used 1 Free paths lype the number of free paths you want the server to find in the Find free paths box If you want the server to automatically use the path it found that involves the fewest number of devices select Have the system automat ically use the path through the least number of devices If you want the server to present the list of free paths to the user to select from select Allow the user to select a path Limiting the number of free paths speeds up switching Limiting the number of free paths also keeps the list presented to the user a man ageable length when the user is allowed to select the path Overridable paths Type the number of overridable paths you want the server to find in the Find overridable paths box oelect the criterion you want the server to use when finding overridable paths You can choose to find paths that minimize the number of users affected paths that minimize the number of destinations affected paths that minimize the number of dev
384. s 1 Driver IP address By default the servers IP address is entered in the Driver IP Address box If the device driver is not installed on the server type the IP address of the computer the driver is installed on 2 Listening port The listening port is the port the device driver uses to receive commands from the server Type in the listening port for the device driver you want to add This is the port that was entered in the Configure Driver dialog box when the device driver was launched To find out the listening port position the pointer over the driver icon in the Windows system tray of the computer the driver is installed on 3 Check now If you want the server to verify that a device driver is running at the specified IP address and port number click Check Now While the server is checking the dialog box s buttons are unavailable If the server succeeds in finding a driver the buttons become available again If no driver is found the server displays a warning message 3 Click Add The Add New Driver dialog box closes and the new driver appears in the Object Browser with the IP address and port number beside the driver name If the driver has previously been configured its devices also appear in the Object Browser If you are adding a remote server driver the remote server s alarms and events appear in the Object Browser as read properties of the server and the remote server s devices appear as sources Q TIP The easiest way to
385. s Table AL Comparison Operators equals 191 Table AM Logical Operators OPERATOR MEANING EXAMPLE Date DayOfWeek Date Friday amp or AND Date DayOfWeek Date Monday amp Date IsHoliday False Or or OR Cameral CommStatus Camera1 OffLine OR Camera2 CommStatus Camera2 OffLine STATEMENTS 192 A script is made up of one or more statements A statement is made up of a command and possibly some arguments Each statement occupies one line in a script with the exception of the IF statement which spans two or more lines the following table lists the commands used to build statements in VMX300 E scripts LOCAL VARIABLES The VMX300 E scripting language has local Boolean variables that are declared in a scripts DIM or VAR statement They are local in the sense that they can be accessed only within the script that declares them as well as from any global script the script calls using the CALL command They cannot be accessed from a global script run using the RUN command Any script global or local can declare local variables Local variables have one property Value which is accessed variable identifier Value They can take values True or False or equivalently 1 or 0 Table AN Script Commands Optional arguments are in parentheses Refer to Properties of Objects for valid properties and values of different types of objects COMWAND acron ABORT global script tag gt Abort the sp
386. s zo matches z and zo Does not match zoo Equivalent to 0 1 Matches any character except n newline To match any character including newline use An n Matches exactly n occurrences of the previous character or o 2 matches root Does not match rot or rooot group of characters In Matches at least n occurrences of the previous character or o 2 matches root and rooot and roooot etc Does not match group of characters rot n m Matches between n and m occurrences of the previous o 2 3 matches the first three o s in rooooooot character xly Either x or y glfood matches g or food glf ood matches good and food abcde A character set Matches any one of the enclosed characters abede matches the a in plain The complement of a character set Matches any single char abcde matches the p in plain acter not enclosed A range of characters Matches any character in the specified a e matches any lowercase alphabetic character in the range range a e that is a b c d and e The complement of a range of characters Matches any char a e matches any character except a b c d or e acter not in the specified range A grouping of characters do es matches do and does Does not match doe or dos Delete a Pattern From the Predefined Pattern List abcde a e a e abc 1 Oneither the Pattern To Match tab or the Reset Pattern To Match tab click Pre defined and then click Select The
387. s 235 Add a New Recipient Group 2 nee RR RR RR RR Ree eel 236 xu eG IME NOU EE 237 Delete a Recipient Group nent tenet e ls 237 Del WES RE V 238 Prevent Other Servers from Monopolizing Your Ties 2 1 RIRs 240 Pind e i d MNEMHHT V 240 Testa Semer TE ausu ees tre ces nce pne er ERKR Fd Rr Pac RI Deis uiu dien Sanh vata zd potio EORR E Surio Ren anaes 243 Adda New server TIE RECETTES TTE 243 Edi a cerner ERR teas oie asta st EA S ES R R EEE cece E eee RT eaten ee cae 244 Dolea eNe TE qePIT u 244 ala o EEE ee TE E E E E E ee E E E 245 Aa NEUIPOIB e e E a a e E E a a a der IEEE 245 cone FR E RM PT E E E E E EE E ewes eees 247 EOE COL ET AE E T rA 247 Be TIT E e E E E E E Sede a eaees oeewest ewes ds counee EE 247 P ennea e E oe oe S E EE E E E ERE A E 248 Delete an FIP Site coger ent ed uote Ato Padre v ededi redrei Eada Pekia ie anaE ANRE TEENA eea E 249 Beroe c SAULT EE E E T EE EE E E EE E EEE EEE 250 EELEE o E E E E E E E Cd E E E E 250 C1553M B 4 05 Restore a Database 0 cc RR RR RR sae aee ass 251 VSI OM OOS E otene ate a erate ee pee ee eget wpe teats A etic auctvioe oes ate eee eh oe eye bao pave nec geet Gate een TN 252 MICU ev SICM MOOS EE T 257 uq MRMMHETT P P 209 2x S
388. s and Alerts i d Shared Folders E Device Manager Local Users and Groups C Users 4X Groups E uj Storage J Disk Management lt 5 Disk Defragmenter c Logical Drives Removable Storage RS Services and Applications bh Re Rh Figure 75 Groups Folder 12 Click Action gt Add to Group The Avusers Properties dialog box appears Avusers Properties E 2 x General L Avusers Description Members 1 5 21 1957994488 448539723 725345543 1110 5 1 5 21 1957994488 448539723 725345543 1130 5 1 5 21 1957334488 448539723 725345543 1133 45 1 5 21 1957334488 448533723 725345543 1134 5 1 5 21 1957334488 448533723 725345543 1135 1 5 21 1957994488 448539723 725345543 1137 5 1 5 21 1957334488 448533723 725345543 1188 c 1 5 21 1957994488 448539723 725345543 4621 5 1 5 21 1957994488 4439539723 725345543 4622 S 1 5 21 1957994488 446539723 725345543 4624 x Add c H emove Cancel Apply Figure 76 Avusers Properties Dialog Box 13 Click Add The Select Users or Groups dialog box appears C1553M B 4 05 73 74 Select Users or Groups Look in Nam sd In Fer Cid dday PELCO1 ddavis PELCO1 fe Guest PELCO1 operator iL d SQLAgentCmdE xec PELCO 1 svben PELCO1 J Add Check Names PELCOT operatorl Cancel A Figure 77 Select Users or Groups Dialog Box 14 Click the user you just added fr
389. s control devices send a reset string to indicate that the alarm condition no longer holds In this case you should define a Reset Pattern To Match When VMX300 E matches an incoming string to the Reset Pattern To Match VMX300 E resets the property to false If the access control device does not send a reset string you are responsible for resetting the property in one of the alarm s scripts Logic Used for the Access Control Driver When the VMX300 E receives a string from an access control device one of the following situations occurs e If the string matches the Pattern To Match and the point number in the string matches the number of a point defined on the Access Control Points tab VMX300 E sets the point s read property to True e lf a Reset Pattern To Match is defined and the string matches the Reset Pattern To Match and the point number in the string matches the number of a point defined on the Access Control Points tab VMX300 E sets the point s read property to False e fthe string doesnt match either of the patterns or the point number in the string doesn t match the number of a point defined on the Access Control Points tab VMX300 E discards the string ADD AN ACCESS CONTROL DEVICE TO THE SERVER CONFIGURATION Before you can add an access control device to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the network and then add the driver to the server config
390. s is the first time you are launching the server the Corrupt or Missing Database message appears because VMX300 E must create a new database the first time you use it Click Create If this is not the first time you are launching the server and the Corrupt or Missing Database message appears then the server database is corrupted or missing If this is the case you need to restore a backup or create a new database Creating a new server database destroys the existing server database if there is one For information on restoring a backup refer to Database Utilities Once a valid database is in place the VMX300 E start up screen will open The start up screen has a timer that counts down from 15 seconds 2 Mode d Run mode To launch the server in run mode click Run or let the timer count down to zero The VMX300 E icon appears in the Windows system tray indicating that the server is running Configuration mode To launch the server in configuration mode click Configure before the counter reaches zero The Server Login dialog box opens VMX300 Enterprise Server Login x User Information User Name administrator Password pee UN Figure 9 Server Login Dialog Box Type your user name and password If this is the first time the server has been launched use the predefined administrator account user name administrator password 2899100 supplied with the system User names are not case sensitive For exa
391. scription FO IV This camera supports PanTilt Zoom functionality omen Figure 95 General Tab for ASCII Camera 1 Enter a location name and an optional description The location name is used to identify the device The location name can be a maximum of 50 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Location names are not case sensitive 2 Ifthe camera can be panned tilted zoomed focused or the iris adjusted click This camera supports Pan Tilt Zoom functionality If the camera is fixed leave this box unchecked CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Add New Camera General Properties Auxiliaries Icon Animation lt lt 4 Device in unknown state Choose O Device in normal state Choose Device in alarm state Color 1 Choose Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose ceca Figure 96 Properties Tab for ASCII Camera Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of camera icons viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each camera Unknown state When the camera s CommStatus property equals Offline device icons in the client are the color specified here Normal state When the camera s CommStatus property equals Online device icons in
392. se from the primary server to the corresponding directory on the backup server This ensures that the backup server has the same configuration as the primary server For example assuming you installed VMX300 E in the default directory copy c Program Files CS Program Files CS_Server mdb from the primary server to the same location on the backup server Whenever you change the primary server configuration copy the updated server database to the backup server to ensure the backup is current Back up device drivers and driver databases Backing up device drivers is recommended if the drivers are installed on the same computer as the primary server application since access to the device drivers is lost if the computer fails Install backup copies of all the device drivers used in your system and copy each driver database to the backup location This ensures that the backup server has access to all the device drivers it needs in their current configuration For example assuming you installed VMX300 E in the default location copy all the driver databases from c Program Files S Program Files to the corresponding directory at the backup location If the primary server is running on Windows 2000 also copy all driver data bases from c WINNT system32 CS_Components COR to the backup location If the primary server is running on Windows XP copy the additional driver databases from c Windows system32 CS_Components COF to the backup location
393. seeide re ERR ELbx RR IR keri DERE ER E wWEDITc4edRPRupexc ber did 161 Viewing Properties VAIUCS cutter hs esr Set cena Tera EVA E Rd rub I DX Id E ee weae E AEE AE gud iD P Gere dies 163 balli and Rotating QRICONs s eter a i More ttr ue eau Peste gender dide p NIU RRUMPNEELSSUUMEOSMEHE Ge NE des 165 D Hanging ANC OW soot omR UE aa PVIEMARBePCMMESPEPTAPECEPARRMMORE LENA ILI PULCLn UELLE UE 166 Edit EADEFPIODBHIESPIGIBU DOK es aret obe UpPEPEEPPaOOISPUESCPEPIdILPRNUIRUUPURCIR RE dPIMEdRORRPTOSUPEREE PPS 167 Add New Named View Dialog Box 2 een een nn eee RR m I r4 rs 168 Edit Nameu View Propeies Dialog BOX ia raaswee das est iae RI ERO ime rue use RQREM ids ecscEXe qensedoE Spies 168 Ada New Aotik Dialog BOX x4 Laus bd eda ssutu EST labi RP ROIGti Re Ae 327s2292SOSURI 4a fnesdbraeoRbesbicedus 170 Soi peni igi9 6 05122 8 51 2 DOL RNC EE TTE TET EDT LETT 172 Add New Label Dialog Box ss 2 e RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR Rt Rr ls 174 Now Label PRODBFUeS Dialog BOX 2 429 ernaar eod uud Pria sued due beesedborreseoFTAR NEEN EPEE ERa 175 Edit Label Properties Dialog Box 2 2 RR RRRIRRRRRRRRRRRRRRIR RR He re rr 176 Mime su M 191 Rev SOG TONING suede oud re ROMVPRPEPTUEERO ROSEO NR ieee pone eae cee nrSpL P Rede EET E LL M EE 194 Opaning a Listor Commands ice acu oco Ser cre Eee pr rte thao bari cel Vos Sor espe duae Rs erba ws Pare ees 195 Dena a ito AUNES o s eree weuses
394. sequentially named base name where base name is a name you specify and Is a positive integer The objects differ in name only all their other attributes are identical Copy and Paste Many are particularly useful when configuring a new server because they allow you to create many similar objects very quickly For example if you are setting up many similarly configured clients you can save time by creating one client with the desired custom windows then use Copy and Paste Many to make multiple copies of the client each configured with the same windows Paste Many is also useful for creating users when you are first configuring a new server NOTE Copy and Paste Many cannot be used for canvases maps hotlinks named views device drivers and certain devices 1 Navigate the Object Browser to display the object you want to copy in the right pane of the Object Browser 2 Right click the object and select Copy from the pop up menu 3 Right click anywhere in the right pane of the Object Browser and select Paste Many from the pop up menu The Paste Many dialog box opens Paste Many Enter the base name for each new user operator Enter the number to start as the suffix For the names of the copied users Ex operator1 fi Include padding zeros Ex NewLabel 1 Enter the number of copies of this user you would like EF Cancel Figure 278 Paste Many Dialog Box 4 Base name lype the base name you want to
395. single and double quotation marks Server tie names are not case sensitive 3 Remote server name lype in the name of the server you want to share signals with or click Browse to open a list of servers to select from 4 Behavior a To share IP signals select Dynamic IP A list of available types of IP signals appears in the Signal Compatibility box b To share analog signals select Fixed Analog A list of available types of analog signals appears in the Signal Compatibility box 5 Signal compatibility Select the type of signal you want this server tie to share from the drop down list 6 Click OK The server tie is created and the Add New Server Tie dialog box closes The new server tie appears in the Object Browser C1553M B 4 05 243 EDIT A SERVER TIE 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Server Ties In the right pane double click the server tie you want to change or right click the server tie and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Server Tie Properties dialog box opens Edit Server Tie Properties x Server ties are used to allow video sources from this server to be viewed on video windows or monitors that are controlled by another server The Remote Server Name must refer to the server where you wish to share the video If the behavior is Fixed this Tie must be connected under the connections dialog on both this server and the remote server Server Tie Information Remote Server Name
396. splay MPEG 2 streams in a custom window the window s canvas must be configured to display the MPEG 2 signal type MPEG 4 Enter the maximum number of MPEG 4 streams you want the encoder decoder to transmit at one time The default setting is the maximum number of MPEG 4 streams the encoder decoder is capable of transmitting without multicasting To limit bandwidth usage reduce this setting below the maximum capacity In order to display MPEG 4 streams in a custom window the window s canvas must be configured to display the MPEG 4 signal type NOTE f a NVR300 Series network video recorder is being used to record video from this encoder decoder you should subtract a stream from the total number of streams entered on the Encoding Decoding tab For example if you would normally transmit one MPEG 2 stream and five MPEG 4 streams and you record the MPEG 4 stream then you should enter 1 in the MPEG 2 field and 5 in the MPEG 4 field For instructions on configuring a canvas to display MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 steams refer to Add a New Canvas PelcoNet Multicast This feature is available only if your network supports IP multicasting To configure multicast settings through VMX300 E complete the following steps 1 Click the Mode field and then select the type of stream you want the encoder decoder to multicast from the drop down box If your selection includes MPEG 2 the Number of simultaneous streams MPEG 2 field is automatically set to 999 If yo
397. ssese RR RRIRRRRRRRIRRRRRRRRR RR RR e lr 183 DX9000 Read Property and VallgS zu eh cep or cya ge d Vah ok ertt S xot bc E ERE RIENA uae ecd REPE UTR d we piu e 183 DX8000 Recorder Properties and Values iiiisssiessssesssssese e RRRRRRRRRRRRRERRRRIRRRRRRR RI RII 184 DX8000 Camera Properties and Valles 1 2 4 Rr EX En a ood ewe xe indeed eR Ex Re a du 185 Ao Switther Properties and ValubS i224 aa sacro RR RATER Rd RR E Ra RE REG AAIE ENTI NOA ENR EKRA a 186 ASCII Camera Properties and Values ssssessseeee RR RR hh 186 KBD300A Properties and Values J uu ese doe ec ERE eI HERR EE Deer moe e ed ea diss 187 CM9760 ALM Properties and Values llsssssss RR RII RRRRR RR RIRs 188 Defining Normally Open and Normally Closed Alarm Inputs iisiiiissssssssss eet teen II 188 CM9760 REL Properties and Values iiiiiisssssssssssssses RR RRRIRRRRRRRR RR RRRRRRRRRRR RR RII eel 189 Defining Normally Open and Normally Closed Relay Outputs 2 0 cece eee eee 189 serial Output Device Write Property 2 eet cee RR RR eee 190 IP Device Status Monitor Read Property and Values 2 0 00 RR RR 190 Access Control Device Properties and Values iiiiiisssssssssssseesse RIRs 190 COMM ANSON Opera recite erp Skate E s opes Frames edam pot eR EVEN PROLES eI Pda ET y mE VU qb gas 191 LAJA OS orare cmaewisbtrs RINT MESS EMERMRSUNES MIRI ERATAUNE ERI TERM abades REESE REEE 192 SEREA S Las ern den qd cose ERI Rad adams ask uasa xd Rd aa
398. sting hotlink 1 Load the map the hotlink is on and click the hotlink A small circle appears at each of the hotlink s vertices 2 Right click the vertex you want to delete and select Delete vertex from the pop up menu The vertex is deleted from the hotlink reshaping the hotlink NOTE A hotlink must have at least three vertices The Delete vertex option is not available for a hotlink that has only three vertices DELETE A HOTLINK Deleting a hotlink is irreversible If you delete a hotlink and then change your mind you must add a new hotlink Also note that if you delete a hotlink any script that refers to the hotlink will contain an error To delete a hotlink 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Maps map Hotlinks In the right pane right click the hotlink you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu Alternatively load the map the hotlink is on right click the hotlink and select Delete from the pop up menu A dialog box prompting for confirmation opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the hotlink click Yes The dialog box closes and the selected hotlink is deleted from the map and the Object Browser C1553M B 4 05 173 Labels Labels are free standing descriptive phrases that are placed on maps You can associate a script with a label so that when you click the label the script runs If you omit the script the label is for information only For example you might use a label to identi
399. supervisors gt administrator bwhite operator supervisor useradmin ames Figure 258 Add New Recipient Group Dialog Box 2 Name lype a unique descriptive name for the group you want to add Recipient group names are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Recipient group names are not case sensitive You cannot use the name All Users as it is reserved for the predefined recipient group 3 List recipients Move each user and user group you want to be included in the recipient group from the Available Users lt Groups gt list to the Members list The names of user groups appear between angle brackets To move a single user or group select the user or group you want to move in the Available Users Groups list and click the right arrow button gt To move all the users and groups click the double right arrow button gt gt Use the left arrow button and double left arrow button to move users and groups back to the Available Users Groups list from the Members list To select multiple users and groups hold the Control key down while selecting with the mouse 4 Order list Sort the users and groups in the Members list in the order you want them to be notified of a scheduled action or alarm or event The order is only relevant if you select Send action to first available user group in the alarm event ca
400. switched to an output device such as an external monitor The PelcoNet device s output is connected to the switcher s input NET4001A MATRIX SWITCHER EXTERNAL MONITOR lolx File Edit Tools t Source Device Description Destination Description Codec Output Matrix Switcher Inputi i Matrix Switcher Output1 Monitor Input Matrix Switcher Matrix Switcher Output2 Matrix Switcher Matrix Switcher Mg 3 Sources n 2 Active Connections ry 4 Available Destinations Figure 160 Decoding Video to Switcher C1553M B 4 05 127 DVR CONNECTIONS 128 You must define connections that reflect how each DVR is physically connected within the system If a camera is connected directly to the recorder define a connection from the camera s output to the appropriate input on the recorder The following graphic illustrates a camera connected to Input 1 on a DX8000 File Edit Tools Source D DXS8000 Camera 01 DX8000 Camera 02 DX8000 Camera 03 DXS8000 Camera 04 New DxS000 New Dx8000 New Dx8000 New Dxs000 New DxS000 New Dx8000 Description Output Output Output Output LoopingInputO1 LoopingInput02 LoopingInputO3 LoopingInputO4 LoopingInputOS LoopingInput 6 LoopingInputO LoopingInputOs Destination Description New Dx8000 Input 01 J Analog Video Connections Destinatio New Dx8000 New Dx8000 New Dx8000 lal x a Sul Description Input 02 Input 03 Input 04 I
401. t Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New PTZ Camera dialog box 3 Configure the camera settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box C1553M B 4 05 49 CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Edit Camera Properties Jew PTZ Camera Figure 41 General Tab for PTZ Camera Use the General tab to enter a location name and an optional description The location name is used to identify the device The location name can be a maximum of 50 characters and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of single and double quotation marks Location names are not case sensitive CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Edit Camera Properties Figure 42 Properties Tab for PTZ Camera Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of camera icons viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Click Choose next to each condition to select the color settings for that condition Note that you can configure a different color setting for each camera Unknown state When the camera s CommStatus property equals Offline device icons in the client are the color specified here Normal state When the camera s CommStatus property equals Online device icons in the client are the color specified here Alarm state When the camera s Alarm write property equals True the icon flashes alternately
402. t device VMX300 E provides the following ways for a system operator to send ASCII output to a serial output device Custom button you can define a custom button through the server configuration containing an ASCII string that will be sent to the serial output device when a system operator clicks the button Custom buttons appear in the device s device control dialog box in the VMX300 E client Script you can define a script through the server configuration to send an ASCII string to the device when a system operator runs the script A script can also be associated with a hotlink label alarm or schedule Text tab the system operator can use the text tab on the device s device control dialog box in the VMX300 E client to send an ASCII string to the device This method requires the operator to type each string and does not provide a way to save a string Before you can add a serial output device to the server configuration you must first start the Serial Output driver either on the workstation that the serial output device is connected to or on the network and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 2 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name Device Drivers Serial Output Devices Double click Add New Device The Add New Serial Output Device dialog box appears You can also configure settings after you have added the device to the ser
403. t reset the property to False the next time the access control device sends that alarm the VMX300 E alarm will not be triggered since VMX300 E detects the alarm based on the points value changing from False to True some access control devices send a reset string to indicate that the alarm condition no longer holds In this case you should define a Reset Pattern To Match When VMX300 E matches an incoming string to the Reset Pattern To Match VMX300 E resets the property to False If the access control device does not send a reset string you are responsible for resetting the property in one of the alarm s scripts Q TIP Use the Suppress Subsequent Alarms feature to suppress alarms that are triggered in quick succession Refer to the Alarms and Events section for more information How to Define Alarms Based on Access Control Points Example In this overview example the access control device is named AxCtrl and the access control point is named Point 1 The access control device in this example does not send a reset string Complete the following steps to configure VMX300 E to manage the Point 1 alarm 1 Optional Create a recipient group You can create a unique recipient group that is to be notified when a Point 1 alarm is received or you can use an existing recipient group Refer to the Recipient Groups section for instructions 2 Optional Create an alarm event category You can create a unique alarm event category for th
404. t tag provided by the server type a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the hotlink in scripts For a list of hotlink properties that can be scripted refer to Scripts and Expressions Properties of Objects Normal appearance Adjust the appearance of the hotlink referring to the Preview area of the dialog box to view your selections To set the hotlink s fill color click the button to the immediate right of the background color sample select a color and click OK To adjust the transparency of the hotlink s fill drag the Transparency slider or click the slider bar to move in 5 increments At 100 trans parency the hotlink will not be visible on the map At 096 it will be fully opaque obscuring any items underneath it specify whether you want the hotlink to have a border around it by selecting None or Single Line To set the border s color click the button to the immediate right of the color sample select a color and click OK Mouse hover appearance You can configure a hotlink to change color when the pointer is positioned over it using the Mouse Hover settings To preview the appearance position the pointer over the hotlink in the Preview area of the dialog box To set the fill color click the butt
405. ted the driver will attempt to synchronize to the first selected server in the list If that fails the driver will attempt to synchronize to the next selected server in the list and so on until synchronization succeeds or there are no more selected servers 8 Optional To move a time server to a higher or lower order in the list click the time server and then click the up or down arrow Configure Driver PelcoNet MPEG General Time Server Network Time Servers gl Hostname IP Address Port swisstime ethz ch 37 tick usno navy mil 37 E tock usno navy mil 37 H Add Remove Synchronize every 60 minutes Figure 38 Moving a Time Server 9 Specify how often you want the device driver s clock synchronized with the time server s clock in the Synchronize minutes field 10 Click OK to close the Configure Driver dialog box Remove a Time Server 1 Start the PelcoNet MPEG driver The Configure Driver dialog box appears 2 Click the Time Server tab The Time Server fields appear 3 Click the server you wish to remove from the list and then click Remove 4 Optional repeat step 3 to remove additional time servers as necessary 5 Click OK to close the Configure Driver dialog box C1553M B 4 05 Devices Changes to devices such as adding a new device to the server configuration or deleting a device come into effect immediately You cannot discard your changes by exiting configu
406. tegory or schedule The member at the top of the list is notified first To move a member higher in the list select the member and click Move Up To move a member lower in the list select the member and click Move Down 5 Click OK The Add New Recipient Group dialog box closes and the new group is created The name of the new group appears in the Object Browser 236 C1553M B 4 05 EDIT A RECIPIENT GROUP To change the properties of an existing recipient group 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Recipient Groups In the right pane double click the recipient group you want to change or right click the group and select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Recipient Group Properties dialog box opens Edit Recipient Group Properties Recipient Group Information 4 Name Operators Recipient Group Members Members lt operators gt Available Users Groups lt administrators gt no device control no workspaces gt lt supervisors gt administrator bwhite operator supervisor useradmin lt lt gt gt eS DUES m SN Figure 259 Edit Recipient Group Properties Dialog Box 2 Change the properties of the recipient group as desired Refer to Add a New Recipient Group for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Recipient Group Properties dialog box closes DELETE A RECIPIENT GROUP
407. tem Scripts and expressions are defined as follows Scripts A script is a custom program written within VMX300 E Scripts are used to automate common tasks and to ensure that the correct conditions exist before a particular action takes place Expressions Expressions are used to detect a condition that triggers an action For example when the expression associated with a timer becomes true the timer starts Similarly when the expression associated with an alarm or event becomes true recipients are notified and the alarm event s script is executed Expressions are also used in IF statements You can use the following types of scripts in a VMX300 E system Local Scripts Most scripts are local that is they cannot be run from other scripts This includes scripts associated with the following Labels Hotlinks Timers Prompts Schedules Alarms and events Global scripts Global scripts can be run from other scripts If there is an action you want performed by more than one script define the action in a global script and then call it from the other scripts Refer to Global Scripts for more information VMX300 E provides the following tools to help you develop error free code Context Sensitive Help These are pop up menus that offer valid options for the current position within a statement Refer to Context Sensitive Help for Scripts and Context Sensitive Help for Expressions for more information Express
408. testing an analog server tie you must drag the source device connected to the server tie in Server A s connections Cam1 in Configure a Server Tie step 1 c to the destination device connected to the server tie in Server B s connections Monitor in Configure a Server Tie step 2 c The signal from the source device loads and appears in the destination device ADD A NEW SERVER TIE 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Server Ties Double click Add New Server Tie in the right pane or right click Server Ties in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Server Tie dialog box opens Add New Server Tie Server ties are used to allow video sources from this server to be viewed on video windows or monitors that are controlled by another server The remote server name must refer to the server where you wish to share the video If the behavior is Fixed this tie must be connected under the connections dialog on both this server and the remote server Server Tie Information Name New Server Tie Remote Server Name Remote Server Browse Behavior C Dynamic IP Fixed Analog Signal Compatibility Analog Video cancel Figure 269 Add New Server Tie Dialog Box 2 Name lype in a unique descriptive name for the server tie you want to create Server tie names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit or special character with the exception of
409. the FIP command fails 6 Capture the video displayed in the custom window and create the image file 7 When the image file has been created log in to the FIP server and upload the file If a file with the specified name already exists overwrite it Failure f any step in the FTP process fails the FTP command fails If you want the script to continue executing include an ON ERROR RESUME NEXT command at the beginning of the script Below are some possible causes of failure e No switch path found e The camera is locked by a higher priority user or script and the camera is not at the desired preset e A higher priority user or script took the lock from the FIP script and moved the camera e An operator or script switched a different camera to the window after the FIP switch e An operator or script changed the content type of the FIP window before the capture was taken e hecapture failed possibly because the window has the wrong type of canvas defined for it e hespecified preset does not exist because it has been renamed FTP SCRIPTS Like any script command the FTP command can be used in any type of script Often FTP commands are put in a global script that is run from a schedule s script using the RUN command Putting the FTP commands in a global script allows you to have more than one schedule that calls the script For example you might want to have two schedules one for weekdays and another for weekends so the sequence ca
410. the Session Manager when the alarm or event is triggered This ensures that the operator s current activity is not interrupted e f Sound is selected in the alarm event category the sound plays on the workstations of alarm event recipients If the category has Play sound continuously selected the sound continues to play until the operator turns it off by clicking the Silence Alarm button in the Session Manager e l fthealarm event category has Archive events of this category selected the entry is committed to the archives When the expression that triggers an alarm or event becomes false the icon animation stops the bell hammer stops striking the bell C1553M B 4 05 219 220 If an alarm or event is triggered more than once in quick succession a new entry appears in the recipient s Session Manager each time the alarm or event is triggered If the alarm or event has a sound the sound will play each time the alarm or event is triggered unless you have selected Silence subsequent events OPERATOR REPLAYS The On Operator Replay script runs automatically on the workstation of any recipient who does not already have a Session Manager entry high lighted when the alarm or event is triggered If a recipient already has a highlighted entry in the Session Manager when the alarm or event is triggered the new alarm event entry will not be highlighted This ensures that the operator s current activity is not interrupted The On Operator
411. the camera view to be changed immediately For information on locking DX8000 cameras refer to Devices in the Client Operation Manual preset Go to this user defined preset This value is created when you create the preset Note that equals the preset number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Pattern DontCare When a SET statement with a FOR clause runs a pattern the pattern runs for at least the duration specified in the FOR clause Setting the Pattern property to DontCare releases the camera from having to run the pattern for the specified duration allowing the pattern to be stopped Setting Pattern to DontCare does not itself terminate the pattern it simply enables the pattern to be stopped For information on locking DX8000 cameras refer to Devices in the Client Operation Manual pattern Run this user defined pattern This value is created when you create the pattern Note that equals the pattern number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Alarm True Set Alarm to True to indicate the camera is in an alarm state Camera icons flash in the alarm colors when Alarm is True set Alarm to False to indicate the camera is not in an alarm state Auxiliary Turn on the camera s Auxiliaryi feature Note that f equals the auxiliary number which can range from 1 to the maximum number available in the camera Renaming the auxiliary renames this pr
412. to the server Refer to Clients Custom Windows and Canvases Clients for instructions Add windows For each client add the custom windows the client will have access to Refer to Clients Custom Windows and Canvases Custom Windows for instructions Add canvases For each custom window add the canvases required to view video Refer to Clients Custom Windows and Canvases Canvases for instructions Start device drivers Start each device driver needed to control a device in your system Create a database for each driver when prompted Refer to Starting and Stopping Device Drivers for instructions Add device drivers Add each device driver that you started Add as many drivers as you can using the Autodiscover feature If the autodiscover feature missed any drivers add them using the Add feature Refer to Device Drivers for instructions Add devices Add each device in the system to the appropriate device driver Refer to Devices for instructions Define connections Add connections to reflect the analog connections between devices Refer to Connections for instructions Backup the database Use the Backup utility to create a backup of the server database Refer to Database Utilities for instructions Exit configuration and run server Select File Exit and Run You will be asked whether you want to save the changes you made to the configuration Click Yes TIP f you are adding a number of similar custom windows to the same or differ
413. to view assigned ports c Remote IP Remote Port Protocol The remote device is the device the Pelco PTZ camera is physically connected to If the camera is connected to a PelcoNet device follow the instructions in step 1 If the camera is connected to some other kind of device follow the instructions in step 2 1 PelcoNet Select the PelcoNet protocol from the Protocol drop down box If the PelcoNet device has a user name and password defined in the device settings you will be prompted to enter the user name and password before proceeding Enter the IP address of the PelcoNet device in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box select the port on the PelcoNet device that the camera is connected to Select 1 if the camera is connected to COM 1 on the PelcoNet device Select 2 if the camera is connected to COM 2 This port must be exposed in the PelcoNet device properties configuration For more information on configuring PelcoNet device properties refer to the Add a PelcoNet MPEG Device section 2 Other Select the desired transport protocol from the Protocol drop down box The remote IP is the IP address of the VMX300 E workstation the remote device s driver runs on Enter the remote IP in the Remote IP box In the Remote Port box enter the port the remote device s driver uses to receive commands d Referto Step 3 for instructions on completing the fields in the Miscellaneous section 3 Miscellaneous Configure the following fields
414. tom Window 0 000000 nee RR les 36 Edi a Custom VVIDIBOW uoa cta uae cee ae exar atre SAPE ek EET RIA eed re eke meee erie bx Eua brc E date owes 36 Delete a Custom Window 0 RR RRRRRRRRRRRRR RR RR ls of EON DI COMMERCE PMPRE mm MMA 3 Add a New Canvas General isiissssssssssee RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RR RR A s 37 Add a New Canvas PelcoNet 0 cc cece cece RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RR a a aln 39 Add a New Canvas DX8000 or DX9000 DVR 0 ccc RR RR R III 41 ROETEca c MEMEERIPMETMERETT T V 41 Re Order a Window s Canvases 10 RR els 41 Deletea Canvas ue c cd pcateee s whe ced on beets Cea EnA PODES eek Paden C talea d uu s rca bd b rario clea s arcc donate eder d 41 BITTER DITS ENNIO PT OR EROR M u AARE 42 Adda New Device DIVET MRMMEMEEMENMETTT KX 42 Autodiscover Device Drivers 0 000 00 RR RR RR Re ue EEEE EEEE EEEa 43 Edita Device Driver s Properties 2u osea dose tre Er lo RARE ce ARS eR etc e Pa i pri bob Capp ool Boer dura carie d aa ced ida i 44 MCN S HAIR 44 Configure a PelcoNet MPEG Time Server iiiissssssssssssssese een nnn Rae lis 45 AVI 47 A
415. tters to upper case If a lower case letter is required in the command use its ASCII code For example the command 1Ra is represented as 1R 097 If a command contains single or double quotation marks replace the quotation marks with their ASCII codes 039 for a single quotation mark and 034 for a double quotation mark Table Al Serial Output Device Write Property TYPE OF PROPERTY PROPERTY VALUE INDICATES Write OutputString set OutputString to the device control command you want to send to the serial output device The string must be enclosed in double quotation marks Example f the command to put an infrared camera in black hot mode is BLACK HOT and if the command is terminated by a carriage return lt 013 gt use the following script statement SET SerialOutputCamera OutputString BLACK HOT lt 013 gt Run the script to send the string to the camera IP DEVICE STATUS MONITOR PROPERTY EXPOSED FOR SCRIPTS AND EXPRESSIONS The following table lists the IP device status monitor property that can be used in scripts and expressions Table AJ IP Device Status Monitor Read Property and Values TYPE OF Read Status The device failed to respond when pinged the device is not accessible Do not use this value it is reserved for future use Normal The device responded when pinged the device is accessible The driver was just launched and the device has not yet been pinged it is not known whether the device is accessi
416. tus S SSDP Discovery Ser Enables dis Started Stop the service A Symantec AntiVirus Started Restart the service A System Event Notifi Tracks syst Started SR System Restore Ser Performs s Started Description Sa Task Scheduler Enables a Started Enables support For NetBIOS over TCP IP TCP IP NetBIOS Hel Enables su Started NetBT service and NetBIOS name resolution 84 Telephony Provides T Started amp amp Telnet Enables ar amp amp Terminal Services Allows mult Started amp amp Themes Provides u Started Sa Uninterruptible Pow Manages a Sa Universal Plug and Provides s Sa Upload Manager Manages s Started By VNC Server Started HB uelim Chada Camu Mansane Extended Standard Opens property sheet for the current selection Figure 7 Windows Operating System Services Window Startup Tvpe Log 4 Manual Loc Automatic Lac Automatic Lac Automatic Lac Automatic Start Stop Pause Resume Restart All Tasks b Refresh Properties Help 2 Right click the service named TCP IP NetBIOS Helper and then click Properties The TCP IP NetBIOS Helper Properties dialog box appears TCP IP NetBIOS Helper Properties Local Computer Al xl General Log On Recovery Dependencies Service name LmHosts Display name TCP IP NetBIOS Helper Description Enables support for NetBIOS over TCP IP N
417. u can add a device to the server configuration you must first start the device driver either on the server workstation or on the net work and then add the driver to the server configuration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 L Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name gt Device Drivers gt PelcoNet MPEG Driver gt PelcoNet device Double click lt Add New Device gt The Add New PelcoNet dialog box appears To configure PelcoNet settings after you have added the device to the server configuration right click the device and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New PelcoNet dialog box Configure the device settings as described in the following sections You must configure the PelcoNet settings in VMX300 E to match the PelcoNet device s internal settings For example the Motion read property works only if motion detection is turned on in the device Refer to the appropriate PelcoNet device installation operation manual for information on internal device settings Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box Configure the analog connections between the PelcoNet and other devices in the system Refer to the Connections section CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB 1 Add New PelcoNet 40014 General Properties Encoding Decodina Communications NVR300 Recording Device Name MENRE Description B
418. u delete a client and then change your mind you must add it back as described in Add a New Client e Deleting a client does not affect workspace files 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Clients In either pane right click the client you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the client click Yes The selected client is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted client disappears from the Object Browser CUSTOM WINDOWS Custom windows are viewed through the VMX300 E client They are used for the following functions e Viewing live and archived video e Displaying maps e Displaying an Internet browser e Connecting to a remote computer Any window that will be used to view video must have one or more canvases defined for it that reflect the video display technologies available to the client Refer to Canvases for more information You can configure custom windows so that more than one client can view a particular window simply by giving the window the same name and script tag on each client Any action affecting the window that is executed automatically by a script will affect that window on every client that runs the script Anything done manually by an operator such as dragging a camera to a window will not affect any other operator s window For example suppose you want to alert several different operators when an exit doo
419. uapad aah Hele seeudeanacdte tard bauniadncawddedd Ead vaa pudo wauidqued Sus dun Eid eee 158 HOGUGAV c ERRPCT 158 DESEDITHIZE WOURW det ues eras re Tp ae RE RURSESQEPREEEET SQRISATROPERSCRERLU nee ceteds EUREN Sd ud bg PERI NER NS MR EE 159 MIA TE A E EE EE TTMTT u 159 BUS D ATNCTETKT P 160 Edit a Device s Properties eid acces Super ot ER 3S EEEE ewe dod px ad satu ne Edo d SPURS pu Paca or Ra 160 Edita Devices Local SCIRUS isacsstea ud epe tete Heino shore t eor raa bp tnbus oer DRUEd E ERE Cx PUn TRES pe cure qud ace tet 161 View a Device s Read and Write Properties 0 eee tent enn Re ls 163 B PEIPER sents TTC Tisd aena Ea E e A EN E T E a e aE E EN AAO 164 Place a Device Ilcon ona Map 3eseeturcxor uctor tcec it a e DU S rintre antt LR Ri ACE D e ESAE EEEE 164 Movea Device ICON es s ordin Etre cates age eee ences a bene cee ose redeundi PE ETE M Enc Rei cit PL 164 Scale and Rotate a Device Icon RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRR RR ees 165 Heroye d Device leon WOM a Map useless ok Dresser ab trideni airin o Re pes DE Hebe dose Be pond dex a dor ox 165 Move a Device Label 3x ueccuctretradiets sucre Er SRI RONER CT UaRSeE ERR Pria ied gecesi xt dod sad dea gen exce Bader adici raa 166 obaleq Device Label o Loos esed etw ETC ESATE Dau Read oe Soe ene de eset es ied e dure dud 166 z g2027 3t 0 ae ee a a a a Er a E E a eee 167 Remove a Device label 2062 odes obi ins e
420. ude client soft ware and therefore are called client server workstations A VMX300 system can have only one client server workstation A VMX300 E system can have multiple client server workstations Each VMX300 E system must have at least one workstation with client software This can be the client server workstation described above or you can add a separate workstation with only client software to the system Each VMX300 E system can have multiple client workstations in addition to the client server workstation The system administrator configures the system using the VMX300 E server software and then launches the VMX300 E server into run mode A system operator uses the VMX300 E client software to view and control the area under surveillance The operator can connect to the VMX300 E system from the client server workstation or from a separate client workstation With the VMX300 E version an operator could also connect from another client server workstation DOCUMENTATION RESOURCES This manual is for system administrators responsible for configuring and maintaining VMX300 E servers Instructions on configuring the server and operating the system are also provided in the manual titled Software Guide Basic Configuration and Operation More comprehensive information on operating the VMX300 E system is provided in the VMX300 E Client Operation Manual For hardware installation instructions refer to the VMX300 E Instal
421. ule or alarm or event occurs The All Users recipient group does not appear as in the Object Browser It cannot be edited or deleted It only appears in the Recipients drop down list for schedules and alarm event categories C1553M B 4 05 235 ADD A NEW RECIPIENT GROUP When you create a new recipient group the group automatically appears in the Recipients list of every alarm event category and schedule You can then select that recipient group for any new or existing schedule or alarm or event You can create a new recipient group from scratch or you can base new groups on an existing group To create a new recipient group based on an existing group make a copy of the existing group and then edit the copy Refer to Pop Up Menus in the Appendix for information on using Copy and Paste or Paste Many to make copies of objects To create a new recipient group from scratch 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Recipient Groups Double click Add New Recipient Group in the right pane or right click Recipient Groups in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Recipient Group dialog box opens Add New Hecipient Group Recipient Group Information 4 Name New Recipient Group Recipient Group pooti o Available Users Groups Members administrators gt no device control gt no workspaces gt lt operators gt lt
422. unt the user name and password can be changed The predefined operator account initially belongs to the predefined Users group which grants all Window Content and Client Workspaces permissions but no Administrative permissions Refer to User Groups The Predefined User Group for more information C1553M B 4 05 ADD A NEW USER You can create new users from scratch or you can base new users on an existing user To create a new user based on an existing user make a copy of the existing user and then edit the copy Refer to Pop Up Menus in the Appendix for information on using Copy and Paste or Paste Many to make copies of objects To create a new user from scratch ie C1553M B 4 05 Navigate the Object Browser to project name gt Users Double click lt Add New User gt in the right pane or right click Users in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New User dialog box opens Add New User User Information User Name BobUser ss Password iu RN Confirm Password iu EN E mail Address userBcompany om Full name Bob User 2 0 000 00 Description 2nd shift operator Member of Group s Users Operators Priority 50 1 lowest 99 highest Import 1 E Cancel Figure 189 Add New User Dialog Box User name lype a unique user name for the user you want to add The user name is the name the user types in when logging in to the client User names are at most 50
423. ur selection includes MPEG 4 the Number of simultaneous streams MPEG 4 field is automatically set to 999 This allows an almost unlimited number of simultaneous recipients of the stream 2 Enter the IP multicast group address 3 Ifthe encoder decoder is configured to multicast MPEG 2 streams enter the IP multicast group MPEG 2 port in the MPEG 2 Port field If the encoder decoder is connected the MPEG 2 port number is automatically uploaded from the encoder decoder when you select the mode C1553M B 4 05 4 Ifthe encoder decoder is configured to multicast MPEG 4 streams configure the following settings e Enter the IP multicast group MPEG 4 port in the MPEG 4 Port field e Enter the IP multicast group audio port in the Audio Port field If the encoder decoder is connected these port numbers are automatically uploaded from the encoder decoder when you select the mode If the encoder decoder is connected when you configure the settings in VMX300 E the settings are updated in the encoder decoder immediately Otherwise updating occurs once the encoder decoder is connected To configure multicast settings through the encoder decoder complete the following steps 1 Configure the encoder decoders internal multicast settings refer to the appropriate PelcoNet manual for instructions 2 In VMX300 E click Upload Settings on the Communications tab Refer to the Configure the Communications Tab section Decoding select the stream
424. ur video windows provided by a quad card you must configure four server ties one for each window Q TIP IP server ties enable you to limit bandwidth between servers across wide area networks Several operators viewing remote video at the same time across a WAN use a significant portion of the available bandwidth Server ties limit the bandwidth used for remote video by limiting the number of operators who can view remote video at one time to the number of server ties configured Define scripts Configuring a server tie provides Server B with limited access to Server As devices for scripting Specifically Server B can use the SET command to load the signal from a device configured on Server A For example to automatically load video from Server As Cam1 into server B s Window1 use the following statement SET Window1 LiveSource Cam1_RS Output server B has no access to the read and write properties of devices configured on Server A The ability to script signal loading results from adding Server As remote server driver to the Server B configuration Server As devices appear as sources in the Object Browser Refer to Configure a Server Tie for instructions on adding a remote server driver C1553M B 4 05 By default a remote device s script tag ends with RS to indicate Remote Server To edit the device s script tag edit the devices local Object Browser xi E Corway Facility Alarms and Events Clients Connections Device Drivers
425. uration Refer to the Device Drivers section for instructions 1 Navigate the Object Browser tree to project name gt Device Drivers gt Access Control Driver gt Devices 2 Double click lt Add New Device gt The Add New Device dialog box opens You can also configure settings after you have added the device to the server configuration Right click the device and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box opens which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New Device dialog box 3 Configure the device settings as described in the following sections 4 Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box 5 Configure alarms that use the access control points as the trigger Refer to Define Alarms Based on Access Control Points for instructions C1553M B 4 05 111 CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Edit Access Control Properties General Properties Communications Access Control Points Pattern Matching Location New Access Control System Description Figure 135 General Tab for an Access Control Device Use the General tab to enter a location name and an optional description The location name can be a maximum of 31 characters You cannot use single or double quotation marks in a name but you can use any other letter digit or special character Location names are not case sensitive The description appears in the Object Browser beside the device name CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Ed
426. ure you position the pointer over the icon not the label before right clicking vMX300 Enterprise Configuration 377 Licenses Remaining 41 Days Remaining Bl x File View Zoom Tools Help Object Browser x BliCorway Facility Alarms and Events C Alarms and Events Corway Facility Clients LL Clients Administration Connections m Connections Device Drivers Cl Device Drivers FTP Sites BB Global Scripts Global Scripts Global Tags Labels m Remove Logs Don i MEAD OU 0 Prompts L Recipient Groups L Recipient Groups LT LE LE To Schedules LI Schedules Server Ties Cd server Ties Timers C Timers User Groups C user Groups Users CB users Edit Local Settings Move Figure 198 Scaling and Rotating an Icon 2 Move the pointer away from the icon to make the icon larger Move the pointer towards the center of the icon to make the Icon smaller Move the pointer in a circle around the icon to change the orientation of the icon 3 When the device icon is sized and oriented the way you want it press the left mouse button The icon s size and orientation freeze Q TIP Hold the Shift key down while scaling and rotating to constrain the scaling to 5 unit increments and the rotation to 15 increments NOTE Scaling a device icon does not affect the size of the devices label Refer to Scale a Device Label for information on scaling the label REMOVE A DEVICE ICON FR
427. utable b Service To run the device driver as a service click Install the driver as a service DX8000 NOTE The option to run the DX8000 driver as a service is not available at this time When starting the DX8000 driver you must click Start the driver as an executable 6 Some device drivers support additional options For more information on a particular driver s options refer to Device Drivers for that driver 7 Click OK The Configure Driver dialog box closes If you are running the driver as a service start the driver through the Windows Control Panel Administrative Tools or restart the computer the driver is installed on An icon representing the driver appears in the Windows system tray indicating that the driver is running Q TIP To check whether a device driver is running log in to configuration mode edit the device driver and click Check Now While the server is checking the buttons in the dialog box are unavailable If the server succeeds in finding a driver the buttons become available again If no driver is found the server displays a warning message Refer to Edit a Device Drivers Properties for more information SHUT DOWN A DEVICE DRIVER 1 Right click the driver icon in the Windows system tray and select Exit from the pop up menu You are prompted to confirm 2 Ifyou are sure you want to shut down the driver click Yes The driver shuts down NOTE If the device driver is running as a service you can als
428. value gt Set the hotlink property to the specified value Refer to Properties of Objects for valid properties and values SET lt label tag gt lt property name gt lt value gt Set the label property to the specified value Refer to Properties of Objects for valid properties and values SET variable identifier gt lt property Set the local variable property to the specified value name gt lt value gt Refer to Properties of Objects for valid properties and values SET RecipientObject lt window tag set the recipient object to the specified custom window SET RecipientObject device tag name oet the recipient object to the specified video input device SET RecipientObject property name value Set the recipient object to the specified value Refer to Properties of Objects for valid properties and values SET window tag gt lt property name value Set the custom window property to the specified value Refer to Properties of Objects for valid properties and values VAR variable identifier Declare a local Boolean variable The same as DIM Q TIP Use RecipientObject to implement sequences For example if you have a custom window called window1 and analog video from cameras camera1 camera2 etc implement a sequence as follows SET RecipientObject window1 SET RecipientObject LiveSource camera1 analogvideo PAUSE 5 SET RecipientObject LiveSource camera2 analogvideo PAUSE 5 C1553M B 4 05 MECHA
429. vases Use Copy and Paste Many to create multiple copies of the client Each copy of the client will have the identical windows and canvases defined for it Then edit the copies one at a time to customize them as needed This technique is particularly useful for clients that will have access to the same custom windows Refer to Pop Up Menus in the Appendix for detailed instructions on using Copy and Paste Many CLIENTS Adding an operator s computer to the server configuration allows that workstation to connect to the server When you add a client to the server configuration you can e Supply a default workspace for the client e Makecustom windows available on the client Refer to Workspaces for information on creating a default workspace Refer to Custom Windows for information on configuring custom windows WORKSPACES Workspaces control the appearance of the VMX300 E client In particular they control which windows are displayed and their size position and content You can create a default workspace that loads automatically on a specified client when an operator logs in to that client Operators with permission to work with workspaces can override the default by setting preferences to load a workspace of their choosing automatically or by explicitly opening a workspace once they have logged in Refer to User Groups for information on workspace permissions To create a workspace you must log in to the VMX300 E client under a user grou
430. ve an elevator control system that indicates when each elevator moves to a different floor You can program the elevator control system to send an ASCII string to the VMX whenever an elevator arrives on the first floor The ASCII string can trigger the VMX system to switch a camera to track elevator activity on that floor HOW THE ACCESS CONTROL DRIVER WORKS When an alarm is received by an access control device the device transmits a serial string representing the alarm VMX300 E attempts to match the alarm string to the access control information configured for that device If a match is made one of the device s read properties is set to True which then triggers a VMX300 E alarm Two conditions must hold for VMX300 E to manage an alarm sent by an access control device e he point number in the alarm string must be the same as the number of a point specified on the Access Control Points tab Refer to Configure Access Control Points for instructions e o0me portion of the alarm string must match the Pattern To Match defined on the Pattern Matching tab Refer to Configure Pattern Matching for Incoming Alarm Strings for instructions In addition to configuring the access control information you must create the alarms and events that are triggered when a match is made Refer to Define Alarms Based on Access Control Points for instructions After the VMX300 E alarm has been triggered the point s property must be reset to False Some acces
431. ve the camera to the preset When the delay time has elapsed capture the window s video Upload the captured image to the FTP server saving it under the specified file name Q TIP Use context sensitive help or the script wizard to help you write FTP statements Refer to Scripts and Expressions Mechanics of Editing Scripts and Expressions for more information Window he window must have the correct canvas defined for it Refer to Clients Custom Windows and Canvases Canvases for more information If the client that the window is defined on is running but the window is closed VMX300 E automatically opens the window when the FIP statement executes Q TIP It is recommended that you define only one canvas for any window you are using for FIP image capture If you need to capture more than one type of video create a window for each type Preset Sending the camera to a preset is optional If you want to omit the preset either enter NoPreset or omit the preset For example the following FIP statements are equivalent and valid FIP Window1 ReceptionCamera NoPreset 1 Corway Web Site reception pg FIP Window1 ReceptionCamera 1 Corway Web Site reception jpg Note that if you omit NoPreset you still need to include the comma so the camera tag is followed by two commas Delay The intent of the delay is to give the camera time to move to the preset before taking the capture Make sure the delay is long enough to allow the ca
432. vent action is SET Window1 LiveSource Cam RS Output Q TIP Use context sensitive help or the script wizard to write scripts involving remote servers VMX300 E will provide you with a pop up list of script tags referring to remote servers and their devices and alarms in context Refer to Scripts and Expressions Mechanics of Editing Scripts and Expressions for more information PREVENT OTHER SERVERS FROM MONOPOLIZING YOUR TIES In a situation in which three or more servers have three way server ties it is possible for two of the servers to monopolize the other server s ties For example consider the scenario depicted in the following illustration Aci gt AC BC1 J dIWE e Figure 263 Sample Three way Server Tie Scenario Suppose demand for shared video between servers A and C is very heavy The first two operators who access shared video between servers A and C will be allocated server ties AC1 and AC2 When a third operator accesses shared video no more direct paths between the two servers are available so a path through server B would be used such as AB1 BC1 effectively tying up two of server B s server ties Now if a fourth operator accesses shared video between servers A and C the remaining path through server B AB2 BC2 would be used leaving no free paths for server B s operators to use to access shared video You can prevent other servers from using your ties to share signals w
433. ver configuration Right click the device and then select Edit from the pop up menu The Edit Properties dialog box appears which contains the same tabs and fields as the Add New Serial Output Device dialog box Configure the device settings as described in the following sections Click OK to close the Add New Device dialog box CONFIGURE THE GENERAL TAB Add New Serial Output Device General Properties Communications Custom Buttons Location New Serial Output Device Description Figure 125 General Tab for a Serial Output Device Use the General tab to name and describe the serial output device The device name can be a maximum of 50 characters You cannot use single or double quotation marks in a name but you can use any other letter digit or special character Device names are not case sensitive The optional description appears in the Object Browser beside the device name 104 C1553M B 4 05 CONFIGURE THE PROPERTIES TAB Add New Serial Output Device General Properties Communications Custom Buttons pi Animation Device in unknown state Choose Device in normal state Choose Device in alarm state Color 1 Choose Device in alarm state Color 2 Choose ceca Figure 126 Properties Tab for a Serial Output Device Use the Properties tab to configure the animation settings of the device icon viewed on maps in the VMX300 E client Cl
434. vigate the Object Browser to project name Global Tags Double click Add New Global Tag in the right pane or right click Global Tags in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Global Tag dialog box opens Add New Global Tag E3 Tag Information Script Tag New Global Tag Initial value Uninitialized C True C False 1 Cancel Figure 228 Add New Global Tag Dialog Box 2 Script tag f you do not want to use the script tag provided by the server type in a unique meaningful tag Script tags are at most 50 characters long They can include any letter digit or the underscore character but cannot begin with a digit They cannot contain spaces or special characters Tags are not case sensitive Use the script tag to refer to the global tag in scripts and expressions For a list of global tag properties that can be scripted refer to Scripts and Expressions Properties of Objects 3 Initial value Select an initial value for the global tag by selecting Uninitialized True or False A global tag that is set to True is equal to 1 A global tag that is set to False is equal to 0 4 Click OK The Add New Global Tag dialog box closes and the new global tag is created The script tag and initial value of the new global tag appear in the right pane of the Object Browser EDIT A GLOBAL TAG NOTE f you change the script tag for a global tag any scripts that refer to the global tag will contain
435. want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the timer click Yes The selected timer is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The name of the deleted timer disappears from the Object Browser C1553M B 4 05 213 Schedules ochedules allow you to define scripts that execute at a scheduled time If you want you can specify a recipient group to be notified when the scheduled action executes Refer to Recipient Groups for instructions on creating a recipient group ADD A NEW SCHEDULE 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Schedules Double click Add New Schedule in the right pane or right click Schedules in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Schedule dialog box opens Add New Scheduled Action m Schedule Information Schedule Name hew Scheduled Action Enabled Disabled r Frequency C Monthly C Sun Rise Set By Minutes C Weekly Hourly C By Seconds C Daily Which Days Once m Start at 4 41 51 PM gt on 6 j 9 2003 m Holidays Don t run schedule on holidays Set Holidays Scheduled Action Edit Priority 50 gt Recipients lt none gt Send action to first available user araup Ih no response in m seconds Move bo next Balade Usety Grau C Send action to all available users araups SN Figure 237 Add New
436. want to open the lobby door Prompt Buttons Button No 1 Button No 2 Button No 3 Button Mo 4 C c h C 5 Preview Co w Cancel Figure 234 Edit Prompt Properties Dialog Box 2 Change properties of the prompt as desired Refer to Add a New Prompt for information on specific properties 3 Click OK The Edit Prompt Properties dialog box closes NOTE f you edit a script associated with a prompt button make it available in its updated form by saving the server configuration before attempting to run the script C1553M B 4 05 209 DELETE A PROMPT Deleting a prompt is irreversible If you delete a prompt and then change your mind you must add a new prompt Also note that if you delete a prompt any script that refers to it will contain an error 1 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Prompts In the right pane right click the prompt you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu The Confirm dialog box opens 2 Ifyou are sure you want to delete the prompt click Yes The selected prompt is deleted and the Confirm dialog box closes The deleted prompt disappears from the Object Browser 210 C1553M B 4 05 Timers Timers are used to delay an action by a predetermined length of time Timers themselves cannot run scripts but you can use a timer to trigger a script to run Expression Fvery timer has an expression associated with it Whenever something happens that could
437. will Pelco be liable for any special incidental or consequential damages including loss of use loss of profit and claims of third parties however caused whether by the negligence of Pelco or otherwise The above warranty provides the Dealer with specific legal rights The Dealer may also have additional rights which are subject to variation from state to state RETURN INFORMATION If a warranty repair is required the Dealer must contact Pelco at 800 289 9100 or 559 292 1981 to obtain a Repair Authorization number RA and provide the following information 1 Model and serial number 2 Date of shipment PO number Sales Order number or Pelco invoice number 3 Details of the defect or problem If there is a dispute regarding the warranty of a product which does not fall under the warranty conditions stated above please include a written explanation with the product when returned Method of return shipment shall be the same or equal to the method by which the item was received by Pelco RETURNS In order to expedite parts returned to the factory for repair or credit please call the factory at 800 289 9100 or 559 292 1981 to obtain an authorization number CA number if returned for credit and RA number if returned for repair All merchandise returned for credit may be subject to a 20 restocking and refurbishing charge Goods returned for repair or credit should be clearly identified with the assigned CA or RA number
438. with device number 20 However these two devices can be mapped to the same keyboard number so the operator enters the same number on the keyboard for the two devices Refer to the Configure the Logical Mapping Tab section for more information 3 Click OK The Edit Local Settings dialog box closes CONFIGURE THE LOGICAL MAPPING TAB The Logical Mapping tab is used to map the device numbers configured in VMX300 E to the numbers that an operator enters on the keyboard to control cameras and monitors Example If you map Device 5 to Keyboard 2 as shown in the following figure then an operator at that keyboard can call up Camera 2 without having to remember the camera name or device number Pelco KBD300 Keyboard Properties x General Communications Logical Mapping Device Count 2 zi a Figure 104 Logical Mapping Tab for KBD300 Refer to the Enable Camera and Monitor Device Numbers section for instructions on assigning device numbers to cameras and monitors in VMX300 E To configure the logical number mappings for a keyboard complete the following steps 1 Click the appropriate device type either Camera or Monitor in the Device Type box 2 Enter the number of devices that you want to be able to control through this keyboard In the Device Count field and then click Apply The number of rows in the logical mapping table for the device is set to the number that you enter in the Device Count field For example i
439. xpired state until another event occurs which makes the expression false Table AP summarizes how the Value property is affected by the expression and timer values Table AP Timer Property and Value VALUE Rest NE NK Eu value m 1 9 Use the Value property to trigger other actions For example you might define an alarm that alerts an operator when communications with a camera have been lost for 10 seconds The timer s expression is Camera1 CommLoss True The alarm s expression Is CommLossDelayTimer Value True When Camera loses communications the timer s expression becomes true and the timer starts to count down from 10 When the timer reaches zero the timer s Value property becomes true which makes the alarm s expression true triggering the alarm C1553M B 4 05 211 ADD A NEW TIMER 212 Navigate the Object Browser to project name Timers Double click Add New Timer in the right pane or right click Timers in the left pane and select Add New from the pop up menu The Add New Timer dialog box opens Add New Timer Timer Information Name New Timer Script Tag New Timer Timer Details Start timer when the Following expression is true es e Enable timer output after fio seconds cmd Figure 235 Add New Timer Dialog Box Name Type a unique name for the timer you want to add Timer names are at most 50 characters long and can include any letter digit
440. y E b Figure 254 Changing Icon Size 2 Move the pointer away from the alarm event icon to make the icon larger Move the pointer towards the center of the icon to make it smaller 3 When the icon is sized the way you want it press the left mouse button The icons size freezes Q TIP Hold the Shift key down while scaling to constrain the scaling to 5 unit increments NOTE Scaling an alarm event icon does not affect the size of the label Refer to Scale an Alarm Event Label for information on scaling the label REMOVE AN ALARM EVENT ICON FROM A MAP Removing an alarm event icon from a map does not affect any other icons for that alarm or event whether they are on the same map or another map nor does it affect the alarm or event in the Object Browser If you change your mind after removing an alarm event icon from a map you can add it back as described in Place an Alarm Event Icon on a Map Q TIP You do not need to have an alarm event icon on a map in order for the alarm or event to function Notification sounds scripts and archiving all function independently of the icon The icons role is to provide operators with a visual alert With the desired map loaded right click the alarm event icon you want to remove and select Remove from the pop up menu Make sure you position the pointer over the icon not the label before right clicking The icon disappears from the map If it is displayed the alarm event label also is remov
441. y the days you do not want the action to execute The Edit Holidays dialog box opens Edit Holidays Holidays Friday December 26 2003 Thursday December 25 2003 Friday December 26 2003 Thursday January 01 2004 OK Cancel Figure 240 Edit Holidays Dialog Box Click the down arrow to the right of the date to open the drop down calendar Use the left and right arrows to select the month in the drop down calendar then select a date by clicking it Today s date is circled in red Click Add to add the date in the date box to the list of holidays To remove a date from the list select the date and click Remove Click OK once you have specified all the days you want to prevent the action from executing Scheduled action Click Edit to define the scheduled action The Edit Script dialog box opens Type the script actions directly into the Action column or use the script wizard to help you write the script For more information on writing scripts refer to Scripts and Expressions A schedules script runs on the client of any operator specified in the schedule s recipient group provided the client is running and the operator is logged in when the script executes If the client is not running or the operator is not logged in or if no recipients are specified in the schedule VMX300 E runs as much of the script as possible namely statements that do not require a recipient such as a statement that sets the v

Pelco VMX300 Server User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents